Handleiding Toyota Land Cruiser V8 200 - 2013 (pagina 1 van 720) (Engels)

604288

Verklein

Vergroot

Pagina terug

1/720

Pagina verder

TABLE OF CONTENTS

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Before driving

Adjusting and operating features such as door locks,

mirrors, and steering column

When driving

Driving, stopping and safe-driving information

Interior features

Air conditioning and audio systems, as well as other in-

terior features for a comfortable driving experience

Maintenance and

care

Cleaning and protecting your vehicle, performing do-it-

yourself maintenance, and maintenance information

When trouble

arises

What to do if the vehicle needs to be towed, gets a flat

tire, or is involved in an accident

Vehicle specifi-

cations

Detailed vehicle information

Index

Alphabetical listing of information contained in this man-

ual

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-1. Key information

Keys...................................... 38

1-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors

Smart entry &

start system ........................ 40

Wireless remote control ........ 56

Side doors............................. 65

Back door.............................. 68

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering

wheel)

Front seats............................ 80

Rear seats ............................ 83

Driving position memory

system ................................ 91

Head restraints ..................... 96

Seat belts............................ 100

Steering wheel .................... 106

Anti-glare inside rear view

mirror ................................ 109

Outside rear view mirrors.... 112

1-4. Opening and closing the

windows and moon roof

Power windows .................. 115

Moon roof ........................... 119

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank

cap ................................... 123

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer

system.............................. 127

Double locking system ....... 132

Alarm.................................. 134

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture....... 142

SRS airbags ....................... 144

Child restraint systems....... 158

Installing child restraints..... 167

Airbag manual on-off

system.............................. 179

Before driving

For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s

Manual” for information regarding the equipment listed below.

• Navigation system

• Air conditioning

• Windshield wiper de-icer

• Audio/video system

• Toyota parking assist monitor

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle .............. 182

Engine (ignition) switch....... 194

Automatic transmission....... 199

Turn signal lever ................. 205

Parking brake...................... 206

Horn .................................... 207

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters ............ 208

Indicators and warning

lights ................................. 213

Multi-information display ..... 218

2-3. Operating the lights and

wipers

Headlight switch.................. 225

Automatic High Beam ......... 229

Fog light switch ................... 236

Windshield wipers and

washer .............................. 238

Rear window wiper and

washer .............................. 244

Headlight cleaner switch..... 245

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control ..................... 246

Toyota parking

assist-sensor.................... 250

4-Wheel AHC (Active

Height Control

Suspension) ..................... 261

AVS (Adaptive Variable

Suspension system)......... 271

Four-wheel drive system .... 272

Crawl Control (with Turn

Assist function)................. 277

Multi-terrain Select ............. 283

Multi-terrain Monitor ........... 289

Driving assist systems........ 315

PCS (Pre-Crash Safety)..... 323

DPF (Diesel Particulate

Filter) system ................... 324

2-5. Driving information

Off-road precautions .......... 329

Cargo and luggage............. 333

Winter driving tips............... 335

Trailer towing...................... 339

When driving

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-1. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Front air conditioning

system .............................. 354

Rear air conditioning

system .............................. 368

Heater idle up switch .......... 372

Power heater ...................... 373

Rear window and outside

rear view mirror

defoggers.......................... 374

Windshield wiper de-icer..... 376

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types............. 379

Using the radio.................... 381

Using the CD player............ 385

Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs........................ 392

Operating an iPod............... 399

Operating a

USB memory .................... 407

Optimal use of the

audio system .................... 415

Using the AUX port ............. 417

Using the steering

switches............................ 418

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Bluetooth

audio system.... 421

Using the Bluetooth

audio system.................... 426

Operating a Bluetooth

enabled portable

player ............................... 429

Setting up a Bluetooth

enabled portable

player ............................... 432

Bluetooth

audio system

setup ................................ 436

3-4. Using the hands-free system

(for cellular phone)

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone) ........... 437

Using the hands-free

system.............................. 442

Making a phone call ........... 449

Setting a cellular phone...... 453

Security and system

setup ................................ 457

Using the phone book ........ 461

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list ................. 467

• Interior lights .................... 468

• Personal lights ................. 469

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features ....... 471

• Glove box ......................... 472

• Console box...................... 473

• Overhead console ............ 474

• Cup holders ...................... 475

• Bottle holders.................... 477

• Card holder....................... 479

• Auxiliary boxes ................. 479

3-7. Other interior features

Cool box.............................. 480

Sun visors ........................... 482

Vanity mirror ....................... 483

Clock................................... 484

Outside temperature

display .............................. 485

Ashtrays.............................. 487

Cigarette lighter .................. 489

Power outlet........................ 490

Heated steering wheel ........ 493

Seat heaters and

ventilators ......................... 495

Armrest ............................... 499

Assist grips ......................... 500

Floor mats........................... 501

Luggage compartment

features............................. 503

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle exterior................. 508

Cleaning and protecting the

vehicle interior.................. 511

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements .................... 514

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ...................... 517

Hood................................... 521

Engine compartment .......... 522

Tires ................................... 539

Tire inflation pressure......... 542

Wheels ............................... 544

Air conditioning filter........... 546

Electronic key battery......... 549

Checking and replacing

fuses ................................ 552

Light bulbs.......................... 573

Maintenance and care

TABLE OF CONTENTS Index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers ............ 592

If your vehicle needs to be

towed ................................ 593

If you think something is

wrong................................ 599

Fuel pump shut off system

(gasoline engine only) ...... 600

5-2. Steps to take in an

emergency

If a warning light turns on

or a warning buzzer

sounds... .......................... 601

If a warning message is

displayed .......................... 607

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with a standard

spare tire) ......................... 624

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with an

emergency tire puncture

repair kit)........................... 638

If the engine will not start .... 651

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ................... 653

If you lose your keys ........... 654

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ......... 655

If the battery is

discharged ....................... 658

If your vehicle overheats .... 663

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls (diesel

engine only) ..................... 667

If the vehicle becomes

stuck................................. 668

If your vehicle has to

be stopped in an

emergency ....................... 670

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.) ........... 674

Fuel information ................. 692

6-2. Customization

Customizable features ....... 695

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize................. 704

When trouble arises

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Abbreviation list................ 706

Alphabetical index ............ 707

What to do if... .................. 717

Index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Exterior

Headlights

Front position lights and

daytime running lights

Front turn signal lights

P. 225

P. 205

Front fog lights

P. 236

Side turn signal

lights

P. 205

Hood

P. 521

Windshield wipers

P. 238

Moon roof

P. 119

Outside rear view mirrors

P. 112

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: If equipped

Tires

Rotation

Replacement

Inflation pressure

P. 539

P. 624

P. 542

Back door

P. 68

Side doors

P. 65

Fuel filler door

P. 123

Rear turn signal lights

P. 205

Rear window wiper

P. 244

Rear window defogger

P. 374

License plate lights

P. 225

Stop/tail lights

P. 225

Rear fog lights

P. 236

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Power window switches

P. 115

Seat belts

P. 100

SRS front

passenger

airbag

P. 144

SRS driver airbag

P. 144

Head restraints

P. 96

Console box

Cool box



P. 473

P. 480

Armrest

P. 499

Front seats

P. 80

SRS side airbags

P. 144

Floor mat

P. 501

Rear air conditioning controls

Power outlet

P. 368

P. 490

Rear seats

P. 83

Ashtray

P. 487

Airbag manual on-off

switch

P. 179

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

ITYPC004

Anti-glare inside

rear view mirror

P. 109

Moon roof switch

P. 119

Interior light

P. 468

Vanity mirrors

P. 483

Sun visors*

P. 482

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 144

Overhead console

P. 474

Personal lights

Interior light

P. 469

P. 468

Personal lights

P. 469

Interior light

P. 468

Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor cancel switch

P. 136

Assist grips

P. 500

Assist grips

P. 500

: If equipped

*: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in

front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the

CHILD can occur. (P. 177)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

SET

Window lock switch

P. 115

Power window switches

P. 115

Door lock switch

P. 65

Driving position memory switches

P. 91

Inside lock button

P. 65

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: If equipped

*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

ECT switch

P. 201

Shift lever

P. 199

“SHIFT LOCK” button

P. 653

Crawl Control switch

Multi-terrain Select mode

select switch

P. 277

P. 283

Ashtray

P. 487

Power outlet

P. 490

Cigarette lighter

P. 489

Parking brake lever

P. 206

AUX port*

USB port*

P. 417

P. 399, 407

Front seat heater/ventilator

switch



P. 495

Height select/height control

OFF switches



P. 261

AVS switch

P. 271

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 225

P. 205

P. 236

Windshield wipers and washer

switch

Rear window wiper and washer

switch

P. 238

P. 244

Gauges and meters

Multi-information display

P. 208

P. 218

SRS knee airbags

P. 144

Fuel filler door opener

P. 123

Glove box

P. 472

Hood opener

P. 521

Cup holders

P. 475

Tilt and telescopic steering lock

release lever



P. 106

Bottle holder

P. 477

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Without navigation system

: If equipped

Security indicator

light

P. 127, 134

Air conditioning

system

P. 354

Clock

P. 484

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

P. 604

“PASSENGER AIR BAG”

indicator

P. 179

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 592

Audio system

P. 379

Outside temperature

display

P. 485

Rear window defogger

switch

P. 374

Rear air conditioning control

switch



P. 362

Windshield wiper

de-icer switch



P. 376

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

With navigation system

Navigation system*

Clock

Front passenger’s

seat belt reminder

light

P. 604

Audio system*

Air conditioning

system*

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 592

Security indicator

light

P. 127, 134

Outside temperature display

P. 485

Rear window

defogger switch

P. 374

“PASSENGER AIR BAG”

indicator

P. 179

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: If equipped

*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

DISP switch

P. 220

Cruise control switch

P. 246

Telephone switches*

P. 443

Talk switch*

P. 443

Audio remote controls

(steering switches)



P. 418

Horn

P. 207

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Left-hand drive vehicles)

Engine (ignition) switch

P. 194

Four-wheel drive control switch

P. 272

Power heater switch

Heater idle up switch



P. 373

P. 372

Power back door main

switch



P. 68

VIEW switch

P. 289

Power back door switch

P. 68

DPF switch

P. 324

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: If equipped

Headlight cleaner switch

P. 245

Outside rear view mirror control

switches

P. 112

Instrument cluster light control knob

P. 211

Odometer/trip meter display

change button

P. 209

Toyota parking assist-sensor

switch



P. 250

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch

P. 157

Tilt and telescopic steering

control switch



P. 106

Card holder

P. 479

Center differential lock/unlock

switch

P. 272

VSC OFF switch

P. 315

Heated steering wheel switch

P. 493

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Power window switches

P. 115

Seat belts

P. 100

SRS front passenger

airbag

P. 144

SRS driver airbag

P. 144

Head restraints

P. 96

Armrest

P. 499

Front seats

P. 80

SRS side airbags

P. 144

Ashtray

P. 487

Floor mat

P. 501

Rear seats

P. 83

Rear air conditioning controls

Power outlet



P. 368

P. 490

Console box

Cool box



P. 473

P. 480

Airbag manual on-off

switch

P. 179

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

ITYPC073

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

P. 109

Moon roof switch

P. 119

Vanity mirrors

P. 483

Sun visors*

P. 482

SRS curtain shield airbags

P. 144

Overhead console

P. 474

Personal lights

Interior light

P. 469

P. 468

Personal lights

P. 469

Interior light

P. 468

Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor

cancel switch

P. 136

Assist grips

P. 500

Assist grips

P. 500

: If equipped

*: NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in

front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the

CHILD can occur. (P. 177)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Window lock switch

P. 115

Power window switches

P. 115

Door lock switch

P. 65

Pictorial index

Interior

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Driving position memory switches

P. 91

Inside lock button

P. 65

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: If equipped

*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Front seat heater/ventilator

switch

P. 495

“SHIFT LOCK”

button

P. 653

Shift lever

P. 199

Parking brake lever

P. 206

Ashtray

P. 487

Power outlet

P. 490

Cigarette lighter

P. 489

AUX port*

USB port*

P. 417

P. 399, 407

Height select/height control

OFF switches



P. 261

AVS switch

P. 271

Crawl Control switch

P. 277

ECT switch

P. 201

Multi-terrain Select mode select switch

P. 283

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Headlight switch

Turn signal lever

Fog light switch

P. 225

P. 205

P. 236

Gauges and meters

Multi-information display

P. 208

P. 218

Cup holders

P. 475

Hood opener

P. 521

Tilt and telescopic steering control switch

Tilt and telescopic steering control lever



P. 106

SRS knee airbags

P. 144

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Glove box

P. 472

Windshield wipers and washer switch

Rear window wiper and washer switch

P. 238

P. 244

Fuel filler door

opener

P. 123

Bottle holder

P. 477

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Security indicator light

P. 127, 134

Without navigation system

Clock

P. 484

Air conditioning

system

P. 354

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light

P. 604

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 592

“PASSENGER AIR BAG”

indicator

P. 179

Audio system

P. 379

Windshield wiper de-icer

switch

P. 376

Rear air conditioning control

switch



P. 362

Outside

temperature

display

P. 485

Rear window defogger switch

P. 374

: If equipped

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

With navigation system

Navigation system*

Clock*

Front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

P. 604

Audio system*

Air conditioning

system

Emergency flasher

switch

P. 592

Security indicator

light

P. 127, 134

Outside temperature display

P. 485

Rear window

defogger switch

P. 374

“PASSENGER AIR BAG”

indicator

P. 179

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: If equipped

*: Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

DISP switch

P. 220

Telephone switches*

P. 443

Talk switch*

P. 443

Audio remote controls

(steering switches)



P. 418

Cruise control switch

P. 246

Horn

P. 207

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Instrument panel

(Right-hand drive vehicles)

Engine (ignition) switch

P. 194

Four-wheel drive

control switch

P. 272

Power heater

switch



Heater idle up

switch



P. 373

P. 372

VIEW switch

P. 289

Power back door

switch



P. 68

Power back door main switch

P. 68

DPF switch

P. 324

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: If equipped

Outside rear view mirror control switches

P. 112

Headlight cleaner switch

P. 245

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch

P. 157

Odometer/trip meter display change button

P. 209

Instrument cluster light control knob

P. 211

Card holder

P. 479

Toyota parking assist-sensor

switch



P. 250

Center differential lock/unlock

switch

P. 272

VSC OFF switch

P. 315

Heated steering wheel switch

P. 493

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pictorial index

Luggage compartment

Power back door switch

P. 68

Tools

P. 624

Power outlet

P. 490

Seatback angle lever

P. 83

Warning reflector holder

P. 503

Head restraint angle lever

P. 96

Seatback handles

P. 86

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: If equipped

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

For your information

Main Owner’s Manual

Please note that this manual covers all models and all equipment, including

options. Therefore, you may find some explanations for equipment not

installed on your vehicle.

All specifications provided in this manual are current at the time of printing.

However, because of the Toyota policy of continual product improvement, we

reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Depending on specifications, the vehicle shown in the illustrations may differ

from your vehicle in terms of equipment.

Accessories, spare parts and modification of your Toyota

Both genuine Toyota and a wide variety of other spare parts and accessories

for Toyota vehicles are currently available on the market. Should it be

determined that any of the genuine Toyota parts or accessories supplied with

the vehicle need to be replaced, Toyota Motor Corporation recommends that

genuine Toyota parts or accessories, be used to replace them. Other parts or

accessories of matching quality can also be used. Toyota cannot accept any

liability or guarantee spare parts and accessories which are not genuine

Toyota products, nor for replacement or installation involving such parts. In

addition, damage or performance problems resulting from the use of non-

genuine Toyota spare parts or accessories may not be covered under

warranty.

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Installation of an RF-transmitter system

The installation of an RF-transmitter system in your vehicle could affect elec-

tronic systems such as:

 Multiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel injection

system

 Cruise control system

 Anti-lock brake system

 SRS airbag system

 Seat belt pretensioner system

Be sure to check with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional for precautionary measures or spe-

cial instructions regarding installation of an RF-transmitter system.

Further information regarding frequency bands, power levels, antenna posi-

tions and installation provisions for the installation of RF-transmitters, is

available on request at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your Toyota contain

explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is scrapped with the airbags and seat belt

pretensioners left as they are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be

sure to have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner

removed and disposed of by a qualified service shop or by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional, before you scrap your vehicle.

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 General precautions while driving

Driving under the influence: Never drive your vehicle when under the influ-

ence of alcohol or drugs that have impaired your ability to operate your vehi-

cle. Alcohol and certain drugs delay reaction time, impair judgment and

reduce coordination, which could lead to an accident that could result in

death or serious injury.

Defensive driving: Always drive defensively. Anticipate mistakes that other

drivers or pedestrians might make and be ready to avoid accidents.

Driver distraction: Always give your full attention to driving. Anything that dis-

tracts the driver, such as adjusting controls, talking on a cellular phone or

reading can result in a collision with resulting death or serious injury to you,

your occupants or others.

 General precaution regarding children’s safety

Never leave children unattended in the vehicle, and never allow children to

have or use the key.

Children may be able to start the vehicle or shift the vehicle into neutral.

There is also a danger that children may injure themselves by playing with

the cigarette lighter, the windows, the moon roof, or other features of the

vehicle. In addition, heat build-up or extremely cold temperatures inside the

vehicle can be fatal to children.

Your vehicle contains batteries and/or accumulators. Do not discard them

into the environment but cooperate with separate collection (Directive

2006/66/EC).

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Symbols used throughout this manual

Cautions & Notices

Symbols used in illustrations

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the

warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in

order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or

its equipment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must

or must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your Toyota

and its equipment.

Safety symbol

The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do

not do this”, or “Do not let this happen”.

Arrows indicating operations

Indicates the action (pushing, turning,

etc.) used to operate switches and

other devices.

Indicates the outcome of an operation

(e.g. a lid opens).

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-1. Key information

Keys.................................... 38

1-2. Opening, closing and

locking the doors

Smart entry &

start system ...................... 40

Wireless remote control...... 56

Side doors .......................... 65

Back door ........................... 68

1-3. Adjustable components

(seats, mirrors, steering

wheel)

Front seats.......................... 80

Rear seats .......................... 83

Driving position memory

system .............................. 91

Head restraints ................... 96

Seat belts.......................... 100

Steering wheel.................. 106

Anti-glare inside rear view

mirror .............................. 109

Outside rear view

mirrors ............................ 112

1-4. Opening and closing the

windows and moon roof

Power windows................. 115

Moon roof.......................... 119

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank

cap.................................. 123

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer

system ............................ 127

Double locking system...... 132

Alarm ................................ 134

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture ..... 142

SRS airbags...................... 144

Child restraint systems ..... 158

Installing child

restraints......................... 167

Airbag manual on-off

system ............................ 179

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-1. Key information

Keys

Using the mechanical key

Take out the mechanical key.

After using the mechanical key,

store it in the electronic key. Carry

the mechanical key together with

the electronic key. If the electronic

key battery depletes or entry

function does not operate prop-

erly, you will need the mechanical

key. (P. 655)

The following keys are provided with the vehicle.

Electronic keys

• Operating the smart entry &

start system (P. 40)

• Operating the wireless

remote control function

(P. 56)

Mechanical keys

Key number plate

ITI11C006

1-1. Key information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When required to leave the vehicle’s key with a parking attendant

Lock the glove box as circumstances demand. (P. 472)

Remove the mechanical key for your own use and provide the attendant with

the electronic key only.

 Key number plate

Keep the plate in a safe place such as your wallet, not in the vehicle. In the

event that a key is lost, a new key can be made by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, using

the key number plate. (P. 654)

 When riding in an aircraft

When bringing an electronic key onto an aircraft, make sure you do not

press any buttons on the electronic key while inside the aircraft cabin. If you

are carrying an electronic key in your bag etc., ensure that the buttons are

not likely to be pressed accidentally. Pressing a button may cause the elec-

tronic key to emit radio waves that could interfere with the operation of the

aircraft.

NOTICE

 To prevent key damage

 Do not subject the keys to strong shocks, expose them to high tempera-

tures by placing them in direct sunlight, or get them wet.

 Do not expose the keys to electromagnetic materials or attach any mate-

rial that blocks electromagnetic waves to the key surface.

 Do not disassemble the electronic key.

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Smart entry & start system

The following operations can be performed simply by carrying the

electronic key on your person, for example in your pocket.

(The driver should always carry the electronic key.)

Locks and unlocks the doors (P. 4 1 )

Starts and stops the engine (P. 194)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Unlocking and locking the doors

Side door handle

Grip the handle to unlock the

doors.

Make sure to touch the sensor on

the back of the handle.

The doors cannot be unlocked for

3 seconds after the doors are

locked.

Press the lock button to lock the

doors.

Pressing and holding the button

closes the windows and moon

roof. (This setting must be cus-

tomized at any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped profes-

sional.)

Back door

Press the unlock button to

unlock the doors.

The door cannot be unlocked for

3 seconds after the door is

locked.

Lock the back door again when

you leave the vehicle. The back

door will not lock automatically

after it has been opened and then

closed.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Press the lock button to lock the

doors.

Antenna location and effective range

 Antenna location

Antennas outside cabin

Antennas inside cabin

Antenna outside luggage com-

partment

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Effective range (areas within which the electronic key is

detected)

When locking or unlocking

the doors

The system can be operated

when the electronic key is

within about 0.7 m (2.3 ft.) of

an outside door handle.

When starting the engine

or changing “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

modes

The system can be operated

when the electronic key is

inside the vehicle.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Operation signals

The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/

unlocked.

 Conditions affecting operation

The smart entry & start system uses weak radio waves. In the following situ-

ations, the communication between the electronic key and the vehicle may

be affected, preventing the smart entry & start system and wireless remote

control from operating properly. (Ways of coping: P. 655)

 When the electronic key battery is depleted

 Near a TV tower, electric power plant, gas station, radio station, large dis-

play, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electri-

cal noise

 When carrying a portable radio, cellular phone, cordless phone or other

wireless communication devices

 When the electronic key has come into contact with, or is covered by a

metallic object

 When multiple electronic keys are in the vicinity

 When carrying or using the electronic key together with the following

devices that emit radio waves

• Another vehicle’s electronic key

• A wireless key that emits radio waves

• Personal computer

 If window tint with a metallic content or metallic objects are attached to

the rear window

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Switching the door unlock function

It is possible to set which doors the entry function unlocks.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

Cancel the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor of the alarm system to

prevent unintended triggering of the alarm during the setting

change. (P. 136)

When the indicator on the key surface is turned off, press and hold

for approximately 5 seconds while pressing on the

key.

The setting changes each time an operation is preformed, as shown below.

(When changing the setting continuously, release the buttons, wait for at

least 5 seconds, and repeat .)

STEP

Multi-information

display

Unlocking function Beep

(Left-hand drive

vehicles)

(Right-hand drive

vehicles)

Hold the driver’s door han-

dle to unlock only the

driver’s door.

Exterior: Beeps three

times

Interior: Pings once

Hold either door handle to

unlock all doors.

Exterior: Beeps twice

Interior: Pings once

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, unlock the doors using the

wireless remote control and open and close a door once after the setting

have been changed. (If a door is not opened within 30 seconds after

is pressed, the doors will be locked again and the alarm will automatically be

set.)

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm. (P. 134)

 Battery-saving function

In the following circumstances, the entry function is disabled in order to pre-

vent the vehicle and electronic key batteries from discharging.

 When the entry function has not been used for 2 weeks or more

 When the electronic key has been left within approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of

the vehicle for 10 minutes or more

The system will resume operation when...

 The vehicle is locked using the door handle lock switch.

 The vehicle is locked/unlocked using the wireless remote control function

(P. 56) or the mechanical key. (P. 655)

 Electronic key battery depletion

 The standard battery life is 1 to 2 years. (The battery becomes depleted

even if the electronic key is not used.) If the smart entry & start system or

the wireless remote control function does not operate, or the detection

area becomes smaller, the battery may be depleted. Replace the battery

when necessary. (P. 549)

 If the battery becomes low, an alarm will sound in the cabin when the

engine stops. (P. 49)

 To avoid serious deterioration, do not leave the electronic key within 1 m

(3 ft.) of the following electrical appliances that produce a magnetic field.

•TVs

• Personal computers

• Recharging cellular phones or cordless phones

• Table lamps

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 To operate the system properly

Make sure to carry the electronic key when operating the system. Do not get

the electronic key too close to the vehicle when operating the system from

the outside of the vehicle.

Depending on the position and holding condition of the electronic key, the

key may not be detected correctly and the system may not operate properly.

(The alarm may go off accidentally, or the door lock prevention may not func-

tion.)

 Note for the entry function

 Even when the electronic key is within the effective range (detection

areas), the system may not operate properly in the following cases:

• The electronic key is too close to the window or outside door handle,

near the ground, or in a high place when the doors are locked or

unlocked.

• The electronic key is near the ground or in a high place, or too close to

the rear bumper center when the back door is locked or unlocked.

• The electronic key is on the instrument panel, luggage cover, floor or in

the glove box when the engine is started or “ENGINE START STOP”

switch modes are changed.

 Do not leave the electronic key on top of the instrument panel or near the

door pockets when exiting the vehicle. Depending on the radio wave

reception conditions, it may be detected by the antenna outside the cabin

and the door will become lockable from the outside, possibly trapping the

electronic key inside the vehicle.

 As long as the electronic key is within the effective range, the doors may

be locked or unlocked by anyone.

 Even if the electronic key is not inside the vehicle, it may be possible to

start the engine if the electronic key is near the window.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The doors may unlock if a large amount of water splashes on the door

handle, such as in the rain or in a car wash. (The doors will automatically

be locked after approximately 30 seconds if the doors are not opened

and closed.)

 Gripping the door handle when wearing a glove may not unlock the door.

 If the wireless remote control is used to lock the doors when the elec-

tronic key is near the vehicle, there is a possibility that the door may not

be unlocked by the entry function. (Use the wireless remote control to

unlock the doors.)

 A sudden approach to the effective range or door handle operation may

prevent the doors from being unlocked. In this case, return the door han-

dle to the original position and check that the doors unlock before pulling

the door handle.

 When the vehicle is not driven for extended periods

To prevent theft of the vehicle, do not leave the electronic key within 2 m (6

ft.) of the vehicle.

 Security feature

If a door is not opened within approximately 30 seconds after the vehicle is

unlocked, the security feature automatically locks the vehicle again.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Alarms and warning indicators

A combination of exterior and interior alarms as well as warnings displayed

on the multi-information display are used to prevent theft of the vehicle and

unforeseeable accidents resulting from erroneous operation. Perform the

appropriate correction procedure described in the following table.

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Exterior alarm

sounds once for

2 seconds

An attempt was made to

lock the doors using the

entry function while the

electronic key was still

inside the passenger com-

partment

Retrieve the elec-

tronic key from the

passenger compart-

ment and lock the

doors again

Exterior alarm

sounds once for

60 seconds

An attempt was made to

exit the vehicle and lock

the doors without first turn-

ing the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch OFF

Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF and lock the

doors again

Exterior alarm

sounds once for

5 seconds

An attempt was made to

lock the vehicle while a

door is open

Close all of the doors

and lock the doors

again

Interior alarm

pings continu-

ously

The “ENGINE START

STOP” switch was turned

to ACCESSORY mode

while the driver’s door was

open (or the driver’s door

was opened while the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch was in ACCES-

SORY mode)

Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF and close the

driver’s door

The “ENGINE START

STOP” switch was turned

OFF while the driver’s door

was open

Close the driver’s

door

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Interior alarm

sounds continu-

ously

When the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is in

IGNITION ON or ACCES-

SORY mode, an attempt

was made to open the

door and exit the vehicle,

and the shift lever was not

in “P”

Shift the shift lever to

“P” and turn the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch OFF

Interior and exte-

rior alarms sound

continuously

When the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is in

IGNITION ON or ACCES-

SORY mode, the driver’s

door was closed after the

key was carried outside

the vehicle, and the shift

lever not in “P”

Shift the shift lever to

“P”, turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF and close the

driver’s door again

Interior alarm

pings once

The electronic key has a

low battery

Replace the electronic

key battery

An attempt was made to

start the engine without the

electronic key being pres-

ent, or the electronic key

was not functioning nor-

mally

Start the engine with

the electronic key

present

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: A message will be shown on the multi-information display in the instru-

ment cluster.

: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle,

the electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulties

receiving signal from the key. (P. 656)

 If the smart entry & start system does not operate properly

 Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 655)

 Starting the engine: P. 656

 When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 549

 Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. smart entry & start system) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

Alarm Situation Correction procedure

Interior alarm

pings once and

exterior alarm

sounds 3 times

The driver’s door was

closed after the key was

carried outside the vehicle,

and the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch was not

turned OFF

Turn the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

OFF and close the

driver’s door again

An occupant carried the

electronic key outside the

vehicle and closed the

door while the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch was

not OFF

Bring the electronic

key back into the vehi-

cle

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Certification for the smart entry & start system

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

 People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should main-

tain a reasonable distance between themselves and the smart entry &

start system antennas. (P. 43) The radio waves may affect the operation

of such devices. If necessary, the entry function can be disabled. Ask any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for details, such as the frequency of radio waves

and timing of the emitted radio waves. Then, consult your doctor to see if

you should disable the entry function.

 Users of any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac

pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implant-

able cardioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the

device for information about its operation under the influence of radio

waves. Radio waves could have unexpected effects on the operation of

such medical devices.

Ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for details for disabling smart entry & start system.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Wireless remote control

 Operation signals

The emergency flashers flash to indicate that the doors have been locked/

unlocked. (Locked: Once; Unlocked: Twice)

 Operating conditions

The wireless remote control will not operate when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is in any position other than OFF.

The wireless remote control can be used to lock and unlock the vehi-

cle from outside the vehicle.

Locks all doors

Closes the windows and

moon roof

(press and

hold)

Unlocks all doors

Opens the windows and

moon roof

(press and

hold)

Opens/closes the back

door

(press and hold)

: This setting must be custom-

ized at any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

: If equipped

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Door lock buzzer

If a door is not fully closed, a buzzer sounds continuously for 5 seconds if an

attempt to lock the door is made. Fully close the door to stop the buzzer, and

lock the vehicle once more.

 Power back door operation (if equipped)

The power back door can be opened while the vehicle is locked. (one

motion)

 Alarm (if equipped)

Using the wireless remote control to lock the door will set the alarm system.

 Electronic key battery depletion

P. 4 6

 Security feature

P. 4 8

 If the wireless remote control does not operate properly

 Locking and unlocking the doors: Use the mechanical key. (P. 655)

 Starting the engine: P. 656

 When the electronic key battery is fully depleted

P. 549

 Conditions affecting operation

P. 4 4

 Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. unlocking function) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Certification for wireless remote control

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When closing the windows or moon roof using wireless remote control

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window or moon roof is

being operated.

 To prevent inadvertent power windows and moon roof operation, never let

a small child have and use the wireless remote control.

 Jam protection function

 Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

 The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the window or moon roof fully closes.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Side doors

The vehicle can be locked and unlocked using the entry function,

wireless remote control or door lock switch.

 Entry function

P. 4 1

 Wireless remote control

P. 5 6

 Door lock switch

Locks all doors

Unlocks all doors

 Inside lock button

Locks the door

Unlocks the door

Vehicles without Double lock-

ing system:

Pulling the door handle can

open the driver’s door even if

the lock button is in the lock

position.

Vehicles with Double locking

system:

The front doors can be opened

by pulling the inside handles

even if the lock buttons are in

the lock position.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Locking the front doors from the outside without a key

Move the inside lock button to the lock position.

Close the door while pulling the door handle.

The door cannot be locked if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode, or the electronic key is left

inside the vehicle.

Depending on the position of the electronic key, the key may not be

detected correctly and the door may be locked.

Rear door child-protector lock

The door cannot be opened from

inside the vehicle when the locks

are set.

Unlock

Lock

These locks can be set to prevent

children from opening the rear

doors. Push down on each rear

door switch to lock both rear

doors.

STEP

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Using the mechanical key

The doors can also be locked and unlocked with the mechanical key.

(P. 655)

 Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. unlocking function using a key) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

CAUTION

 To prevent an accident

Observe the following precautions while driving the vehicle.

Failing to do so may result in a door opening and an occupant falling out,

resulting in death or serious injury.

 Always use a seat belt.

 Ensure that all doors are properly closed.

 Do not pull the inside handle of the doors while driving.

The doors may be opened and the passengers are thrown out of the vehi-

cle and it may result in death or serious injury.

Be especially careful for the driver’s door, as the door may be opened

even if the inside lock button is in locked position.

 Set the rear door child-protector locks when children are seated in the rear

seat.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Back door

The back door can be locked/unlocked and opened by the following

procedures.

 Locking and unlocking the back door

Door lock switch

P. 6 5

Entry function

P. 4 0

Wireless remote control

P. 5 6

 Opening the back door from outside the vehicle

Unlock the back door

Raise the back door

Pull the handle

STEP

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Power back door switch (if equipped)

Pressing the switch closes upper

back door automatically.

(A buzzer sounds.)

Pressing the switch while the

upper back door is closing opens

it again.

Canceling the power back door system (if equipped)

Turn the main switch to disable

the power back door system.

Inoperative

Operative

The back door cannot be oper-

ated even with the wireless

remote control or power back

door switch.

 Opening the back door from inside the vehicle (if equipped)

The power back door can be

opened/closed using the

power back door switch or

wireless remote control.

(P. 56)

Push and hold the switch to

close or open.

(A buzzer sounds.)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

When closing the back door

 Make sure that the lower side

of the back door is closed

before closing the upper side

of the back door.

 Lower the back door using the

back door handle, and make

sure to push the back door

down from the outside to close

it.

 Vehicles with power back

door: The buzzer sounds once

when the power back door

closer begins to close the

lower side of the back door.

Rear step bumper

The rear step bumper is for rear

end protection and easier step-

up loading.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The power back door can be opened/closed when

The back door can be opened automatically when the power back door main

switch is on, and the following conditions are met.

 The power back door is unlocked (except closing operation)

 The lower back door is closed (closing operation only)

 To open the power back door when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

is in IGNITION ON mode, the power back door is unlocked, the vehicle

speed must be lower than 3 km/h (1 mph) and the shift lever must be in

“P”.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 If the back door opener is inoperative

The back door can be operated from the inside.

Push the lever for the back door motor, open the back door.

Vehicles without power back door

Vehicles with power back door

Remove the cover on the back door trim.

Use a cloth to prevent scratches.

Remove the screw and cover. (vehicles

without power back door)

STEP

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)

 If anything obstructs the power back door while it is closing/opening, the

back door will automatically operate in the opposite direction.

 If the lower back door is opened while the upper back door is in a closing

operation, it automatically opens again.

 When re-connecting the battery

To enable the power back door to operate properly, perform the following:

 Unlock the back door using the door lock switch

 Close the back door manually

 Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)

In the event that upper side and lower side of the back door are left slightly

open, the back door closer will automatically close it to the fully closed posi-

tion.

 Fall-down protection function (vehicles with power back door)

While the power back door is opening automatically, applying excessive

force to it will stop the opening operation to prevent the power back door

from rapidly falling down.

 Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. switch operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

 Keep the back door closed while driving.

If the back door is left open, it may hit near-by objects while driving or lug-

gage may be unexpectedly thrown out, causing an accident.

In addition, exhaust gases may enter the vehicle, causing death or a seri-

ous health hazard. Make sure to close the back door before driving.

 Before driving the vehicle, make sure that the back door is fully closed. If

the back door is not fully closed, it may open unexpectedly while driving,

causing an accident.

 Never let anyone sit in the luggage compartment. In the event of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an accident, they are susceptible to death or

serious injury.

 When children are in the vehicle

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Do not allow children to play in the luggage compartment.

If a child is accidentally locked in the luggage compartment, they could

have heat exhaustion or other injuries.

 Do not allow a child to open or close the back door.

Doing so may cause the back door to move unexpectedly, or cause the

child’s hands, head, or neck to be caught by the closing back door.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Operating the back door

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause parts of the body to be caught, resulting in death

or serious injury.

 Remove any heavy loads, such as snow and ice, from the back door

before opening it. Failure to do so may cause the back door suddenly shut

again after it is opened.

 When opening or closing the back door, thoroughly check to make sure

the surrounding area is safe.

 If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that

the back door is about to open or close.

 Use caution when opening or closing the back door in windy weather as it

may move abruptly in strong wind.

 The back door may suddenly shut if it is

not opened fully. It is more difficult to

open or close the back door on an

incline than on a level surface, so

beware of the back door unexpectedly

opening or closing by itself. Make sure

that the back door is fully open and

secure before using the luggage com-

partment.



When closing the back door, take extra

care to prevent your fingers etc. from

being caught.

 When closing the back door, make sure

to press it lightly on its outer surface. If

the back door handle is used to fully

close the back door, it may result in

hands or arms being caught.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Operating the back door

 Do not pull on the back door damper stay to close the back door, and do

not hang on the back door damper stay.

Doing so may cause hands to be caught or the back door damper stay to

break, causing an accident.

 If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, it

may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing someone’s hands,

head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an accessory part

to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recommended.

 Back door closer (vehicles with power back door)

 Use caution when using the back door closer as it still operates when the

power back door system is cancelled.

 In the event that the back door is left

slightly open, the back door closer will

automatically close it to the fully closed

position. It takes several seconds

before the back door closer begins to

operate. Be careful not to catch fingers

or anything else in the back door, as

this may cause bone fractures or other

serious injuries.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Power back door (vehicles with power back door)

Observe the following precautions when operating the power back door.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

 Check the safety of the surrounding area to make sure there are no obsta-

cles or anything that could cause any of your belongings to get caught.

 If anyone is in the vicinity, make sure they are safe and let them know that

the back door is about to open or close.

 If the power back door system is turned off with the main switch while the

back door is operating automatically, the automatic operation is stopped.

The back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on

an incline, as the back door may open or close unexpectedly.

 If the operating conditions of the power back door are no longer met, a

buzzer may sound and the back door may stop opening or closing. The

back door then has to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an

incline, as the back door may open or close abruptly.

 On an incline, the back door may suddenly shut after it opens. Make sure

the back door is fully open and secure.

 In the following situations, the power back door may detect an abnormality

and automatic operation may be stopped. In this case, the back door has

to be operated manually. Take extra care when on an incline, as the back

door may open or close abruptly.

• When the back door contacts an obstacle

• When the battery voltage suddenly drops, such as when the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is turned to the IGNITION ON mode or the

engine is started during automatic operation

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Power back door (vehicles with power back door)

 If a bicycle carrier or similar heavy object is attached to the back door, the

power back door may not operate, causing itself to malfunction, or the

back door may suddenly shut again after being opened, causing some-

one’s hands, head or neck to be caught and injured. When installing an

accessory part to the back door, using a genuine Toyota part is recom-

mended.

 In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power

back door main switch. Failure to do so may cause the back door to oper-

ate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched,

resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.

 Jam protection function (vehicles with power back door)

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

 Never use any part of your body to intentionally activate the jam protection

function.

 The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the back door fully closes. Be careful not to catch fingers or any-

thing else.

 The jam protection function may not work depending on the shape of the

object that is caught. Be careful not to catch fingers or anything else.

1-2. Opening, closing and locking the doors

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Back door damper stays

The back door is equipped with damper stays that hold the back door in

place.

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the back door damper stay, resulting

in malfunction.

 To prevent back door closer malfunction (vehicles with power back

door)

Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the back door closer is

operating.

 To prevent damage to the power back door (vehicles with power back

door)

 Make sure that there is no ice between the back door and frame that

would prevent movement of the back door. Operating the power back door

when excessive load is present on the back door may cause a malfunc-

tion.

 Do not apply excessive force to the back door while the power back door

is operating.

 Take care not to damage the sensors (installed on the right and left edges

of the power back door) with a knife or other sharp object. If the sensor is

disconnected, the power back door will not operate in automatic operation.

 Do not attach any foreign objects, such

as stickers, plastic sheets, or adhesives

to the damper stay rod.

 Do not touch the damper stay rod with

gloves or other fabric items.

 Do not attach any accessories other

than genuine Toyota parts to the back

door.

 Do not place your hand on the damper

stay or apply lateral forces to it.

Damper stay

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Front seats

Manual seat

Seat position adjustment

lever

Seatback angle adjustment

lever

Vertical height adjustment

lever

Seat cushion (front) angle

adjustment knob

Lumbar support control

switch

: Driver’s side only

ITY13C003

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Active head restraint

When the occupant’s lower back

presses against the seatback

during a rear-end collision, the

head restraint moves slightly for-

ward and upward to help reduce

the risk of whiplash on the seat

occupant.

Power seat

Seat position fore/aft control

switch

Seatback angle control

switch

Seat cushion (front) angle

control switch

Vertical height control

switch

Lumbar support control

switch (driver’s side only)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Active head restraint

Even small forces applied to the seatback may cause the head restraint to

move. Pushing up a locked head restraint forcibly may make the inner struc-

ture of the head restraint appear. This does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

 Seat adjustment

 Be careful that the seat does not hit passengers or luggage.

 Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion

to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined, during an accident the lap belt may slide past the

hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

Adjustments should not be made while driving as the seat may unexpect-

edly move and cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

 After adjusting the seat, make sure that the seat is locked in position.

(manual seat only)

Inner structure

During

rear-end

collision

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Rear seats

Second seat

Seatback angle adjustment

lever

Seat position adjustment

lever

Third seat (if equipped)

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Tumbling the second seats and third seat entry

Vehicles with third seat: For easy access to the third seat, perform

in “Tumbling the second seats” (P. 8 5 ) .

 Before tumbling the second seats

Stow the seat belt buckles and

lower the head restraints to the

lowest position.

Pass the outer seat belts through

the seat belt hangers and secure

the seat belt plates.

This prevents the shoulder belt

from being damage.

Make sure that the seat belts are

removed from the hangers before

using them.

STEP

ITY13C013a

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Tumbling the second seats

Fold down the seatback while

pulling the seatback angle

adjustment lever, and swing the

whole seat up and forward.

Hook the holding strap to the

assist grip and secure the seat

by pulling its free end.

When returning the second seat

to its original position, stow the

holding strap.

Remove the seat hook covers

from the back of the seat cush-

ion, and install them on the seat

hooks.

When returning the second seat

to its original position, remove the

seat hook covers from the floor

and install them in the back of the

seat cushion.

STEP

ITY13C025

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Folding up the third seats (if equipped)

 Before folding up the third seats

Stow the seat belts buckles.

 If you cannot raise the seatback

Lift the seatback until it stops.

Lower the seatback a little then lift it

again.

ITY13C139a

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pass the outer seat belts through

the seat belt hangers and secure

the seat belt plates.

This prevents the shoulder belt

from being damage.

Make sure that the seat belts are

removed from the hangers before

using them.

 Folding up the third seats

Fold down the head restraints

while pulling the head restraint

angle levers.

Push the seatback angle levers

and fold the third seatbacks.

ITY13C021a

STEP

ITY13C022

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pull the seat leg lock release

levers.

The seat will rise, and the seat-

back striker will also automatically

sit up.

Before raising, make sure that the

handle on the rear of the seat-

back is secure.

Secure the seats by the strikers.

Remove the seat hook covers

from the back of the seat cush-

ion, and install them on the seat

hooks.

 Returning the third seats

Remove the seat hook covers

from the floor and install them

into the back of the seat cushion.

STEP

ITY13C030

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Unlock the seats by pulling the

stowed seat lock release levers

and lower the seats to its original

position.

Secure the seats by the strikers.

Pull the handle and raise the

seatbacks.

Fix the handle securely in its orig-

inal position after use.

Raise the head restraints.

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Seat adjustment

Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion to

reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined, during an accident the lap belt may slide past the

hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

 When the seatback is folded

 Do not sit on or place anything on the seatback while driving.

 Be sure to install the seat hook covers on the seat hooks, or you may get

burned when they become hot.

 When returning the seatbacks to their original position

Observe the following precautions. Failure to do so may result in death or

serious injury.

 Be careful not to get your hands or feet pinched in the seat.

 Make sure the seats are securely locked. Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

 Check that the seat belts are not twisted or caught under the seat.

 Arrange the seat belts in the proper positions for ready use.

 Avoiding damage to seat components

Do not hang or attach anything on the seatback striker.

NOTICE

 Before tumbling, folding up the seats

The seat belts and buckles must be stowed.

 After returning the third seat

Make sure that the handle on the rear of the seatback has been secured.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Driving position memory system



: If equipped

Your preferred driving position (the position of the driver’s seat,

steering wheel and outside rear view mirrors) can be entered into the

computer’s memory and recalled with the touch of a button. It is also

possible to set this function to activate automatically when the

doors are unlocked.

Three different driving positions can be entered into memory.

 Entering a position to memory

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON

mode.

Adjust the driver’s seat, steering wheel, and outside rear

view mirrors to the desired positions.

While pressing the “SET” but-

ton, or within 3 seconds after

the “SET” button is pressed,

press and hold button “1”, “2”

or “3” until the signal beeps.

If the selected button has

already been preset, the previ-

ously recorded position will be

overwritten.

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Recalling the memorized position

Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON

mode.

Press button “1”, “2” or “3” to

recall the desired position.

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Linking driving position memory with door unlock operation

Record your driving position to button “1”, “2” or “3” before performing

the following:

Using the wireless remote control

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF after closing

the driver’s door.

While pressing the desired but-

ton (“1”, “2” or “3”), press

on the wireless remote control

until the signal beeps.

The driving position is recalled

when the driver’s door is

unlocked using the entry function

or wireless remote control and the

driver’s door is opened.

To prevent unintended triggering of the alarm, open and close a door

once after a driving position has been recorded. (If a door is not

opened within 30 seconds after is pressed, the doors will be

locked again and the alarm will automatically be set.)

In case that the alarm is triggered, immediately stop the alarm.

(P. 134)

STEP

SET

ITY13C131

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the door lock switch

Carry only the key to which you want to link the driving position. If 2

or more keys are in the vehicle, the driving position cannot be

linked properly.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF after closing

the driver’s door.

While pressing the desired but-

ton (“1”, “2”, or “3”), press the

lock or unlock side on the door

lock switch until the signal

beeps.

The driving position is recalled

when the driver’s door is

unlocked using the entry function

or wireless remote control and the

driver’s door is opened.

STEP

 Canceling the linked door unlock operation

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to OFF after closing the

driver’s door.

Using the wireless remote control: While pressing “SET” button,

press button on the wireless remote control until the signal

beeps.

Using the door lock switch: While pressing “SET” button, press the

lock or unlock side on the door lock switch until the signal beeps.

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Retained accessory power

 Each memorized position (except for the steering wheel position) can be

activated within 3 minutes after the driver’s door is opened, even if the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off.

 Each memorized position (except for the steering wheel position) can be

activated within 60 seconds after the driver’s door is closed, even if the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off.

 To cancel seat position recall

Perform any one of the following operations.

 Press the “SET” button

 Press button “1”, “2” or “3”.

 Adjust the seat using the switches (only cancels seat position recall)

 Adjust the steering wheel using the tilt and telescopic steering control

switch (only cancels steering wheel position recall)

 If the battery is disconnected

The memorized positions must be reset because the computer’s memory is

erased when the battery is disconnected.

CAUTION

 Seat adjustment caution

Take care during seat adjustment that the seat does not strike the rear pas-

senger or squeeze your body against the steering wheel.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Head restraints

Front seats

Vertical adjustment

Down

Push the head restraint up or

down while pressing the lock

release button

Angle adjustment

Second seats

Vertical adjustment

Pull the head restraint up.

Down

Press and hold the lock

release button when lowering

the head restraint.

Lock release button

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Adjusting the height of the head restraints

 Adjusting the second center seat head restraint

Always raise the head restraint one level from the stowed position when

using.

Third seats (if equipped)

To fo l d

Pull the head restraint angle

lever to fold the head restraint.

ITY13C040

Make sure that the head restraints are

adjusted so that the center of the head

restraint is closest to the top of your ears.

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Removing the head restraints

Front seats

While pressing in the flathead screwdriver, pull up the head

restraint.

Second seats

Third seats

While pressing in the flathead screwdriver, pull up the head

restraint.

Push a flathead screwdriver into the slot.

The slot is located on the right side of the

right head restraint anchor.

STEP

Pull the head restraint up while pressing

the lock release button.

Lock release button

Push a flathead screwdriver into the slot.

The slot is located on the left side of the

left head restraint anchor.

ITY13C035

STEP

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Installing the head restraints

Align the head restraint with the installation holes.

Push down the head restraint to the lock position.

CAUTION

 Head restraint precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the head restraints. Failure to

do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Use the head restraints designed for each respective seat.

 Adjust the head restraints to the correct position at all times.

 After adjusting the head restraints, push down on them and make sure

they are locked in position.

 Do not drive with the head restraints removed.

STEP

100

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Seat belts

Make sure that all occupants are wearing their seat belts before driv-

ing the vehicle.

 Correct use of the seat belts

 Extend the shoulder belt so

that it comes fully over the

shoulder, but does not

come into contact with the

neck or slide off the shoul-

der.

 Position the lap belt as low

as possible over the hips.

 Adjust the position of the

seatback. Sit up straight

and well back in the seat.

 Do not twist the seat belt.

 Fastening and releasing the seat belt

Fastening the belt

Push the tab into the buckle

until a clicking sound is heard.

Releasing the belt

Press the release button.

Release button

101

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Seat belt pretensioners (front and second outboard seats)

The pretensioner helps the seat

belt to quickly restrain the occu-

pant by retracting the seat belt

when the vehicle is subjected to

certain types of severe frontal

collision or a vehicle rollover.

The pretensioner may not acti-

vate in the event of a minor frontal

impact, a side impact or a rear

impact.

 Adjusting the height of the belt (front and second outboard

seats)

Down

Move the height adjuster up

and down as needed until you

hear a click.

ITY13C055

102

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Pre-crash seat belts (front seats of vehicles with pre-crash safety

system)

If the system determines that emergency braking is being performed

or the vehicle is out of control, the front seat belts will retract.

(P. 323)

 Emergency locking retractor (ELR)

The retractor will lock the belt during a sudden stop or on impact. It may also

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend so that you can move around fully.

 Child seat belt usage

The seat belts of your vehicle were principally designed for persons of adult

size.

 Use a child restraint system appropriate for the child, until the child

becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s seat belt. (P. 158)

 When the child becomes large enough to properly wear the vehicle’s

seat belt, follow the instructions on P. 100 regarding seat belt usage.

 Replacing the belt after the pretensioner has been activated

If the vehicle is involved in multiple collisions, the pretensioner will activate

for the first collision, but will not activate for the second or subsequent colli-

sions.

 Seat belt regulations

If seat belt regulations exist in the country where you reside, please contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, for seat belt replacement or installation.

103

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of injury in the event of

sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

 Wearing a seat belt

 Ensure that all passengers wear a seat belt.

 Always wear a seat belt properly.

 Each seat belt should be used by one person only. Do not use a seat belt

for more than one person at once, including children.

 Toyota recommends that children be seated in the rear seat and always

use a seat belt and/or an appropriate child restraint system.

 Do not recline the seat any more than necessary to achieve a proper seat-

ing position. The seat belt is most effective when the occupants are sitting

up straight and well back in the seats.

 Do not wear the shoulder belt under your arm.

 Always wear your seat belt low and snug across your hips.

 Pregnant women

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat

belt in the proper way. (P. 100)

Women who are pregnant should position

the lap belt as low as possible over the

hips in the same manner as other occu-

pants. Extend the shoulder belt com-

pletely over the shoulder and position the

belt across the chest. Avoid belt contact

over the rounding of the abdominal area.

If the seat belt is not worn properly, not

only a pregnant woman, but also the fetus

could suffer death or serious injury as a

result of sudden braking, sudden swerv-

ing or a collision.

104

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 People suffering illness

Obtain medical advice and wear the seat belt in the proper way.

 When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries

that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

 Seat belt pretensioners

 Do not place anything, such as a cushion, on the front passenger’s seat.

Doing so will disperse the passenger’s weight, which prevents the sensor

from detecting the passenger’s weight properly. As a result, the seat belt

pretensioner for the front passenger’s seat may not activate in the event of

a collision.

 If the pretensioner has activated, the SRS warning light will come on. In

that case, the seat belt cannot be used again and must be replaced at any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

105

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Adjustable shoulder anchor

Always make sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the center of your

shoulder. The belt should be kept away from your neck, but not falling off

your shoulder. Failure to do so could reduce the amount of protection in an

accident and cause death or serious injuries in the event of a sudden stop,

sudden swerve or accident. (P. 101)

 Seat belt damage and wear

 Do not damage the seat belts by allowing the belt, plate, or buckle to be

jammed in the door.

 Inspect the seat belt system periodically. Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Do not use a damaged seat belt until it is replaced. Damaged seat

belt cannot protect an occupant from death or serious injury.

 Ensure that the belt and tab are locked and the belt is not twisted.

If the seat belt does not function correctly, immediately contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

 Replace the seat assembly, including the belts, if your vehicle has been

involved in a serious accident, even if there is no obvious damage.

 Do not attempt to install, remove, modify, disassemble or dispose of the

seat belts. Have any necessary repairs carried out by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional. Inappropriate handling of the pretensioner may prevent it

from operating properly resulting in death or serious injury.

106

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Steering wheel

Manual tilt & telescopic steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position.

 To change the angle

Hold the steering

wheel and pull the lock

release lever toward

you.

Tilt the steering wheel

to the desired angle

and release the lever.

 To change the column length

Hold the steering

wheel and push down

the lock release lever.

Set the steering wheel

to the desired length

and return the lever to

its original position.

ITY13C063

STEP

ITY13C104

STEP

107

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Auto tilt away (vehicles with power tilt & telescopic steering

wheel)

When the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is turned OFF, the

steering wheel returns to its

stowed position by moving up

and away to enable easier driver

entry and exit.

Switching to ACCESSORY or

IGNITION ON mode will return

the steering wheel to the original

position.

Power tilt & telescopic steering wheel

The steering wheel can be adjusted to a comfortable position while

the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode.

Down

Toward the driver

Away from the driver

108

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Automatic adjustment of the steering position

A desired steering position can be entered to memory and recalled automat-

ically by the driving position memory. (P. 91)

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.

Doing so may cause the driver to mishandle the vehicle and an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

 After adjusting the steering wheel (vehicles with manual tilt & tele-

scopic steering wheel)

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

Otherwise, the steering wheel may move suddenly, possibly causing an

accident and resulting in death or serious injury.

109

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Adjusting the height of the rear view mirror

Adjust the height of the rear view

mirror by moving it up and down.

The rear view mirror’s position can be adjusted to enable sufficient

confirmation of the rear view in accordance with the driver’s seating

posture.

110

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Anti-glare function

Manual anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Reflected light from the headlights of vehicles behind can be

reduced by operating the lever.

Normal position

Anti-glare position

Auto anti-glare inside rear view mirror

Responding to the level of brightness of the headlights of vehicles

behind, the reflected light is automatically reduced.

Changing automatic anti-glare

function mode ON/OFF

When the automatic anti-glare

function is in ON mode, the indi-

cator illuminates.

The function will be set to ON

mode each time the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is turned to

IGNITION ON mode.

Pressing the button turns the

function to OFF mode. (The indi-

cator also turns off.)

111

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 To prevent sensor error (vehicles with auto anti-glare inside rear view

mirror)

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not adjust the position of the mirror while driving.

Doing so may lead to mishandling of the vehicle and an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

To ensure that the sensors operate prop-

erly, do not touch or cover them.

ITY13C080

112

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Outside rear view mirrors

Folding back the mirrors

Press the switch

Pressing again will extend the

mirrors.

Mirror angle can be adjusted.

Select a mirror to adjust

Left

Right

Adjust the mirror

Right

Down

Left

STEP

113

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Mirror angle can be adjusted when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode.

 When the mirrors are fogged up (vehicles with outside rear view mirror

defoggers)

The outside rear view mirrors can be cleared using the mirror defoggers.

Turn on the rear window defogger to turn on the outside rear view mirror

defoggers. (P. 374)

 Auto anti-glare function (if equipped)

When the anti-glare inside rear view mirror is set to auto mode, the outside

rear view mirrors will activate in conjunction with the anti-glare inside rear

view mirror to reduce reflected light. (P. 109)

 Linked mirror function when reversing

When the mirror select switch is in the “L” or “R” position, the outside rear

view mirrors will automatically angle downwards when the vehicle is revers-

ing in order to give a better view of the ground. To disable this function, move

the mirror select switch to the neutral position (between “L” and “R”).

 Automatic adjustment of the mirror angle (if equipped)

A desired mirror face angle can be entered to memory and recalled automat-

ically by the driving position memory. (P. 91)

114

1-3. Adjustable components (seats, mirrors, steering wheel)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When driving the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while driving.

Failing to do so may result in loss of control of the vehicle and cause an acci-

dent, resulting in death or serious injury.

 Do not adjust the mirrors while driving.

 Do not drive with the mirrors folded back.

 Both the driver and passenger side mirrors must be extended and properly

adjusted before driving.

 When a mirror is moving

To avoid personal injury and mirror malfunction, be careful not to get your

hand caught by the moving mirror.

 When the mirror defoggers are operating (vehicles with outside rear

view mirror defoggers)

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and

burn you.

NOTICE

 If ice should jam the mirror

Do not operate the control or scrape the mirror face. Use a spray de-icer to

free the mirror.

115

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Power windows

Lock switch

Press the switch down to lock

passenger window switches.

Use this switch to prevent chil-

dren from accidentally opening or

closing a passenger window.

The power windows can be opened and closed using the following

switches.

Closing

One-touch closing

Opening

One-touch opening

: To stop the window partway,

operate the switch in the oppo-

site direction.

116

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The power windows can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 Door lock linked window operation

The following functions can be used if customized at any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 The power windows can be opened and closed using the wireless

remote control or mechanical key. (P. 5 6 655)

 The power windows can be closed using the entry function.

 Operating the power windows after turning the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch OFF

The power windows can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even

after the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or

turned OFF. They cannot, however, be operated once either front door is

opened.

 Jam protection function

If an object becomes caught between the window and the window frame,

window travel is stopped and the window is opened slightly.

117

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When the power window does not close normally

If the jam protection function is operating abnormally and a window cannot

be closed, perform the following operations using the power window switch

on the relevant door.

 After stopping the vehicle, the window can be closed by holding the

power window switch in the one-touch closing position while the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNITION ON mode.

 If the window still cannot be closed even by carrying out the operation

explained above, initialize the function by performing the following proce-

dure.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position.

Continue holding the switch for a further 6 seconds after the win-

dow has closed.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch opening position.

Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds after the win-

dow has opened completely.

Hold the power window switch in the one-touch closing position

once again. Continue holding the switch for a further 2 seconds

after the window has closed.

If you release the switch while the window is moving, start again from the

beginning. If the window continues to close but then re-open slightly even

after performing the above procedure correctly, have the vehicle inspected

by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

 Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

STEP

118

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Closing the windows

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their body

in a position where it could be caught when a window is being operated.

 Do not allow children to operate the power windows.

Closing a power window on someone can cause death or serious injury.

 Jam protection function

 Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

 The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the window fully closes.

119

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Moon roof



: If equipped

Use the overhead switches to open, close, and tilt the moon roof up

and down.

 Opening and closing

Open

Stops just before it is opened

fully. Press the switch again to

fully open.

To stop partway, press the

switch lightly.

 Tilt up and down

Tilt up

Tilt down

To stop partway, press the

switch lightly.

120

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The moon roof can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 Door lock linked moon roof operation

The following functions can be used if customized at any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 The moon roof can be opened and closed using the wireless remote con-

trol or mechanical key. (P. 5 6 655)

 The moon roof can be closed using the entry function.

 Operating the moon roof after turning the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch OFF

The moon roof can be operated for approximately 45 seconds even after the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to ACCESSORY mode or turned

OFF. It cannot, however, be operated once either front door is opened.

 Jam protection function

If an object is detected between the moon roof and the frame while closing

or tilting down, travel is stopped and the moon roof opens slightly.

 If the moon roof cannot be closed automatically

Keep the switch depressed.

 To reduce moon roof wind noise

When the moon roof is opened automatically, it will stop slightly before the

fully open position. Driving with the moon roof in this position can help

reduce wind noise.

 Sunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closed manually. However, the sunshade

will open automatically when the moon roof is opened.

121

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When the moon roof does not close normally

Perform the following procedure:

 If the moon roof closes but then re-opens slightly

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “CLOSE” switch.

The moon roof will close, reopen and pause for approximately 10

seconds.

Then it will close again, tilt up and pause for approxi-

mately 1 second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and

then release the switch.

 If the moon roof tilts down but then tilts back up

Stop the vehicle.

Press and hold the “UP” switch

until the moon roof moves into the

tilt up position and stops.

Release the “UP” switch once and then press and hold the “UP”

switch again.

The moon roof will pause for approximately 10 seconds in the tilt up

position.

Then it will adjust slightly and pause for approximately 1

second. Finally, it will tilt down, open and close.

Check to make sure that the moon roof is completely closed and

then release the switch.

: If the switch is released at the incorrect time, the procedure will

have to be performed again from the beginning.

: If the switch is released after the above mentioned 10 second

pause, automatic operation will be disabled. In that case, press

and hold the “CLOSE” or “UP” switch, and the moon roof will tilt

up and pause for approximately 1 second. Then it will tilt down,

open and close. Check to make sure that the moon roof is com-

pletely closed and then release the switch.

If the moon roof does not fully close even after performing the above proce-

dure correctly, have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

STEP

122

1-4. Opening and closing the windows and moon roof

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Moon roof open warning buzzer

The buzzer sounds and message is shown on the multi-information display

in the instrument panel when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned

OFF and the driver’s door is opened with the moon roof open.

 Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. linked door lock operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

CAUTION

 Opening the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

 Do not allow any passengers to put their hands or heads outside the vehi-

cle while it is moving.

 Do not sit on top of the moon roof.

 Closing the moon roof

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Check to make sure that all passengers do not have any part of their bod-

ies in a position where they could be caught when the moon roof is being

operated.

 Do not allow children to operate the moon roof.

Closing the moon roof on someone can cause death or serious injury.

 Jam protection function

 Never try jamming any part of your body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally.

 The jam protection function may not work if something gets caught just

before the moon roof fully closes.

123

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-5. Refueling

Opening the fuel tank cap

Perform the following steps to open the fuel tank cap.

 Before refueling the vehicle

 Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF and ensure that

all the doors and windows are closed.

 Confirm the type of fuel. (P. 124)

 Opening the fuel tank cap

Pull the lever.

Turn the fuel tank cap slowly

to open.

Hang the fuel tank cap on the

back of the fuel filler door.

STEP

124

1-5. Refueling

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Closing the fuel tank cap

When replacing the fuel tank

cap, turn it until a clicking sound

is heard.

After releasing your hand, the cap

will turn slightly to the opposite

direction.

 Fuel types

Gasoline engine

EU area:

Unleaded gasoline conforming to European standard EN228, Research

Octane Number of 95 or higher

Except EU area:

Unleaded gasoline, Research Octane Number of 95 or higher

Diesel engine

EU area:

Diesel fuel conforming to European standard EN590

Except EU area:

Diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less of sulfur and has a cetane num-

ber of 48 or higher

 Use of ethanol blended gasoline in a gasoline engine

Toyota allows the use of ethanol blended gasoline where the ethanol content

is up to 10 %. Make sure that the ethanol blended gasoline to be used has a

Research Octane Number that follows the above.

125

1-5. Refueling

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Refueling the vehicle

Observe the following precautions while refueling the vehicle.

Failure to do so, may result in death or serious injury.

 Touch the vehicle or some other metal surface to discharge any static

electricity.

Sparks resulting from discharging static electricity may cause the fuel

vapors to ignite.

 Always hold the grips on the fuel tank cap and turn it slowly to remove it.

A whooshing sound may be heard when the fuel tank cap is loosened.

Wait until the sound cannot be heard before fully removing the cap.

In hot weather, pressurized fuel may spray out of the filler neck and cause

injury.

 Do not allow anyone that has not discharged static electricity from their

bodies to come close to an open fuel tank.

 Do not inhale vaporized fuel.

Fuel contains substances that are harmful if inhaled.

 Do not smoke while refueling the vehicle.

Doing so may cause the fuel to ignite and cause a fire.

 Do not return to the vehicle or touch any person or object that is statically

charged.

This may cause static electricity to build up, resulting in a possible ignition

hazard.

 When replacing the fuel tank cap

Do not use anything but a genuine Toyota fuel tank cap designed for your

vehicle. Failure to do so may cause a fire or other incident which may result

in death or serious injury.

126

1-5. Refueling

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Refueling

Do not spill fuel during refueling.

Failure to do so may damage the vehicle, such as causing the exhaust sys-

tems to operate abnormally or damaging fuel system components or the

vehicle’s painted surface.

127

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Engine immobilizer system

The vehicle’s keys have built-in transponder chips that prevent the

engine from starting if the key has not been previously registered in

the vehicle’s on-board computer.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

Vehicles with navigation system

The indicator light flashes after

the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch has been turned OFF

to indicate that the system is

operating.

The indicator light stops flash-

ing after the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch has been turned

to ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode to indicate that the

system has been canceled.

Vehicles without navigation system

128

1-6. Theft deterrent system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type engine immobilizer system.

 Conditions that may cause the system to malfunction

 If the key is in contact with a metallic object

 If the key is in close proximity to or touching a key to the security system

(key with a built-in transponder chip) of another vehicle

129

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Engine immobilizer certification

130

1-6. Theft deterrent system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

131

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper

operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

132

1-6. Theft deterrent system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Double locking system



Setting the double locking system

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF, have all the passen-

gers exit the vehicle and ensure that all the doors are closed.

Using the entry function:

Press the lock button on the outside door handle twice within 5 sec-

onds.

Using the wireless remote control:

Press the

button twice within 5 seconds.

: If equipped

Unauthorized access to the vehicle is prevented by disabling the

door unlocking function from both the interior and exterior of the

vehicle.

Vehicles employing this sys-

tem have labels on the win-

dow glass of both front doors.

133

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Canceling the double locking system

Using the entry function:

Hold the outside door handle on the driver side.

Using the wireless remote control: Press the

button.

CAUTION

 Double locking system precaution

Never activate the double locking system when there are people in the vehi-

cle, because all the doors cannot be opened from inside the vehicle.

134

1-6. Theft deterrent system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Alarm



: If equipped

The system sounds the alarm and flashes lights when forcible entry

is detected.

 Triggering of the alarm

The alarm is triggered in the following situations when the alarm

is set:

 A locked door is unlocked or opened in any way other than

using the entry function or the wireless remote control. (The

doors will lock again automatically.)

 The hood is opened.

 The intrusion sensor detects something moving inside the

vehicle. (An intruder gets in the vehicle.) (if equipped)

 The tilt sensor detects a change of vehicle inclination. (if

equipped)

 The back door window is broken. (if equipped)

 The battery is reconnected.

135

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Setting the alarm system

Vehicles with navigation system

Close the doors and hood,

and lock all the doors using

the entry function or wireless

remote control. The system

will be set automatically after

30 seconds.

The indicator light changes

from being on to flashing when

the system is set.

Vehicles without navigation system

 Deactivating or stopping the alarm

Do one of the following to deactivate or stop the alarm.

 Unlock the doors using the entry function or the wireless

remote control.

 Start the engine. (The alarm will be deactivated or stopped

after a few seconds.)

136

1-6. Theft deterrent system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Intrusion sensor and tilt sensor (if equipped)

 The intrusion sensor detects an intruder or movement in the vehi-

cle.

 The tilt sensor detects changes in vehicle inclination, such as when

the vehicle is towed away.

This system is designed to deter and prevent vehicle theft but does

not guarantee absolute security against all intrusions.

The intrusion sensor and tilt sensor can be canceled using the cancel

switch.

Canceling the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor (if equipped)

Turn the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off and press the

intrusion sensor and tilt sensor

cancel switch.

A message will be shown on the

multi-information display in the

instrument cluster.

The intrusion sensor and tilt sen-

sor will revert to on each time the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to ON mode.

 System maintenance

The vehicle has a maintenance-free type alarm system.

137

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Items to check before locking the vehicle

To prevent unexpected triggering of the alarm and vehicle theft, make sure

of the following.

 Nobody is in the vehicle.

 The windows and moon roof are closed before the alarm is set.

 No valuables or other personal items are left in the vehicle.

 Triggering of the alarm

The alarm may be triggered in the following situations:

(Stopping the alarm deactivates the alarm system.)

 The doors are unlocked using the key.

 A person inside the vehicle opens a

door or hood.

 The battery is disconnected.

138

1-6. Theft deterrent system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Alarm-operated door lock

 When the alarm is operating, the doors are locked automatically to pre-

vent intruders.

 Do not leave the key inside the vehicle when the alarm is operating, and

make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing

the battery.

 Canceling and automatic re-enabling of the intrusion sensor and tilt

sensor (if equipped)

 The alarm will still be set even when the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor

are canceled.

 After the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor are canceled, pressing the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch or unlocking the doors using the entry

function or wireless remote control will re-enable the intrusion sensor and

tilt sensor.

 When the alarm system is set again, the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor

will be set.

139

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Intrusion sensor considerations (if equipped)

The sensor may trigger the alarm in the following situations:

 People or pets are in the vehicle.

 A window or the moon roof is open. In

this case, the sensor may detect the fol-

lowing:

• Wind or the movement of objects

such as leaves and insects inside

the vehicle

• Ultrasonic waves emitted from

devices such as the intrusion sen-

sors of other vehicles

• The movement of people outside

the vehicle

 Unstable items, such as dangling

accessories or clothes hanging on the

coat hooks, are in the vehicle.

 The vehicle is parked in a place where

extreme vibrations or noises occur,

such as in a parking garage.

140

1-6. Theft deterrent system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The vehicle is inside an automatic or high-pressure car wash.

 The vehicle experiences impacts, such as hail, lightning strikes, and

other kinds of repeated impacts or vibrations.

 Tilt sensor detection considerations (if equipped)

The sensor may trigger the alarm in the following situations:

 The vehicle is transported by a ferry, trailer, train, etc.

 The vehicle is parked in a parking garage.

 The vehicle is inside a car wash that moves the vehicle.

 Any of the tires loses air pressure.

 The vehicle is jacked up.

 An earthquake occurs or the road caves in.

 Cargo is loaded onto or unloaded from the roof luggage carrier.

 Ice or snow is removed from the vehi-

cle, causing the vehicle to receive

repeated impacts or vibrations.

141

1-6. Theft deterrent system

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To ensure the intrusion sensor functions correctly (if equipped)

 Installing accessories other than genuine Toyota parts or leaving objects

between the driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat may reduce the

detection performance.

 To ensure the system operates correctly

Do not modify or remove the system. If modified or removed, the proper

operation of the system cannot be guaranteed.

 To ensure that the sensors operate

properly, do not touch or cover them.

 Do not spray air fresheners or other

products directly into the sensor holes.

142

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1-7. Safety information

Correct driving posture

Drive with a good posture as follows:

Sit upright and well back in

the seat. (P. 8 0 )

Adjust the position of the

seat forward or backward to

ensure the pedals can be

reached and easily

depressed to the extent

required. (P. 80)

Adjust the seatback so that

the controls are easily oper-

able.

Adjust the tilt and telescopic

positions of the steering

wheel downward so the air-

bag is facing your chest.

(P. 106)

Lock the head restraint in

place with the center of the

head restraint closest to the

top of your ears. (P. 96)

Wear the seat belt correctly.

(P. 100)

ITY17C002

143

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

 Do not adjust the position of the driver’s seat while driving.

Doing so could cause the driver to lose control of the vehicle.

 Do not place a cushion between the driver or passenger and the seatback.

A cushion may prevent correct posture from being achieved, and reduce

the effectiveness of the seat belt and head restraint, increasing the risk of

death or serious injury to the driver or passenger.

 Do not place anything under the front seats.

Objects placed under the front seats may become jammed in the seat

tracks and stop the seat from locking in place. This may lead to an acci-

dent. The adjustment mechanism may also be damaged.

 Adjusting the seat position

 Do not recline the seat more than necessary when the vehicle is in motion,

to reduce the risk of sliding under the lap belt.

If the seat is too reclined during an accident, the lap belt may slide past the

hips and apply restraint forces directly to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt, increasing the risk of death or serious injury.

 Take care when adjusting the seat position to ensure that other passen-

gers are not injured by the moving seat.

 Do not put your hands under the seat or near the moving parts to avoid

injury.

Fingers or hands may become jammed in the seat mechanism.

144

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

SRS airbags

The SRS airbags inflate when the vehicle is subjected to certain

types of severe impacts that may cause significant injury to the

occupants. They work together with the seat belts to help reduce the

risk of death or serious injury.

Front airbags

Driver airbag/front passenger airbag

Can help protect the head and chest of the driver and front pas-

senger from impact with interior components.

Knee airbags

Can help provide driver and front passenger protection.

145

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Side and curtain shield airbags

Side airbags

Can help protect the torso of the front seat occupants.

Side airbags (if equipped)

Can help protect the torso of the second outboard seat occu-

pants.

Curtain shield airbags

 Can help protect primarily the head of front seat occupants.

 Can help protect primarily the head of second outboard seat

occupants.

 Can help protect primarily the head of third seat occupants. (if

equipped)

146

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Airbag system components

The main SRS airbag system components are shown above. The

SRS airbag system is controlled by the airbag sensor assembly. As

the airbags deploy, a chemical reaction in the inflators quickly fills the

airbags with non-toxic gas to help restrain the motion of the occu-

pants.

Knee airbags

Airbag manual on-off switch

Front passenger airbag

Curtain shield airbags

Side impact sensors (front

door)

“PASSENGER AIR BAG”

indicator

Side airbags (front seats)

SRS warning light and

“RSCA OFF” indicator light

Side impact sensors (rear)

Side airbags (if equipped

on second outboard seats)

Driver airbag

Driver’s seat position sen-

sor

Driver’s seat belt buckle

switch

Safing sensor (rear)

Roll sensing of curtain

shield airbags off switch

Airbag sensor assembly

Front impact sensors

Seat belt pretensioners

147

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 If the SRS airbags deploy (inflate)

 Bruising and slight abrasions may result from contact with a deploying

(inflating) SRS airbag.

 A loud noise and white powder will be emitted.

 Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel hub, airbag cover and inflator)

as well as the front seats, second seats, and parts of the front, side and

rear pillars and roof side rail, may be hot for several minutes. The airbag

itself may also be hot.

 The windshield may crack.

 SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS front airbags)

 The SRS front airbag will deploy in the event of an impact that exceeds

the set threshold level (the level of force corresponding to an approxi-

mately 20 - 30 km/h [12 - 18 mph] frontal collision with a fixed wall that

does not move or deform).

However, this threshold velocity will be considerably higher in the following

situations:

• If the vehicle strikes an object, such as a parked vehicle or sign pole,

which can move or deform on impact

• If the vehicle is involved in an underride collision, such as a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”, or goes under, the bed of a

truck

 Depending on the type of collision, it is possible that only the seat belt

pretensioners will activate.

 SRS airbag deployment conditions (SRS side airbags and SRS curtain

shield airbags)

 The SRS side airbags and SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the

event of an impact that exceeds the set threshold level (the level of force

corresponding to the impact force produced by an approximately 1500 kg

[3300 lb.] vehicle colliding with the vehicle cabin from a direction perpen-

dicular to the vehicle orientation at an approximate speed of 20 - 30 km/h

[12 - 18 mph]).

 The SRS curtain shield airbags will deploy in the event of vehicle rollover.

148

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Conditions under which the SRS airbags may deploy (inflate), other

than a collision

The SRS front airbags may also deploy if a serious impact occurs to the

underside of your vehicle. Some examples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may also deploy under the situations shown

in the illustration.

 Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag (front airbags)

The SRS front airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a

side or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed frontal

collision. But, whenever a collision of any type causes sufficient forward

deceleration of the vehicle, deployment of the SRS front airbags may occur.

 Hitting a curb, edge of pavement or

hard surface

 Falling into or jumping over a deep hole

 Landing hard or falling

 The angle of vehicle tip-up is marginal.

 The vehicle skids and hits curb stone.

 Collision from the side

 Collision from the rear

 Vehicle rollover

149

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Types of collisions that may not deploy the SRS airbag

(side airbags and curtain shield airbags)

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbag may not activate if the vehicle

is subjected to a collision from the side at certain angles, or a collision to the

side of the vehicle body other than the passenger compartment.

The SRS side airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is involved in a

frontal or rear collision, if it rolls over, or if it is involved in a low-speed side

collision.

The SRS curtain shield airbags do not generally inflate if the vehicle is

involved in a frontal or rear collision, if it pitches end over end, or if it is

involved in a low-speed side collision.

 Collision from the side to the vehicle

body other than the passenger com-

partment

 Collision from the side at an angle

 Collision from the front

 Collision from the rear

 Vehicle rollover

 Collision from the front

 Collision from the rear

 Pitching end over end

150

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When to contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional

In the following cases, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional, as soon as possible.

 Any of the SRS airbags have been inflated.

 The front of the vehicle is damaged or

deformed, or was involved in an acci-

dent that was not severe enough to

cause the SRS front airbags to inflate.

 A portion of a door is damaged or

deformed, or the vehicle was involved

in an accident that was not severe

enough to cause the SRS side and cur-

tain shield airbags to inflate.

151

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The pad section of the steering wheel,

dashboard near the front passenger air-

bag or lower portion of the instrument

panel is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

 The surface of the seats with the side

airbag is scratched, cracked or other-

wise damaged.

 The portion of the front, side and rear

pillars or roof side rail garnishes (pad-

ding) containing the curtain shield air-

bags is inside scratched, cracked, or

otherwise damaged.

152

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

Observe the following precautions regarding the SRS airbags.

Failure to do so may cause death or serious injury.

 The driver and all passengers in the vehicle must wear their seat belts

properly.

The SRS airbags are supplemental devices to be used with the seat belts.

 The SRS driver airbag deploys with considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if the driver is very close to the airbag.

Since the risk zone for the driver’s airbag is the first 50 - 75 mm (2 - 3 in.)

of inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10 in.) from your driver airbag pro-

vides you with a clear margin of safety. This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can change your driving position in several

ways:

• Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

• Slightly recline the back of the seat.

Although vehicle designs vary, many drivers can achieve the 250 mm

(10 in.) distance, even with the driver seat all the way forward, simply

by reclining the back of the seat somewhat. If reclining the back of your

seat makes it hard to see the road, raise yourself by using a firm, non-

slippery cushion, or raise the seat if your vehicle has that feature.

• If your steering wheel is adjustable, tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as recommended above, while still maintain-

ing control of the foot pedals, steering wheel, and your view of the instru-

ment panel controls.

153

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

 The SRS front passenger airbag also deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury especially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passenger seat should be as far from the air-

bag as possible with the seatback adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

 Improperly seated and/or restrained infants and children can be killed or

seriously injured by a deploying airbag. An infant or child who is too small

to use a seat belt should be properly secured using a child restraint sys-

tem. Toyota strongly recommends that all infants and children be placed in

the rear seats of the vehicle and properly restrained. The rear seats are

safer for infants and children than the front passenger seat. (P. 158)

 Do not sit on the edge of the seat or

lean against the dashboard.

 Do not allow a child to stand in front of

the SRS front passenger airbag unit or

sit on the knees of a front passenger.

 Do not allow the front seat occupants to

hold items on their knees.

ITY17C021

154

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

 Do not lean against the door, the roof

side rail or the front, center and rear pil-

lars.

 Do not allow anyone to kneel on the

passenger seat toward the door or put

their head or hands outside the vehicle.

 Do not attach anything to or lean any-

thing against areas such as the dash-

board, steering wheel pad or lower

portion of the instrument panel.

These items can become projectiles

when SRS driver, front passenger and

knee airbags deploy.

ITY17C029

155

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 SRS airbag precautions

 If a vinyl cover is put on the area where the SRS knee airbag will deploy,

be sure to remove it.

 Do not use seat accessories which cover the parts where the SRS side

airbags inflate as they may interfere with inflation of the airbags.

 Do not strike or apply significant levels of force to the area of the SRS air-

bag components.

Doing so can cause the SRS airbags to malfunction.

 Do not touch any of the component parts immediately after the SRS air-

bags have deployed (inflated) as they may be hot.

 If breathing becomes difficult after the SRS airbag have deployed, open a

door or window to allow fresh air in, or leave the vehicle if it is safe to do

so. Wash off any residue as soon as possible to prevent skin irritation.

 If the areas where the SRS airbags are stored, such as the steering wheel

pad and front, center and rear pillar garnishes, are damaged or cracked,

have them replaced by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Do not attach anything to areas such as

a door, windshield glass, side door

glass, front, center and rear pillars, roof

side rail or assist grip. (Except for the

speed limit label P. 647)

 Do not hang coat hangers or other hard

objects on the coat hooks. All of these

items could become projectiles and

may cause death or serious injury,

should the SRS curtain shield airbag

deploy.

ITY17C085

156

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Modification and disposal of SRS airbag system components

Do not dispose of your vehicle or perform any of the following modifications

without consulting any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

The SRS airbags may malfunction or deploy (inflate) accidentally, causing

death or serious injury.

 Installation, removal, disassembly and repair of the SRS airbags

 Repairs, modifications, removal or replacement of the steering wheel,

instrument panel, dashboard, seats or seat upholstery, front, side and rear

pillars or roof side rail

 Repairs or modifications of the front fender, front bumper, or side of the

occupant compartment

 Installation of a grille guard (bull bars, kangaroo bar, etc.), snow plows or

winches

 Modifications to the vehicle’s suspension system

 Installation of electronic devices such as mobile two-way radios (RF-trans-

mitter) and CD players

 Modifications to your vehicle for a person with a physical disability

157

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Deactivating the curtain shield airbags in a vehicle rollover

ON/OFF (hold for a few sec-

onds)

The RSCA OFF indicator turns on

(only when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.)

The roll sensing function for the

curtain shield airbags and seat

belt pretensioners will turn back

on automatically each time the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to IGNITION ON mode.

 This switch only should be used

In a situation where the inflation is not desired (such as during extreme off

road driving).

 Operating conditions when the RSCA OFF indicator is on

 The curtain shield airbag and seat belt pretensioner will not activate in a

vehicle rollover.

 The curtain shield airbag will activate in a severe side impact.

 The pretensioner will activate in a severe frontal collision.

CAUTION

 While normal driving

Make sure the RSCA OFF indicator is not turned on. If it is left on, the curtain

shield airbag will not activate in the event of an accident, which may result in

death or serious injury.

158

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Child restraint systems

Points to remember

Studies have shown that installing a child restraint on a rear seat is

much safer than installing one to the front passenger seat.

 Choose a child restraint system appropriate to the age and size of

the child.

 For installation details, follow the instructions provided with the

child restraint system.

General installation instructions are provided in this manual.

(P. 167)

 Toyota recommends that you use a child restraint system which

conforms to the regulation “ECE No.44”.

Types of child restraints

Child restraint systems are classified into the following 5 groups

according to the regulation “ECE No.44”.

Group 0: Up to 10 kg (22 lb.) (0 - 9 months)

Group 0

: Up to 13 kg (28 lb.) (0 - 2 years)

Group I: 9 to 18 kg (20 to 39 lb.) (9 months - 4 years)

Group II: 15 to 25 kg (34 to 55 lb.) (4 years - 7 years)

Group III: 22 to 36 kg (49 to 79 lb.) (6 years - 12 years)

In this owner’s manual, the following popular 3 types of child restraint

systems that can be secured with the seat belts are explained.

Toyota strongly urges the use of child restraint systems.

159

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Baby seat

Equal to Group 0 and 0

of “ECE

No.44”

Child seat

Equal to Group 0

and I of “ECE

No.44”

Junior seat

Equal to Group II and III of “ECE

No.44”

160

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions

Provided information in the table shows your child restraint system

suitability for various seating positions.

Front passenger

seat

Second seat

Third

seat

Airbag manual

on-off switch

OFF

Outside Center Outside

Up to 10 kg

(22 lb.)

(0 - 9 months)

Never put

* UUL1

Up to 13 kg

(28 lb.)

(0 - 2 years)

Never put

* UUL1

9 to 18 kg

(20 to 39 lb.)

(9 months -

4 years)

Rear-

facing —

Never put

* UUL2

Forward-

facing —

II, III

15 to 36 kg

(34 to 79 lb.)

(4 - 12 years)

UF U

* UUL3

Mass groups

Seating

position

161

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

U: Suitable for “universal” category child restraint system approved

for the use in this mass group.

UF: Suitable for forward-facing “universal” category child restraint

system approved for the use in this mass group.

L1: Suitable for “TOYOTA BABY SAFE (0 to 13 kg [0 to 28 lb.])”

approved for the use in this mass group

L2: Suitable for “TOYOTA DUO (9 to 18 kg [20 to 39 lb.])” approved

for the use in this mass group

L3: Suitable for “TOYOTA KID (15 to 36 kg [34 to 79 lb.])” approved

for the use in this mass group

X: Not suitable seat position for children in this mass group.

NOTE:

*: When you use child restraint system on the passenger seat, you

must adjust the seat cushion to the uppermost position.

Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned in

the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be care-

fully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and

retailer.

162

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Child restraint system suitability for various seating positions

(with ISOFIX rigid anchor)

Provided information in the table shows your child restraint system

suitability for various seating positions.

Mass groups Size class Fixture

Vehicle ISOFIX

positions

Second seat

Outside

Carrycot

ISO/L1

ISO/L2

(1) X

Up to 10 kg (22 lb.)

(0 - 9 months)

ISO/R1

(1) X

Up to 13 kg (28 lb.)

(0 - 2 years)

ISO/R1

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

(1) X

9 to 18 kg

(20 to 39 lb.)

(9 months - 4 years)

ISO/R2

ISO/R3

ISO/F2

IUF

ISO/F2X

IUF

ISO/F3

IUF

(1) X

II, III

15 to 36 kg

(34 to 79 lb.)

(4 - 12 years)

(1) X

163

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

(1) For the child restraint system which do not carry the ISO/XX size

class identification (A to G), for the applicable mass group, the

car manufacturer shall indicate the vehicle specific ISOFIX child

restraint system(s) recommended for each position

Key of letters inserted in the above table:

IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing child restraint systems of uni-

versal category approved for use in this mass group

X: ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems in

this mass group and/or this size class.

Other child restraint systems different from the systems mentioned in

the table can be used, but the suitability of the systems must be care-

fully checked with the child restraint system manufacturer and

retailer.

164

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When installing the child restraint system on the front passenger seat

 Selecting an appropriate child restraint system

Get an appropriate child restraint system for the child. If a child is too large

for a child restraint system, sit the child on a rear seat and use the vehicle’s

seat belt. (P. 100)

When you have to use a child restraint

system on the front passenger seat,

adjust the following:

 The seatback to the most upright

position

 The seat cushion to the fully rear-

ward and highest position

 The seat belt height to the lowest

position

ITY17C108

165

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Using a child restraint system

The use of a child restraint system not suitable for the vehicle may not prop-

erly secure the infant or child, resulting in serious injury or even death.

 Child restraint precautions

 For effective protection in automobile accidents and sudden stops, a child

must be properly restrained, using a seat belt or child restraint system

depending on the age and size of the child. Holding a child in your arms is

not a substitute for a child restraint system. In an accident, the child can be

crushed against the windshield, or between you and the vehicle’s interior.

 Toyota strongly urges the use of a proper child restraint system that con-

forms to the size of the child, installed on the rear seat. According to acci-

dent statistics, the child is safer when properly restrained in the rear seat

than in the front seat.

 Never install a rear-facing child restraint system on the front passenger

seat when the airbag manual on-off switch is ON. (P. 179)

In the event of an accident, the force of the rapid inflation of the front pas-

senger airbag can cause death or serious injury to the child if the rear-fac-

ing child restraint system is installed on the front passenger seat when the

airbag manual on-off switch is ON.

 A forward-facing child restraint system should allowed to be installed on

the front passenger seat only when it is unavoidable. Always move the

seat as far back as possible, because the front passenger airbag could

inflate with considerable speed and force. Otherwise, the child may be

killed or seriously injured.

166

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Child restraint precautions

 Do not allow the child to lean his/her head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the seat, front, center and rear pillars or

roof side rail from which the side airbags or curtain shield airbags deploy

even if the child is seated in the child restraint system. It is dangerous if

the side airbags and curtain shield airbags inflate, and the impact could

cause death or serious injury to the child.

 Make sure you have complied with all installation instructions provided by

the child restraint manufacturer and that the system is properly secured. If

it is not secured properly, it may cause death or serious injury to the child

in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

 When children are in the vehicle

Do not allow children to play with the seat belt. If the seat belt becomes

twisted around a child’s neck, it may lead to choking or other serious injuries

that could result in death.

If this occurs and the buckle cannot be unfastened, scissors should be used

to cut the belt.

 When the child restraint system is not in use

 Keep the child restraint system properly secured on the seat even if it is

not in use. Do not store the restraint unsecured in the passenger compart-

ment.

 If it is necessary to detach the child restraint system, remove it from the

vehicle or store it securely in the luggage compartment. This will prevent it

from injuring passengers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or

accident.

167

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Installing child restraints

Follow the child restraint system manufacturer’s instructions. Firmly

secure the child restraints using a seat belt or ISOFIX rigid anchor

(ISOFIX child restraint system). Attach the top strap when installing

a child restraint.

Seat belts (An ELR belt

requires a locking clip.)

ISOFIX rigid anchor (ISOFIX

child restraint system)

These exclusive fixing bars are

provided for the outside sec-

ond seats. (Buttons displaying

the location of the anchors are

attached to the seats.)

Anchor bracket (for top strap)

Anchor brackets are provided

for all second seats.

168

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Installing child restraints using a seat belt

 Rear-facing Baby seat/child seat

Fold the seatback while pulling

the seatback angle lever. Return

the seatback and secure it at the

first lock position. (P. 83)

Place the child restraint system

on the second seat facing the

rear of the vehicle.

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

STEP

169

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Install a locking clip near the tab

of the lap and shoulder belt by

inserting the lap and shoulder

webbing through the recesses of

the locking clip.

 Forward-facing Child seat

Fold the seatback while pulling

the seatback angle lever. Return

the seatback and secure it at the

first lock position. (P. 83)

Place the child restraint system

on the second seat facing the

front of the vehicle.

STEP

170

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Run the seat belt through the

child restraint system and insert

the plate into the buckle. Make

sure that the belt is not twisted.

Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

Install a locking clip near the tab

of the lap and shoulder belt by

inserting the lap and shoulder

webbing through the recesses of

the locking clip.

STEP

171

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Junior seat

Fold the seatback while pulling

the seatback angle lever. Return

the seatback and secure it at the

first lock position.

Place the child restraint system

on the seat facing the front of the

vehicle.

Sit the child in the child restraint

system. Fit the seat belt to the

child restraint system according

to the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions and insert the plate into the

buckle. Make sure that the belt is

not twisted.

Check that the shoulder belt is

correctly positioned over the

child’s shoulder, and that the lap

belt is as low as possible.

(P. 100)

STEP

172

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Removing a child restraint system installed with a seat belt

Push the buckle release button

and fully retract the seat belt.

Installation with ISOFIX rigid anchor (ISOFIX child restraint system)

Fold the seatback forward and

then back to the 1st lock position

(most upright position) until it

locks into place.

Take off the covers between the

seat cushion and seatback, then

confirm the position of the ISO-

FIX rigid anchors below the sym-

bol in the seatback.

STEP

ITY17C106

STEP

173

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Check the positions of the exclu-

sive fixing bars, and install the

child restraint system to the seat.

The bars are installed in the

clearance between the seat cush-

ion and seatback.

If the child restraint system has a

top strap, the top strap should be

latched onto the anchors.

ITY17C056

STEP

174

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Child restraint systems with a top strap

Secure the child restraint system using a seat belt or ISOFIX

rigid anchors, and do the following.

Outside

Adjust the head restraint to the

upmost position.

Center

Lower the head restraint to the

lowest position.

STEP

ITY17C099

175

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Open the anchor bracket cover,

latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

Make sure the top strap is

securely latched.

Outside only: Adjust the head

restraint to the downmost posi-

tion.

STEP

ITY17C058

STEP

 When installing a child restraint system

You need a locking clip to install the child restraint system. Follow the

instructions provided by the manufacturer of the system. If your child

restraint system does not provide a locking clip, you can purchase the fol-

lowing item from any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

Locking clip for child restraint system

(Part No. 73119-22010)

176

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When installing a child restraint system

Follow the directions given in the child restraint system installation manual

and fix the child restraint system securely in place.

If the child restraint system is not correctly fixed in place, the child or other

passengers may be seriously injured or even killed in the event of sudden

braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 If the driver’s seat interferes with the

child restraint system and prevents it

from being attached correctly, attach

the child restraint system to the right-

hand second seat (left-hand drive vehi-

cles) or the left-hand second seat (right-

hand drive vehicles).

 Child restraint system installed on the

third seat should not contact the second

seatbacks.

 Only put a forward-facing child restraint

system on the front seat when unavoid-

able. When installing a forward-facing

child restraint system on the front pas-

senger seat, move the seat as far back

as possible.

Failing to do so may result in death or

serious injury if the airbags deploy

(inflate).

177

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When installing a child restraint system

 Never use a rear-facing child restraint

system on the front passenger seat

when the airbag manual on-off switch is

on. (P. 179)

The force of the rapid inflation of the

front passenger airbag can cause death

or serious injury to children in the event

of an accident.

 There is a label(s) on the passenger

side sun visor, indicating it is forbidden

to attach a rear-facing child restraint

system to the front passenger seat.

Details of the label(s) are shown in the

illustrations below.

178

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When installing a child restraint system

 When a junior seat is installed, always ensure that the shoulder belt is

positioned across the center of the child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from the child’s neck, but not so that it could fall off the child’s

shoulder. Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury in the event

of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 Ensure that the belt and tab are securely locked and the seat belt is not

twisted.

 Shake the child restraint left and right, and forward and back to ensure that

it has been securely installed.

 Follow all installation instructions provided by the child restraint system

manufacturer.

 To correctly attach a child restraint system to the anchors

When using the ISOFIX rigid anchors, be sure that there are no foreign

objects around the anchors and that the seat belt is not caught behind the

child restraint system. Make sure the child restraint system is securely

attached, or it may cause death or serious injury to the child or other passen-

gers in the event of a sudden stop, sudden swerve or accident.

179

1-7. Safety information

Before driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Airbag manual on-off system

Deactivating the front seat passenger airbag, front passenger

side airbag and front passenger knee airbag

Insert the mechanical key into

the cylinder and rotate to the

“OFF” position.

The “OFF” indicator turns on.

(Only when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.)

This system deactivates the front passenger airbag, front passenger

side airbag and front passenger knee airbag.

Only deactivate the airbags when using a child restraint system on

the front passenger seat.

“PASSENGER AIR BAG”

indicator

This indicator turns on when

the airbag system is ON. (Only

when the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch is in IGNITION

ON mode.)

Airbag manual on-off switch

180

1-7. Safety information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 “PASSENGER AIR BAG” indicator information

If any of the following problems occurs, it is possible that there is a malfunc-

tion in the system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Neither “ON” nor “OFF” comes on.

 The indicator does not change when the airbag manual on-off switch is

switched to “ON” or “OFF”.

CAUTION

 When installing a child restraint system

For safety reasons, always install the child restraint system in a rear seat. In

the event that the rear seat cannot be used, the front seat can be used as

long as the airbag manual on-off system is set to OFF.

If the airbag manual on-off system is left ON, the strong impact of the airbag

deployment (inflation) may cause serious injury or even death.

 When a child restraint system is not installed on the front passenger

seat

Ensure that the airbag manual on-off system is set to ON.

If it is left OFF, the airbag may not deploy in the event of an accident, which

may result in serious injury or even death.

When driving

181

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle ............ 182

Engine (ignition) switch..... 194

Automatic transmission .... 199

Turn signal lever ............... 205

Parking brake ................... 206

Horn.................................. 207

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters .......... 208

Indicators and warning

lights ............................... 213

Multi-information

display ............................ 218

2-3. Operating the lights and

wipers

Headlight switch ............... 225

Automatic High Beam....... 229

Fog light switch................. 236

Windshield wipers and

washer............................ 238

Rear window wiper and

washer............................ 244

Headlight cleaner

switch ............................. 245

2-4. Using other driving

systems

Cruise control.................... 246

Toyota parking

assist-sensor .................. 250

4-Wheel AHC (Active

Height Control

Suspension).................... 261

AVS (Adaptive Variable

Suspension system) ....... 271

Four-wheel drive

system ............................ 272

Crawl Control (with Turn

Assist function) ............... 277

Multi-terrain Select............ 283

Multi-terrain Monitor.......... 289

Driving assist systems ...... 315

PCS (Pre-Crash Safety) ... 323

DPF (Diesel Particulate

Filter) system .................. 324

2-5. Driving information

Off-road precautions ......... 329

Cargo and luggage ........... 333

Winter driving tips ............. 335

Trailer towing .................... 339

182

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

2-1. Driving procedures

Driving the vehicle

The following procedures should be observed to ensure safe driv-

ing.

 Starting the engine (P. 194)

 Driving

With the brake pedal depressed, shift the shift lever to “D”.

(P. 199)

Release the parking brake. (P. 206)

Gradually release the brake pedal and gently push the

accelerator pedal to accelerate the vehicle.

 Stopping

With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.

If necessary, set the parking brake.

When the vehicle is stopped for an extended period of time, shift

the shift lever to “P” or “N”. (P. 199)

 Parking the vehicle

With the shift lever in “D”, push the brake pedal.

Set the parking brake. (P. 206)

Shift the shift lever to “P”. (P. 199)

When parking on a hill, if necessary, block the wheels.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to stop the

engine.

Lock the door, making sure that you have the electronic key

on your person.

STEP

183

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Starting on a steep uphill

Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “D”.

Gently depress the accelerator pedal.

Release the parking brake.

 Driving in the rain

 Drive carefully when it is raining, because visibility will be reduced, the

windows may become fogged-up, and the road will be slippery.

 Drive carefully when it starts to rain, because the road surface will be

especially slippery.

 Refrain from high speeds when driving on an expressway in the rain,

because there may be a layer of water between the tires and the road

surface, preventing the steering and brakes from operating properly.

 Engine speed while driving

In the following conditions, the engine speed may become high while driving.

This is due to automatic up-shifting control or down-shifting implementation

to meet driving conditions. It does not indicate sudden acceleration.

 The vehicle is judged to be driving uphill or downhill

 When the accelerator pedal is released

 When the brake pedal is depressed while power mode is selected

(P. 201)

STEP

184

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Breaking in your new Toyota

To extend the life of the vehicle, the following precautions are recommended

to observe:

 For the first 300 km (200 miles):

Avoid sudden stops.

 For the first 800 km (500 miles):

Do not tow a trailer.

 For the first 1000 km (600 miles):

• Do not drive at extremely high speeds.

• Avoid sudden acceleration.

• Do not drive continuously in the low gears.

• Do not drive at a constant speed for extended periods.

 Drum-in-disc type parking brake system

Your vehicle has a drum-in-disc type parking brake system. This type of

brake system needs bedding-down of the brake shoes periodically or when-

ever the parking brake shoes and/or drums are replaced. Have any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, perform the bedding down operation.

 Idling time before engine stop (diesel engine)

To prevent damage to the turbocharger, allow the engine to idle immediately

after high-speed driving or hill climbing.

 Operating your vehicle in a foreign country

Comply with the relevant vehicle registration laws and confirm the availability

of the correct fuel. (P. 678)

Driving condition Idling time

Normal city driving Not necessary

High-speed

driving

Constant speed of approx.

80 km/h (50 mph)

Approximately

20 seconds

Constant speed of approx.

100 km/h (62 mph)

Approximately 1 minute

Steep hill driving or continuous driving at 100

km/h (62 mph) or more (race track driving etc.)

Approximately

2 minutes

185

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Eco Driving Indicator

Eco Driving Indicator Light

During Eco-friendly acceleration (Eco

driving), Eco Driving Indicator Light

will turn on.

Eco Driving Indicator Zone Display

Suggests Zone of Eco driving with

current Eco driving ratio based on

acceleration.

Zone of Eco driving

Eco driving ratio based on accelera-

tion

If the vehicle exceeds Zone of Eco

driving, the right side of Eco Driving

Indicator Zone Display will blink and

Eco Driving Indicator Light will turn off.

Eco Driving Indicator Light will not oper-

ate in the following conditions:

 The shift lever is in anything other than

“D”.

 The vehicle is set to second start mode

or power mode. (P. 2 0 1 )

 The vehicle speed is approximately

130 km/h (81 mph) or higher.

 The Crawl Control is operating.

(P. 277)

186

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When starting the vehicle

Always keep your foot on the brake pedal while stopped with the engine run-

ning. This prevents the vehicle from creeping.

 When driving the vehicle

 Do not drive if you are unfamiliar with the location of the brake and accel-

erator pedals to avoid depressing the wrong pedal.

• Accidentally depressing the accelerator pedal instead of the brake

pedal will result in sudden acceleration that may lead to an accident

that could result in death or serious injury.

• When backing up, you may twist your body around, leading to a diffi-

culty in operating the pedals. Make sure to operate the pedals properly.

• Make sure to keep a correct driving posture even when moving the

vehicle only slightly, allowing you to depress the brake and accelerator

pedals properly.

• Depress the brake pedal using your right foot. Depressing the brake

pedal using your left foot may delay response in an emergency, result-

ing in an accident.

 Do not drive the vehicle over or stop the vehicle near flammable materials.

The exhaust system and exhaust gases can be extremely hot. This may

cause a fire if there is any flammable material nearby.

 Do not let the vehicle roll backwards while the shift lever is in a driving

position, or roll forward while the shift lever is in “R”.

Doing so may cause the engine to stall or lead to poor brake and steering

performance, resulting in an accident or damage to the vehicle.

 If the smell of exhaust is noticed inside the vehicle, open the windows and

check that the back door is closed. Large amounts of exhaust in the

vehicle can cause driver drowsiness and an accident, resulting in death or

a serious health hazard. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, immediately.

187

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Do not shift the shift lever to “P” while the vehicle is moving.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

 Do not shift the shift lever to “R” while the vehicle is moving forward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

 Do not shift the shift lever to “D” while the vehicle is moving backward.

Doing so can damage the transmission and may result in a loss of vehicle

control.

 Moving the shift lever to “N” while the vehicle is moving will disengage the

engine from the transmission. Engine braking is not available when “N” is

selected.

 During normal driving, do not turn off the engine. Turning the engine off

while driving will not cause loss of steering or braking control, but the

power assist to these systems will be lost. This will make it more difficult to

steer and brake, so you should pull over and stop the vehicle as soon as it

is safe to do so.

However, in the event of an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible

to stop the vehicle in the normal way: P. 670

 Use engine braking (downshift) to maintain a safe speed when driving

down a steep hill.

Using the brakes continuously may cause the brakes to overheat and lose

effectiveness. (P. 200)

188

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When stopped on an inclined surface, use the brake pedal and parking

brake to prevent the vehicle from rolling backward or forward and causing

an accident.

 Do not adjust the position of the steering wheel, the seat, or the inside or

outside rear view mirrors while driving.

Doing so may result in a loss of vehicle control that can cause accidents

that may result in death or serious injury.

 Always check that all passengers’ arms, heads or other parts of their bod-

ies are not outside the vehicle, as this may result in death or serious injury.

 Vehicles with the 4-Wheel AHC & AVS: When crossing rivers, turn off

height control after putting the vehicle height in high mode, and drive at

30 km/h (18 mph) or less. Otherwise the vehicle height may change due to

the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident. (P. 261)

 When driving on slippery road surfaces

 Sudden braking, acceleration and steering may cause tire slippage and

reduce your ability to control the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

 Sudden acceleration, engine braking due to shift changing, or changes in

engine speed could cause the vehicle to skid, resulting in an accident

 After driving through a puddle, lightly depress the brake pedal to make

sure that the brakes are functioning properly. Wet brake pads may prevent

the brakes from functioning properly. If the brakes on only one side are wet

and not functioning properly, steering control may be affected, resulting in

an accident.

 When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may

cause an accident and result in death or serious injury.

 If you hear a squealing or scraping noise (brake pad wear indicators)

Have your Toyota dealer check and replace the brake pads as soon as pos-

sible.

Rotor damage may result if the pads are not replaced when needed.

It is dangerous to drive the vehicle when the wear limits of the brake pads

and/or those of the rotors are exceeded.

189

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When the vehicle is stopped

 Do not race the engine.

If the vehicle is in any gear other than “P” or “N”, the vehicle may acceler-

ate suddenly and unexpectedly, and may cause an accident.

 Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running for a long time.

If such a situation cannot be avoided, park the vehicle in an open space

and check that exhaust fumes do not enter the vehicle interior.

 In order to prevent accidents due to the vehicle rolling away, always keep

depressing the brake pedal while the engine is running, and apply the

parking brake as necessary.

 If the vehicle is stopped on an incline, in order to prevent accidents caused

by the vehicle rolling forward or backward, always depress the brake pedal

and securely apply the parking brake as needed.

 Avoid revving or racing the engine.

Running the engine at high speed while the vehicle is stopped may cause

the exhaust system to overheat, which could result in a fire if combustible

material is nearby.

 When the vehicle is parked

 Do not leave glasses, cigarette lighters, spray cans, or soft drink cans in

the vehicle when it is in the sun.

Failure to do so may result in the following:

• Gas may leak from a cigarette lighter or spray can, and may lead to a

fire.

• The temperature inside the vehicle may cause the plastic lenses and

plastic material of eye glasses to deform or crack.

• Soft drink cans may fracture, causing the contents to spray over the

interior of the vehicle, and may also cause a short circuit in the vehi-

cle’s electrical components.

 Always apply the parking brake, shift the shift lever to “P”, stop the engine

and lock the vehicle.

Do not leave the vehicle unattended while the engine is running.

190

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator

turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer

mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain

and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this

time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in

“P”. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete

the shifting of the transfer mode. (P. 272)

 Do not touch the exhaust pipe while the engine is running or immediately

after turning the engine off.

Doing so may cause burns.

 Do not leave the engine running in an area with snow build-up, or where it

is snowing. If snowbanks build up around the vehicle while the engine is

running, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead

to death or a serious health hazard.

 Exhaust gases

Exhaust gases include harmful carbon monoxide (CO) that is colorless and

odorless. Inhaling exhaust gases may lead to death or a serious health haz-

ard.

 If the vehicle is in a poorly ventilated area, stop the engine. In a closed

area, such as a garage, exhaust gases may collect and enter the vehicle.

This may lead to death or a serious health hazard.

 The exhaust should be checked occasionally. If there is a hole or crack

caused by corrosion, damage to a joint or abnormal exhaust noise, be

sure to have the vehicle inspected and repaired by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Failure to do so may allow exhaust gases to enter the vehicle, resulting in

death or a serious health hazard.

191

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When taking a nap in the vehicle

Always turn the engine off. Otherwise, you may accidentally move the shift

lever or depress the accelerator pedal, which could cause an accident or fire

due to engine overheating. Additionally, if the vehicle is parked in a poorly

ventilated area, exhaust gases may collect and may enter the vehicle, lead-

ing to death or a serious health hazard.

 When braking the vehicle

 When the brakes are wet, drive more cautiously.

Braking distance increases when the brakes are wet, and may cause one

side of the vehicle to brake differently than the other side. Also the parking

brake may not securely hold the vehicle.

 If the power brake assist function does not operate, do not follow other

vehicles closely and avoid hills or sharp turns that require braking.

In this case, braking is still possible, but the brake pedal should be

depressed more firmly than usual. Also, the braking distance will increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

 Do not pump the brake pedal if the engine stalls.

Each push on the brake pedal uses up the reserve for the power-assisted

brakes.

 The brake system consists of 2 individual hydraulic systems: If one of the

systems fails, the other will still operate. In this case, the brake pedal

should be depressed more firmly than usual and the braking distance will

increase.

Have your brakes fixed immediately.

192

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 When driving the vehicle

 Do not depress the accelerator and brake pedals at the same time during

driving, as this may restrain driving torque.

 Do not use the accelerator pedal or depress accelerator and brake pedals

together to hold the vehicle on a hill.

 When parking the vehicle

Always put the shift lever in “P”. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to

move or the vehicle may accelerate suddenly if the accelerator pedal is acci-

dentally depressed.

 Avoiding damage to vehicle parts

 Do not turn the steering wheel fully in either direction and hold it there for a

long time.

Doing so may damage the power steering pump.

 When driving over bumps in the road, drive as slowly as possible to avoid

damaging the wheels, underside of the vehicle, etc.

 Diesel engine only: Make sure to idle the engine immediately after high-

speed driving or hill climbing. Stop the engine only after the turbocharger

has cooled down.

Failure to do so may cause damage to the turbocharger.

193

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 If you get a flat tire while driving

A flat or damaged tire may cause the following situations. Hold the steering

wheel firmly and gradually press the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle.

 It may be difficult to control your vehicle.

 The vehicle will make abnormal sounds.

 The vehicle will behave abnormally.

Replace a flat tire with a new one. (P. 629)

 When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded after heavy rain etc. Doing so may

cause the following serious damage to the vehicle.

 Engine stalling

 Short in electrical components

 Engine damage caused by water immersion

In the event that you drive on a flooded road and the vehicle is flooded, be

sure to have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional check the following.

 Brake function

 Changes in quantity and quality of oil and fluid used for the engine, trans-

mission, transfer, differentials, etc.

 Lubricant condition for the propeller shaft, bearings and suspension joints

(where possible) and the function of all joints, bearings, etc.

194

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Engine (ignition) switch

Performing the following operations when carrying the electronic

key on your person starts the engine or changes “ENGINE START

STOP” switch modes.

 Starting the engine

Check that the parking brake is set.

Check that the shift lever is set in “P”.

Sit in the driver’s seat and firmly depress the brake pedal.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator turns green.

Press the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch.

The engine can be started

from any “ENGINE START

STOP” switch mode.

Continue depressing the brake

pedal until the engine is com-

pletely started. The engine will

crank until it starts or for up to

30 seconds, whichever is less.

Diesel engine only: indi-

cator turns on. The engine

begins starting after the indica-

tor light goes out.

STEP

195

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch mode

Modes can be changed by pressing the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch with the brake pedal released. (The mode

changes each time the switch is pressed.)

OFF

Emergency flashers can be

used.

ACCESSORY mode

Some electrical components

such as the audio system can

be used.

The “ENGINE START STOP”

switch indicator turns amber.

IGNITION ON mode

All electrical components can

be used.

The “ENGINE START STOP”

switch indicator turns amber.

*: If the shift lever is in a position other than “P” when turning off the

engine, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will be turned to ACCES-

SORY mode, not to OFF.

196

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Operation of the “ENGINE START STOP” switch

When operating the “ENGINE START STOP” switch, one short, firm press is

enough. If the switch is pressed improperly, the engine may not start or the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch mode may not change. It is not necessary to

press and hold the switch.

 When the steering lock cannot be released

 If the engine does not start

The engine immobilizer system may not have been deactivated. (P. 127)

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

 When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch indicator flashes in amber

The system may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, immediately.

The green indicator light on the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch will flash and a

message will be shown on the multi-infor-

mation display. Press the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch again while turning

the steering wheel left and right.

197

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Auto power off function

If the vehicle is left in ACCESSORY mode for more than 20 minutes with the

shift lever in P, the “ENGINE START STOP” switch will automatically turn off.

However, this function cannot entirely prevent battery discharge. Do not

leave the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY

mode for long periods of time when the engine is not running.

 Electronic key battery depletion

P. 4 6

 When the electronic key battery is discharged

P. 655

 Conditions affecting operation

P. 4 4

 Note for the entry function

P. 4 7

198

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When starting the engine

Always start the engine while sitting in the driver’s seat. Do not depress the

accelerator pedal while starting the engine under any circumstances.

Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

 Stopping the engine in an emergency

If you want to stop the engine in an emergency while driving the vehicle,

press and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch for more than 2 seconds,

or press it briefly 3 times or more in succession. (P. 670)

However, do not touch the “ENGINE START STOP” switch while driving

except in an emergency. Turning the engine off while driving will not cause

loss of steering or braking control, but the power assist to these systems will

be lost. This will make it more difficult to steer and brake, so you should pull

over and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in ACCESSORY or IGNI-

TION ON mode for long periods without the engine running.

 When starting the engine

 Do not race a cold engine.

 If the engine becomes difficult to start or stalls frequently, have your vehi-

cle checked by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional immediately.

 Symptoms indicating a malfunction with the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch

If the “ENGINE START STOP” seems to be operating somewhat differently

than usual, such as the switch sticking slightly, there may be a malfunction.

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

199

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Automatic transmission

Select a shift position appropriate for the driving conditions.

 Shifting the shift lever

While the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION

ON mode, depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever.

200

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Shift position uses

: Shifting to the “D” position allows the system to select a gear suitable

for the driving conditions. Setting the shift lever to the “D” position is

recommended for normal driving.

: Selecting shift ranges using “S” mode restricts the upper limit of the

possible gear ranges, controls engine braking forces, and prevents

unnecessary upshifting.

Shift position Function

P Parking the vehicle or starting the engine

R Reversing

N Condition in which the power is not transmitted

D Normal driving*

S “S” mode driving*

(P. 202)

201

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Selecting a driving mode

The following patterns can be selected to suit current driving and

operating conditions.

Power mode

For powerful acceleration and

driving in mountainous

regions.

Normal mode

For normal driving.

Second start mode

For starting on slippery road

surfaces, such as on snow.

Press “2nd” to return to normal

mode.

202

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Changing shift ranges in “S” mode

Shift the shift lever to the “S” position and operate the shift lever.

Upshifting

Downshifting

The initial shift range in “S” mode is automatically set to “5” or “4”

according to the vehicle’s speed. However, the initial shift range may

be set to “3” or “2” if the AI-SHIFT has operated while the shift lever

was in the “D” position. (P. 204)

S-D

203

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Shift ranges and their functions

 Automatically selecting gears between 1 and 6 according to

vehicle speed and driving conditions. But, the gear is limited

according to selected shift range.

 You can choose from 6 levels of engine braking force.

 A lower shift range will provide greater engine braking force than

a higher shift range, and the engine speed will also increase.

 “S” mode

 When the shift range is “5” or lower, holding the shift lever toward “+” sets

the shift range to “6”.

 To prevent excessive engine speed, a function was adopted that auto-

matically selects a higher shift range before the engine speed becomes

too high.

 To protect the automatic transmission, a function is adopted that auto-

matically selects a higher shift range when the fluid temperature is high.

 Downshifting restrictions warning buzzer (in the “S” mode)

To help ensure safety and driving performance, downshifting operation may

sometimes be restricted. In some circumstances, downshifting may not be

possible even when the shift lever is operated. (The warning buzzer will

sound twice.)

 When driving with the cruise control activated

Even when performing the following actions with the intent of enabling

engine braking, engine braking will not activate because cruise control will

not be canceled.

 While driving in “S” mode, downshifting to “5” or “4”. (P. 202, 246)

 When switching the driving mode to power mode while driving in “D”

position. (P. 201, 246)

204

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Second start mode automatic deactivation

Second start mode is automatically deactivated if the engine is turned off

after driving in second start mode.

 If the shift lever cannot be shifted from “P”

P. 653

 If the “S” indicator does not come on even after shifting the shift lever

to “S”

This may indicate a malfunction in the automatic transmission system. Have

the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional, immediately.

(In this situation, the vehicle will operate as if the shift lever is in “D”.)

 AI-SHIFT

The AI-SHIFT automatically shifts the gear to the suitable position according

to the driver performance and driving conditions.

The AI-SHIFT automatically operates when the shift lever is in the “D” posi-

tion. (Shifting the shift lever to the “S” position cancels the function.)

205

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Turn signal lever

 Turn signals can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 If the indicators flash faster than usual

Check that a light bulb in the front or rear turn signal lights has not burned

out.

Right turn

Left turn

Move and hold the lever

partway to signal a lane

change.

The right hand signal will flash

until you release the lever.

Move and hold the lever

partway to signal a lane

change.

The left hand signal will flash

until you release the lever.

ITO21C036

206

2-1. Driving procedures

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Parking brake

 Usage in winter time

P. 335

NOTICE

 Before driving

Fully release the parking brake.

Driving the vehicle with the parking brake set will lead to brake components

overheating, which may affect braking performance and increase brake

wear.

Sets the parking brake

Fully set the parking brake

while depressing the brake

pedal.

Releases the parking brake

Slightly raise the lever and

lower it completely while press-

ing the button.

207

2-1. Driving procedures

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Horn

 After adjusting the steering wheel (vehicles with manual tilt and tele-

scopic steering wheel)

Make sure that the steering wheel is securely locked.

The horn may not sound if the steering wheel is not securely locked.

(P. 106)

To sound the horn, press on or

close to the mark.

208

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

2-2. Instrument cluster

Gauges and meters

Tachometer

Displays the engine speed in revolutions per minute

Engine coolant temperature gauge

Displays the engine coolant temperature

Fuel gauge

Displays the quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

Speedometer

Displays the vehicle speed

Voltmeter

Displays the charge state

Multi-information display

Presents the driver with a variety of driving-related data (P. 218)

209

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Switching the display

Pressing this button switches between odometer and trip meter.

Odometer

Trip meter A

Trip meter B*

: Pushing and holding the button

will reset the trip meter.

Odometer and trip meter

Odometer: Displays the total distance the vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter: Displays the distance the vehicle has been driven since the

meter was last reset. Trip meters A and B can be used to record and

display different distances independently.

Engine oil pressure gauge

Displays the engine oil pressure

Odometer/trip meter display change button

Switches between odometer and trip meter displays

Instrument panel light control dial

The brightness of the instrument panel light can be adjusted

210

2-2. Instrument cluster

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Eco Driving Indicator Light customization

Eco Driving Indicator Light can activated or deactivated.

While the odometer is being dis-

played, press and hold the

odometer/trip meter display

change button to display the Eco

Driving Indicator Light customi-

zation screen.

Press the odometer/trip meter display change button to set

Eco Driving Indicator Light to on or off.

Press and hold the odometer/trip meter display change button

to complete the setting.

STEP

211

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Instrument cluster light control

The brightness of the instrument cluster light can be adjusted.

Darker

Brighter

 The meters and display illuminate when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 The brightness of the instrument cluster lights

When the tail lights are turned on, the meter’s brightness will be reduced

slightly unless the meter brightness level adjustment is set to the brightest

setting.

On some models: If the tail lights are turned on when the surroundings are

dark, the meter’s brightness will reduce slightly. However, when the sur-

roundings are bright, such as during the daytime, the meter’s brightness will

not be reduced even if the tail lights are turned on.

212

2-2. Instrument cluster

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the engine and its components

 Do not let the indicator needle of the tachometer enter the red zone, which

indicates the maximum engine speed.

 The engine may be overheating if the engine coolant temperature gauge is

in the red zone (“H”). In this case, immediately stop the vehicle in a safe

place, and check the engine after it has cooled completely. (P. 663)

 Voltmeter

When the voltmeter indicates 19 V or higher or 9 V or lower while the engine

is running, there may be a battery or charging system malfunction. Have the

vehicle inspected at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Engine oil pressure gauge

When the value of the engine oil pressure gauge drops while the engine is

running, stop the vehicle in a safe place immediately and check the amount

of engine oil. (P. 525)

When the oil pressure drops even though the engine oil amount has not

decreased, or if the oil pressure does not increase when engine oil is added,

contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, as there may be a problem with the lubrication

system.

213

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Indicators and warning lights

The indicator and warning lights on the instrument cluster and cen-

ter panel inform the driver of the status of the vehicle’s various sys-

tems.

For the purpose of explanation, the following illustration displays all

indicators and warning lights illuminated.

Instrument cluster

214

2-2. Instrument cluster

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Center panel (vehicles with navigation system)

Center panel (vehicles without navigation system)

ITY22C018

215

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Indicators

The indicators inform the driver of the operating state of the

vehicle’s various systems.

Turn signal indicator

(P. 205)

Crawl Control indicator

(P. 277)

Headlight high beam

indicator (P. 225)

Roll sensing of curtain

shield airbags off indica-

tor (P. 157)

Tail light indicator

(P. 225)

“PWR” mode indicator

(P. 201)

(if equipped)

Front fog light indicator

(P. 236)

Automatic transmission

second start indicator

(P. 201)

Rear fog light indicator

(P. 236)

Low speed four-wheel

drive indicator light

(P. 272)

Cruise control indicator

(P. 246)

Center differential lock

indicator (P. 272)

Slip indicator (P. 316)

“PASSENGER AIR

BAG” indicator

(P. 179)

(diesel engine)

Engine preheating indi-

cator (P. 194)

Multi-terrain Select indi-

cator (P. 283)

“SET” indicator

(P. 246)

VSC OFF indicator

(P. 317)

Eco Driving Indicator

Light (P. 185)

(if equipped)

Automatic High Beam

indicator (P. 229)

Turn Assist function

indicator (P. 277)

1, 2

216

2-2. Instrument cluster

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

:These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned

to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being per-

formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few sec-

onds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come

on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for details.

:The light flashes to indicate that the system is operating.

 Warning lights

Warning lights inform the driver of malfunctions in any of the

vehicle’s systems. (P. 601)

*: These lights turn on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned

to IGNITION ON mode to indicate that a system check is being per-

formed. They will turn off after the engine is started, or after a few sec-

onds. There may be a malfunction in a system if a light does not come

on, or if the lights do not turn off. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for details.

(if equipped)

(if equipped) (if equipped)

217

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If a safety system warning light does not come on

Should a safety system light such as Multi Terrain ABS and the SRS airbag

warning light not come on when you start the engine, this could mean that

these systems are not available to help protect you in an accident, which

could result in death or serious injury. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, immediately if this occurs.

218

2-2. Instrument cluster

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Multi-information display

The multi-information display presents the driver with a variety of

driving-related data.

 Trip information (P. 220)

Displays driving range, fuel consumption and other cruising related

information.

 Speedometer (P. 220)

 Turn-by-turn navigation (vehicles with a navigation system)

(P. 220)

 Front tire angle (P. 220)

 Toyota parking assist-sensor display (if equipped) (P. 250)

Automatically displayed when using Toyota parking assist-sensor.

 4-Wheel AHC display (if equipped) (P. 261)

 Multi-terrain Select display (P. 283)

 Crawl Control display (P. 277)

219

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Shift position and shift range (P. 199)

Displays the selected shift position or selected shift range.

 Warning messages (P. 607)

Automatically displayed when a malfunction occurs in one of the vehi-

cle’s system.

220

2-2. Instrument cluster

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Switch the display

Display items can be switched

by pressing the “DISP” switch.

Display items

 Average fuel consumption and Eco Driving Indicator Zone

Display (P. 185)

 Average fuel consumption after refueling

Displays the average fuel consumption

since the function was reset

• The function can be reset by pressing the

“DISP” switch for longer than 1 second

when the average fuel consumption is dis-

played.

• Use the displayed average fuel consump-

tion as a reference.

Displays the average fuel consumption

since the vehicle was last refueled

Use the displayed average fuel consumption

as a reference.

221

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Current fuel consumption

 Driving range

 Speedometer

Displays the current rate of fuel consump-

tion

Displays the estimated maximum distance

that can be driven with the quantity of fuel

remaining

• This distance is computed based on your

average fuel consumption. As a result, the

actual distance that can be driven may dif-

fer from that displayed.

• When only a small amount of fuel is added

to the tank, the display may not be

updated.

When refueling, turn the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off. If the vehicle is refueled

without turning the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off, the display may not be

updated.

Displays the vehicle speed.

The speed units (MPH or km/h) can be

selected by pressing the “DISP” switch for

longer than 1 second when the speedometer

is displayed.

222

2-2. Instrument cluster

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Average vehicle speed

 Front tire angle

 Turn-by-turn navigation (vehicles with a navigation system)

 Display off

A blank screen is displayed

Displays the average vehicle speed since

the engine was started or the function was

reset

The function can be reset by pressing the

“DISP” switch for longer than 1 second when

the average vehicle speed is displayed.

Displays the direction of the front tires

The tire direction is displayed in 3 stages for

both left and right, in accordance with the

angle of the tire.

The turn-by-turn navigation can be set to on

or off.

The function can be activated or deactivated

by pressing the “DISP” switch for longer than

1 second when turn-by-turn navigation setting

screen is displayed.

223

2-2. Instrument cluster

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 System check display

After turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,

“LAND CRUISER” is displayed while system operation is checked. When the

system check is complete, the normal screen will return.

 Turn-by-turn navigation (vehicles with navigation system)

 When disconnecting and reconnecting battery terminals

The following information data will be reset:

 Average fuel consumption after refueling

 Average fuel consumption

 Average vehicle speed

The turn-by-turn navigation appears only

while route guidance of the navigation

system is being performed. When a turn

approaches, the distance to the turn and

the turn direction are displayed.

Turn direction

Distance to the next turn

The image shown may differ from the

actual intersection.

224

2-2. Instrument cluster

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 The information display at low temperatures

Allow the interior of the vehicle to warm up before using the information dis-

play. At extremely low temperatures, the information display monitor may

respond slowly, and display changes may be delayed.

For example, there is a lag between the driver’s shifting and the new gear

number appearing on the display. This lag could cause the driver to down-

shift again, causing rapid and excessive engine braking and possibly an

accident resulting in death or serious injury.

225

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

Headlight switch

The headlights can be operated manually or automatically.

The front position, tail,

license plate and

instrument panel lights

turn on.

The headlights and all

lights listed above turn

on.

The headlights and all

lights listed above turn

on and off automati-

cally.

(When the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch

is in IGNITION ON

mode)

ITO23C062

(if equipped)

226

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Turning on the high beam headlights

With the headlights on, push

the lever forward to turn on the

high beams.

Vehicles with the Automatic High

Beam system: When the light

switch is in “AUTO” position, the

Automatic High Beam system will

be activated. (P. 229)

Pull the lever back to the center

position to turn the high beams

off.

Pull the lever toward you to

turn on the high beams.

Release the lever to turn them off.

You can flash the high beams

with the headlights on or off.

ITO23C065

 Daytime running light system

 To make your vehicle more visible to other drivers, the front position

lights turn on automatically (at an increased intensity) whenever the

engine is started and the parking brake is released. Daytime running

lights are not designed for use at night.

 Compared to turning on the headlights, the daytime running light system

offers greater durability and consumes less electricity, so it can help

improve fuel economy.

227

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Headlight control sensor (if equipped)

 Automatic light off system

Vehicles without a headlight control sensor

Opening the driver’s door with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in

ACCESSORY or OFF mode will turn the headlights and tail lights off.

To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to

IGNITION ON mode, or turn the headlight switch off once and then back

to or .

Vehicles with a headlight control sensor

 When the light switch is in or : The lights (except for tail

lights) turn off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to ACCESSORY or OFF mode. (A buzzer sounds if the driver’s

door is opened at this time.)

 When the light switch is in the

AUTO position: The headlights and all

lights turn off automatically if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned to ACCESSORY or OFF mode and the driver’s door is opened.

To turn the lights on again, turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNI-

TION ON mode, or turn the light switch off once and then back to the

or position.

 Light reminder buzzer

A buzzer sounds when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to

ACCESSORY or OFF mode and the driver’s door is opened while the tail

lights are turned on.

The sensor may not function properly if

an object is placed on the sensor, or any-

thing that blocks the sensor is affixed to

the windshield.

Doing so interferes with the sensor

detecting the level of ambient light and

may cause the automatic headlight sys-

tem to malfunction.

228

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Automatic headlight leveling system

The level of the headlights is automatically adjusted according to the number

of passengers and the loading condition of the vehicle to ensure that the

headlights do not interfere with other road users.

 Customization

Settings (e.g. light sensor sensitivity) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the lights on longer than necessary when the engine is not run-

ning.

229

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Automatic High Beam

The Automatic High Beam uses an in-vehicle camera sensor to

assess the brightness of streetlights, the lights of oncoming and

preceding vehicles, etc., and automatically turns high beam on or off

as necessary.

 Activating the Automatic High Beam system

Push the lever away from you

with the headlight switch in the

“AUTO” position when the

“ENGINE START STOP”

switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

The Automatic High Beam indi-

cator will come on when the

headlights are turned on auto-

matically to indicate that the

system is active.

230

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Turning the high beam on/off manually

Switching to low beam

Pull the lever to the original

position.

Switching to high beam

Turn the light switch to the

231

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 High beam automatic turning on or off conditions

When all of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be

automatically turned on (after approximately 1 second):

 Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

 The area ahead of the vehicle is dark.

 There are no oncoming or preceding vehicles with headlights or

tail lights turned on.

If any of the following conditions are fulfilled, high beam will be

automatically turned off:

 Vehicle speed drops below approximately 30 km/h (19 mph).

 The area ahead of the vehicle is not dark.

 Oncoming or preceding vehicles have headlights or tail lights

turned on.

232

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Limitations of the Automatic High Beam

Do not rely on the Automatic High Beam. Always drive safely, taking care to

observe your surroundings and turning high beam on or off manually if nec-

essary.

 Camera sensor detection information

 High beam may not be automatically turned off in the following situations:

• When oncoming vehicles suddenly appear from a curve.

• When the vehicle is cut in front of by another.

 High beam may be turned off if an oncoming vehicle that is using fog

lights without using the headlights is detected.

 Houselights, streetlights, red traffic signals, and illuminated billboards or

signs may cause the high beam to turn off.

 The following factors may affect the amount of time taken to turn high

beam on or off:

• The brightness of headlights, fog lights, and tail lights of oncoming and

preceding vehicles

• Road conditions (wetness, ice, snow etc.)

• The number of passengers and amount of baggage

 High beam may be turned on or off when unexpected by the driver.

233

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 In the situations below, the system may not be able to correctly detect the

surrounding brightness levels, and may flash or expose nearby pedestri-

ans to the high beam. Therefore, you should consider turning the high

beam on or off manually rather than relying on the Automatic High Beam

system.

• In bad weather (rain, snow, fog, sandstorms etc.)

• The windshield is obscured by fog, mist, ice, dirt etc.

• The windshield is cracked or damaged.

• The inside rear view mirror or camera sensor is deformed or dirty.

• The camera sensor temperature is extremely high.

• Surrounding brightness levels are equal to those of headlights, tail

lights or fog lights.

• Vehicles ahead have headlights that are either switched off, dirty, are

changing color, or are not aimed properly.

• When driving through an area of intermittently changing brightness and

darkness.

• When driving on frequently and repeatedly ascending/descending

roads, or roads with rough, bumpy or uneven surfaces (such as stone-

paved roads, gravel tracks etc.).

• When taking curves or driving on a frequently and repeatedly winding

road.

• There is a highly reflective object ahead of the vehicle, such as a sign

or a mirror.

• The back of a vehicle ahead is highly reflective, such as a container on

a truck.

• The vehicle’s headlights are damaged or dirty.

• The vehicle is listing or tilting, due to a flat tire, a trailer being towed etc.

• The Automatic High Beam indicator is flashing.

• The high beam and low beam are repeatedly being switched between

in an abnormal manner.

• The driver believes that the high beam may be causing problems or

distress to other drivers or pedestrians nearby.

234

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 If a warning message of the Automatic High Beam is displayed...

It may indicate a malfunction in the system. Contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Temporary lowering sensor sensitivity

The sensitivity of the sensor can be temporarily lowered.

To lower the sensitivity, push and hold “AUTO” on the inside rear view mirror

for 15 to 20 seconds, and release. The indicator light on the inside rear view

mirror will flash to indicate that the sensitivity has been lowered.

When the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off, the sensitivity will be

returned to its normal level.

 Customization

The Automatic High Beam can be turned off.

(Customizable features P. 695)

235

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Camera sensor

 Do not touch the camera sensor.

 Do not subject the inside rear view mirror or the camera sensor to a strong

impact.

 Do not disassemble the camera sensor.

 Do not spill liquid onto the inside rear view mirror or the camera sensor.

 Do not apply window tinting or stickers to the camera sensor or the area of

windshield near the camera sensor.

 Do not place items on the dashboard. There is a possibility that the cam-

era sensor will mistake items reflected in the windshield for streetlights,

the headlights of other vehicles, etc.

 Do not install a parking tag or any other accessories near or around the

inside rear view mirror and the camera sensor.

 Do not overload the vehicle.

 Do not modify the vehicle.

 Do not replace windshield with a non-genuine windshield.

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

Observe the following to ensure that the

Automatic High Beam functions correctly.

236

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Fog light switch

The fog lights assist visibility in difficult driving conditions, such as

in rain or fog. The fog lights can be used when the headlights or

front position lights are turned on. (For vehicles with a front and rear

fog light switch, the rear fog lights can be used when the front fog

lights are turned on.)

Front and rear fog light switch

Off

Front fog lights on

Both front and rear fog

lights on (Rotating the

switch ring again turns only

the rear fog light off.)

Releasing the switch returns

the ring to the position.

After the headlight switch is

turned off, the rear fog lights do

not come on even if you turn

on the headlight switch again.

237

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Rear fog light switch

Off

Rear fog light on

ITO23C070

238

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Windshield wipers and washer

Intermittent wiper with interval adjuster

Wiper intervals can be adjusted for intermittent operation (when

is selected).

Intermittent wiper operation

Low speed wiper operation

High speed wiper operation

Temporary operation

ITO23C071

239

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Increases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

Decreases the intermittent

windshield wiper frequency

Washer/wiper dual opera-

tion

Wipers operate automatically.

If the headlights are on, the

headlight cleaners will operate

once.

ITO23C076

ITO23C081

240

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Rain-sensing windshield wipers

With “AUTO” selected, the wipers will operate automatically

when the sensor detects falling rain. The system automatically

adjusts wiper timing in accordance with rain volume and vehicle

speed.

Rain-sensing wiper opera-

tion

Low speed wiper operation

High speed wiper operation

Temporary operation

ITO23C075

241

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Increases the sensitivity

Decreases the sensitivity

Washer/wiper dual opera-

tion

Wipers operate automatically.

(After operating several times,

the wipers operate one more

time after a short delay to pre-

vent dripping.)

If the headlights are on, the

headlight cleaners will operate

once.

ITO23C080

ITO23C085

242

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The windshield wiper and washer can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 Effects of vehicle speed on wiper operation (vehicles with rain-sensing

windshield wipers)

Vehicle speed affects the wiper operation when the washer is being used

(delay until drip prevention wiper sweep occurs) even when the wipers are

not in “AUTO” mode.

With “ ” selected, wiper operation will be switched from low speed to inter-

mittent wiper operation only when the vehicle is stationary.

(However, when the sensor sensitivity is adjusted to the highest level, the

mode cannot be switched.)

 Rain drop sensor (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

 If the wiper switch is turned to “AUTO” position while the “ENGINE

START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode, the wiper will operate

once to show that “AUTO” mode is activated.

 If the temperature of the rain drop sensor is 80C (176F) or higher, or

-10C (14F) or lower, automatic operation may not occur. In this case,

operate the wipers in any mode other than “AUTO”.

 If no windshield washer fluid sprays

Check that the washer nozzles are not blocked and if there is washer fluid in

the windshield washer fluid reservoir.

 Washer nozzle heaters (if equipped)

The washer nozzle heaters operate when the outside temperature is 5C

(41F) or less and the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON

mode.

 The sensor judges the amount of rain-

drops.

243

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Caution regarding the use of windshield wipers in “AUTO” mode (vehi-

cles with rain-sensing windshield wipers)

The windshield wipers may operate unexpectedly if the sensor is touched or

the windshield is subject to vibration in “AUTO” mode. Take care that your

fingers or anything else do not become caught in the windshield wipers.

 Caution regarding the use of washer fluid

When it is cold, do not use the washer fluid until the windshield becomes

warm. The fluid may freeze on the windshield and cause low visibility. This

may lead to an accident, resulting in death or serious injury.

 When the washer nozzle heaters are operating (if equipped)

Do not touch the area around the washer nozzle heaters, as they can

become very hot and burn you.

NOTICE

 When the windshield is dry

Do not use the wipers, as they may damage the windshield.

 When there is no washer fluid spray from the nozzle

Damage to the washer fluid pump may be caused if the lever is pulled

toward you and held continually.

 When a nozzle becomes blocked

Do not try to clear it with a pin or other object. The nozzle will be damaged.

244

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Rear window wiper and washer

 The rear window wiper and washer can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

NOTICE

 When the rear window is dry

Do not use the wipers, as it may damage the rear window.

Intermittent window wiper

operation

Normal window wiper oper-

ation

Washer/wiper dual opera-

tion

Washer/wiper dual opera-

tion

245

2-3. Operating the lights and wipers

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Headlight cleaner switch

 The headlight cleaner can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode and the head-

light switch is turned on.

 Windshield washer linked operation

When the windshield washer is operated with the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch in IGNITION ON mode and the headlights on, the headlight cleaners

will operate once. (P. 238)

NOTICE

 When the washer fluid tank is empty

Do not use this function when the washer fluid tank is empty. This may

cause the washer fluid pump to overheat.

Washer fluid can be sprayed on the headlights.

Press the switch to clean the

headlights.

ITY23C039

246

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

2-4. Using other driving systems

Cruise control

Use the cruise control to maintain a set speed without depressing

the accelerator pedal.

Indicators

Cruise control switch

 Setting the vehicle speed

Press the “ON-OFF” button to

activate the cruise control.

Cruise control indicator will

come on.

Press the button again to

deactivate the cruise control.

Accelerate or decelerate the

vehicle to the desired speed,

and push the lever down to set

the speed.

“SET” indicator will come on.

The vehicle speed at the

moment the lever is released

becomes the set speed.

RES

SET

CANCE

STEP

RES

SET

CANCE

STEP

247

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Adjusting the set speed

To change the set speed, operate the lever until the desired set

speed is obtained.

Increases the speed

Decreases the speed

Fine adjustment: Momentarily

move the lever in the desired

direction.

Large adjustment: Hold the

lever in the desired direction.

The set speed will be increased or decreased as follows:

Fine adjustment: By approximately 1.6 km/h (1 mph) each time the

lever is operated.

Large adjustment: The set speed can be increased or decreased

continually until the lever is released.

 Canceling and resuming the constant speed control

Pulling the lever toward you

cancels the constant speed

control.

The speed setting is also can-

celed when the brakes are

applied.

Pushing the lever up

resumes the constant

speed control.

Resuming is available when

the vehicle speed is more

than approximately 40 km/h

(25 mph).

248

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Cruise control can be set when

 Vehicles with an automatic transmission: The shift lever is in the “D” or

more than range “4” of “S” has been selected.

 Vehicle speed is above approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

 Accelerating after setting the vehicle speed

 The vehicle can be accelerated normally. After acceleration, the set

speed resumes.

 Even without canceling the cruise control, the set speed can be

increased by first accelerating the vehicle to the desired speed and then

pushing the lever down to set the new speed.

 Automatic cruise control cancelation

Cruise control will stop maintaining the vehicle speed in any of the following

situations.

 Actual vehicle speed falls more than approximately 16 km/h (10 mph)

below the preset vehicle speed.

At this time, the memorized set speed is not retained.

 Actual vehicle speed is below approximately 40 km/h (25 mph).

 VSC is activated.

 The switching operation continues for 5 seconds or more after the center

differential lock switch has been operated.

 If the warning message for the cruise control is shown on the multi-

information display

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate the system, and then press

the button again to reactivate the system.

If the cruise control speed cannot be set or if the cruise control cancels

immediately after being activated, there may be a malfunction in the cruise

control system. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

249

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To avoid operating the cruise control by mistake

Switch the cruise control off using the “ON-OFF” button when not in use.

 Situations unsuitable for cruise control

Do not use cruise control in any of the following situations.

Doing so may result in loss of control and could cause an accident resulting

in death or serious injury.

 In heavy traffic

 On roads with sharp bends

 On winding roads

 On slippery roads, such as those covered with rain, ice or snow

 On steep hills

Vehicle speed may exceed the set speed when driving down a steep hill.

 When your vehicle is towing a trailer or during emergency towing

250

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Toyota parking assist-sensor



: If equipped

The distance from your vehicle to nearby obstacles when parallel

parking or maneuvering into a garage is measured by the sensors

and communicated via the multi-information display, touch screen

and a buzzer. Always check the surrounding area when using this

system.

 Sensor types

Front corner sensors

Rear corner sensors

Rear center sensors

 Toyota parking assist-sensor switch

On/off

To turn the system on, press

the switch. The indicator light

comes on and the buzzer

sounds to inform the driver that

the system is operational.

To turn the system off, press

the switch again.

251

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Multi-information display

Front corner sensor detec-

tion

Rear corner sensor detec-

tion

Rear center sensor detec-

tion

 Touch screen (vehicles with a navigation system)

When the Toyota parking

assist monitor or Multi-ter-

rain Monitor is not displayed

The graphic is automatically

displayed when an obstacle is

detected. The screen can be

set so that the graphic is not

displayed. (

P. 256)

When the Toyota parking

assist monitor or Multi-ter-

rain Monitor is displayed

(insert display)

A simplified image is dis-

played on the touch screen

when an obstacle is detected.

252

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Sensor detection display, obstacle distance

 Corner sensors

Approximate

distance to obstacle

Multi-

information

display

Touch screen

Insert display

Front:

50 cm (1.6 ft.) to

37.5 cm (1.2 ft.)

Rear:

60 cm (2.0 ft.) to

45 cm (1.5 ft.)

(continuous)

(continuous) (blinking)

Front:

37.5 cm (1.2 ft.) to

25 cm (0.8 ft.)

Rear:

45 cm (1.5 ft.) to

30 cm (1.0 ft.)

(continuous)

(blinking rapidly)

Front:

Less than 25 cm

(0.8 ft.)

Rear:

Less than 30 cm

(1.0 ft.)

(blinking)

(continuous) (continuous)

253

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Rear center sensors

Approximate distance

to obstacle

Multi-information

display

Touch screen

(insert display)

150 cm (4.9 ft.) to

80 cm (2.6 ft.)

(continuous)

(blinking slowly)

80 cm (2.6 ft.) to

65 cm (2.1 ft.)

(continuous)

(blinking)

65 cm (2.1 ft.) to

50 cm (1.6 ft.)

(continuous)

(blinking rapidly)

Less than

50 cm (1.6 ft.)

(blinking)

(continuous)

254

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Buzzer operation and distance to an obstacle

A beep sounds when the corner sensors and rear center sensors

are operating.

 The buzzer beeps faster as the vehicle approaches an obstacle.

When the vehicle comes within the following distance of the obsta-

cle, the buzzer sounds continuously:

• Front corner sensors: Approximately 25 cm (0.8 ft.)

• Rear corner sensors: Approximately 30 cm (1.0 ft.)

• Rear center sensors: Approximately 50 cm (1.6 ft.)

 When 2 or more obstacles are detected simultaneously, the beep

system responds to the nearest obstacle. If one or both come

within the above distances, the beep will repeat a long tone, fol-

lowed by fast beeps.

 You can change the volume of the warning beeps. (P. 256)

255

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Detection range of the sensors

Approximately 60 cm (2.0 ft.)

Approximately 150 cm (4.9 ft.)

Approximately 50 cm (1.6 ft.)

The diagram shows the detection

range of the sensors. Note that

the sensors cannot detect obsta-

cles that are extremely close to

the vehicle.

The range of the sensors may

change depending on the shape

of the object etc.

256

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Setting up Toyota parking assist-sensor (vehicles with naviga-

tion system)

You can change the warning beep volume and touch screen operat-

ing conditions.

Press the “SETUP” button.

Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

Touch “Toyota park assist” on the “Vehicle Settings” screen.

Alert volume setting

Display on/off

Alert distance setting

 Alert volume setting

The alert volume can be adjusted.

Touch “1” to “5” on the “TOYOTA park assist settings”.

Touch “OK”.

STEP

257

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Display on/off setting

On or off can be selected for Toyota parking assist-sensor display.

Touch “Display Off”.

When the “Display Off” indicator is turned on, the display of Toyota

parking assist-sensor will be off. Touch “Display Off” again to turn the

display of Toyota parking assist-sensor on.

Touch “OK”.

 Alert distance setting

Front or rear center sensors display and tone indication can be set.

Touch “Rear”.

Long distance or short distance can be selected.

Touch “OK”.

 The Toyota parking assist-sensor can be operated when

 Front corner sensors:

• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

• The shift lever is in a position other than “P”.

• The vehicle speed is less than approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).

 Rear corner and rear center sensors:

• The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

• The shift lever is in “R”.

 Toyota parking assist-sensor display

When an obstacle is detected while the Toyota parking assist monitor or

Multi-terrain Monitor is in use, the warning indicator will appear in the top

right of the screen even if the display setting has been set to off.

STEP

258

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Sensor detection information

 The sensor’s detection areas are limited to the areas around the vehi-

cle’s front corner and rear bumpers.

 Certain vehicle conditions and the surrounding environment may affect

the ability of the sensor to correctly detect obstacles. Particular instances

where this may occur are listed below.

• There is dirt, snow or ice on the sensor. (Wiping the sensors will

resolve this problem.)

• The sensor is frozen. (Thawing the area will resolve this problem.)

In especially cold weather, if a sensor is frozen the screen may show

an abnormal display, or obstacles may not be detected.

• The sensor is covered in any way.

• The vehicle is leaning considerably to one side.

• On an extremely bumpy road, on an incline, on gravel, or on grass

• The vicinity of the vehicle is noisy due to vehicle horns, motorcycle

engines, air brakes of large vehicles, or other loud noises producing

ultrasonic waves.

• There is another vehicle equipped with parking assist sensors in the

vicinity.

• The sensor is coated with a sheet of spray or heavy rain.

• The vehicle is equipped with a fender pole or wireless antenna.

• Towing eyelets are installed.

• The bumper or sensor receives a strong impact.

• The vehicle is approaching a tall or curved curb.

• In harsh sunlight or intense cold weather

• The area directly under the bumpers is not detected.

• If obstacles draw too close to the sensor.

• A non-genuine Toyota suspension (lowered suspension etc.) is

installed.

• People may not be detected if they are wearing certain types of cloth-

ing.

In addition to the examples above, there are instances in which, because

of their shape, signs and other objects may be judged by the sensor to be

closer than they are.

259

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The shape of the obstacle may prevent the sensor from detecting it. Pay

particular attention to the following obstacles:

• Wires, fences, ropes, etc.

• Cotton, snow and other materials that absorb sound waves

• Sharply-angled objects

• Low obstacles

• Tall obstacles with upper sections projecting outwards in the direction

of your vehicle

 The following situations may occur during use.

• Depending on the shape of the obstacle and other factors, the detec-

tion distance may shorten, or detection may be impossible.

• Obstacles may not be detected if they are too close to the sensor

• There will be a short delay between obstacle detection and display.

Even at slow speeds, there is a possibility that the obstacle will come

within the sensor’s detection areas before the display is shown and the

warning beep sounds.

• Thin posts or objects lower than the sensor may not be detected for

collision when approached, even if they have been detected once.

• It might be difficult to hear beeps due to the volume of audio system or

air flow noise of air conditioning system.

 If a message is displayed on the multi-information display

P. 607

260

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When using the Toyota parking assist-sensor

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely

and possibly cause an accident.

 Do not use the sensor at speeds in excess of 10 km/h (6 mph).

 The sensors’ detection areas and reaction times are limited. When moving

forward or reversing, check the areas surrounding the vehicle (especially

the sides of the vehicle) for safety, and drive slowly, using the brake to

control the vehicle’s speed.

 Do not install accessories within the sensors’ detection areas.

NOTICE

 When using Toyota parking assist-sensor

In the following situations, the system may not function correctly due to a

sensor malfunction etc. Have the vehicle checked by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional,

immediately.

 A beep does not sound when you turn the main switch on.

 The Toyota parking assist-sensor operation display flashes, and a beep

sounds when no obstacles are detected.

 If the area around a sensor collides with something, or is subjected to

strong impact.

 If the bumper collides with something.

 If the display shows continuously without a beep.

 If a display error occurs, first check the sensor.

If the error occurs even if there is no ice, snow or mud on the sensor, it is

likely that the sensor is malfunctioning.

 Notes when washing the vehicle

Do not apply intensive bursts of water or steam to the sensor area.

Doing so may result in the sensor malfunctioning.

261

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

4-Wheel AHC (Active Height Control Suspension)



: If equipped

The 4-Wheel AHC adjusts the vehicle height in accordance with driv-

ing conditions. There are 3 selectable modes, “HI” (high), “N” (nor-

mal), and “LO” (low).

 Height select switch/Height control OFF switch

“ ” (Higher) switch

“” (Lower) switch

Height control OFF switch

Push while the vehicle is

stopped. The “OFF” indicator

will appear on the multi-infor-

mation display, and the vehicle

height will be fixed in the cur-

rent mode. Push the switch

again to turn the system back

on.

 Multi-information display

Current mode

The vehicle is in the “N” (nor-

mal) height mode in the illus-

tration. and show

directions in which it is possi-

ble to adjust the vehicle height.

Height up

Height down

Height control “OFF” indica-

tor

When the height control “OFF”

indicator is displayed, the vehi-

cle height will not change even

if the “ ” or “ ” height select

switches are pressed.

262

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Vehicle height modes

Press “ ” to step up one height mode, and “ ” to step down one

height mode. (Ex. When in the low height mode, press “ ” once to

switch to the normal height mode, and twice to switch to the high

height mode.)

 “HI” (high) height mode

Vehicle height is about 50 mm (2.0 in.) higher at the front, and

about 60 mm (2.4 in.) higher at the rear than the normal mode

height.

This mode is suitable when driving on bumpy roads or through

water.

High height mode is only available when the vehicle speed is under

30 km/h (18 mph).

 “N” (normal) height mode

The standard vehicle height. This mode is suitable for ordinary

driving.

When driving at high speeds, the vehicle height is automatically

lowered by 20 mm (0.8 in.) in the front and 15 mm (0.6 in.) in the

rear, to ensure excellent aerodynamic characteristics and stability.

If the vehicle speed drops, normal height mode is automatically

resumed.

 “LO” (low) height mode

Vehicle height is about 60 mm (2.4 in.) lower at the front, and about

40 mm (1.6 in.) lower at the rear than the normal mode height.

This mode allows easy access to the vehicle.

Low height mode is only available when the vehicle is travelling at

12 km/h or less. When the vehicle speed exceeds 12 km/h (7

mph), normal height mode is automatically selected.

263

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Conditions for changing the vehicle height mode

Some modes may not be selectable depending on the vehicle speed

when the four-wheel drive control switch is in the “H4” position. Refer

to the following table.

Disabling the height control

When the height control OFF

switch is pressed with the vehi-

cle stopped.

The “OFF” indicator will appear

on the multi-information display,

and the vehicle height will be

fixed in the current mode. Push

the switch again to turn the sys-

tem back on.

Low mode Normal mode High mode

Under 12 km/h (7 mph) Yes Yes Yes

12 km/h (7 mph)

to 30 km/h (18 mph)

No Yes Yes

30 km/h (18 mph) or

over

No Yes No

264

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Operating conditions

 The engine must be running.

 Vehicle height control must be turned off.

 All side doors and the back door must be closed.

 Switching vehicle height mode while the engine is stopped

 If the engine is stopped while the vehicle height is being lowered, lower-

ing will continue.

 If any luggage is removed from the vehicle or if any occupants leave the

vehicle within approximately 30 seconds of the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch being turned OFF, the vehicle height may be lowered by the auto

leveling function.

 Operating the height select switch will have no effect while the engine is

stopped.

 Automatic change in vehicle height when the four-wheel drive control

switch is in the “L4” position

If the vehicle speed exceeds 3 km/h (2 mph) while driving on an uneven

road with the four-wheel drive control switch in the “L4” position, high mode

is automatically selected.

(On even roads, the height mode will not change.)

 Automatic change in vehicle height when in the high mode

 If the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (18 mph) with the four-wheel drive

control switch in the “H4” position, normal mode is automatically

selected.

 If the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h (25 mph) with the four-wheel drive

control switch in the “L4” position, the vehicle height is lowered to 25 mm

(1.0 in.) higher than the normal mode height. If the vehicle speed drops

to 20 km/h (13 mph) or less, high mode is automatically resumed.

265

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Extra high mode

If the vehicle becomes stuck or the Crawl Control system requests the vehi-

cle height be raised, extra high mode may be automatically selected when

the vehicle height is in high mode with the four-wheel drive control switch in

the “L4” position.

The vehicle height is raised to 20 mm (0.8 in.) higher than the high mode

height, or slightly higher.

 Extra high mode will change back to high mode when:

• The vehicle speed exceeds 10 km/h (6 mph)

• The four-wheel drive control switch is shifted to “H4”.

 If you push “ ” when in extra high mode, normal mode is selected.

 Extra high mode cannot be manually selected.

 Turning off the height control

 The system will remain off until the height control OFF switch is pushed

again, even if the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned off.

 Even if the system is turned off, the system automatically modulated if

the vehicle speed exceeds following.

• 30 km/h (18 mph) with high or low mode

• 80 km/h (50 mph) with normal mode

266

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Automatic leveling function

The vehicle is adjusted to a fixed height for each mode, regardless of the

number of occupants and the luggage load.

 However the vehicle cannot be raised if the vehicle load exceeds the fol-

lowing limits:

• Up to 4 occupants

* plus approximately 300 kg (661 lb.) in the normal

mode

• Up to 4 occupants

* plus approximately 200 kg (441 lb.) in the high

mode

*: average weight 68 kg (150 lb.) per person

 If the vehicle height cannot be raised when in the normal mode, and “LO”

appears on the display, the vehicle is loaded too heavily. Take extra care

when driving in this condition.

If the vehicle height cannot be raised even after unloading the vehicle,

press “ ” then “ ” on the height select switch. If the vehicle height still

cannot be raised, turn the ignition off then on again, then try once more.

 When the vehicle is stopped during driving

The activation of the automatic leveling function may cause the vehicle

height to change. This is not a malfunction.

 If the vehicle height does not change

If the vehicle is loaded too heavily, or the undercarriage has come into con-

tact with the road surface, the vehicle height cannot be raised/lowered.

267

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 In the following cases the 4-Wheel AHC will not operate

 The brake pedal has been depressed for a few seconds or longer while

the vehicle is stopped.

 Vehicle height control has not been frequently used.

 The suspension fluid temperature is lower than -30°C (-22°F).

 There is ice on the suspension.

 Driving on bumpy roads which may cause the suspension to fully elon-

gate.

 If the steering wheel is abruptly turned more than 3/4 of a revolution with

the center differential lock system activated.

 Cold weather operation

It may take longer for the vehicle height to change if the suspension fluid

temperature drops below -15°C (5°F).

The 4-Wheel AHC does not operate when the suspension fluid temperature

drops below -30°C (-22°F).

 In this case, even if the height select switch is pressed, the vehicle height

will not change. Once the vehicle has been driven for a short time and

the suspension fluid has been warmed to within normal operating limits,

the 4-Wheel AHC will begin operating and the vehicle height will auto-

matically change to the selected mode.

 When the suspension fluid is around -30°C (-22°F), the vehicle height

may not be able to be raised, even if the 4-Wheel AHC is operating. In

this case, push “ ” then “ ” on the height select switch after driving for

a short time longer to select the desired vehicle height.

 Parking and stopping tips

 If you immediately stop the engine after off-road driving, the vehicle

height may gradually lower. When parking, make sure there is nothing

under the vehicle that may come in contact with the underbody. The vehi-

cle will return to the set height when the engine is started.

 The vehicle height may change as the temperature changes when the

engine is stopped. The vehicle will return to the set height when the

engine is started.

268

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Propeller shaft noise

If the vehicle height is adjusted on a slope, or with the shift lever in a position

other than “P” or “N” while the vehicle is stopped, you may hear a sound

caused by the expansion and contraction of the propeller shaft. This does

not indicate a malfunction.

 4-Wheel AHC failure warning

If a malfunction occurs in the 4-Wheel AHC, normal mode is automatically

selected. However, the system may not switch to normal mode depending

on the location of the malfunction.

The warning message is displayed on the multi-information display, and the

4-Wheel AHC cannot be activated until the malfunction is corrected.

Stop the engine and start it again. If the warning message turns off, the sys-

tem is operating correctly. If the warning message continues to be displayed,

have the vehicle checked at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional as soon as possible.

269

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When switching the vehicle height mode

Before lowering the vehicle height, check that there are no people under or

around the vehicle, and check for obstacles.

If you do not do this, body parts may be caught in the vehicle, possibly lead-

ing to an accident.

 Using the high mode

The high mode should only be used when driving on rough roads, for exam-

ple when driving off-road. Because the vehicle’s center of gravity will

become higher when in the mode, the vehicle may become unstable when

turning abruptly, resulting in an accident.

 When jacking up the vehicle or installing tire chains

Turn off the height control and stop the engine, otherwise the vehicle height

may change due to the automatic leveling function, and you may catch part

of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

 When crossing rivers

Select the high mode and turn off the height control. Drive at 30 km/h

(18 mph) or lower. Otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the auto-

matic leveling function, resulting in an accident.

 If your vehicle must be towed

Put the vehicle height in the normal mode and turn off the height control, oth-

erwise the vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function

and you may catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

 If your vehicle becomes stuck in a ditch

Turn off the height control, otherwise the vehicle height may change due to

the automatic leveling function, resulting in an accident.

 When loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier

Do not switch to high mode. Sudden steering could cause the vehicle to lose

stability due to the vehicle’s higher center of gravity, possibly leading to an

accident.

270

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 When parking in areas with limited overhead height

After leaving the vehicle or unloading the luggage, the vehicle height may be

slightly higher than normal. Take care when overhead height is limited.

 To avoid damage to the vehicle

 Normal mode will be switched to automatically even if the vehicle is started

off in low mode. Take care when overhead height is limited.

 Do not select the low mode when driving on bumpy roads, as the under-

body of the vehicle may contact the road surface.

 Avoid rapid changes to the vehicle height

As the pump may overheat. Leave at a few seconds between selections

when changing the vehicle height mode.

271

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

AVS (Adaptive Variable Suspension system)



: If equipped

 Driving mode

 Mode is suitable for ordinary driving.

 Mode

is suitable for heavy load or driving on a unpaved road.

 With the four-wheel drive control switch at “L4”, the damping effect suit-

able for off-road driving will be provided.

AVS controls the suspension according to the road and driving con-

ditions. Selecting an optimum driving mode assists good riding

comfort and stability.

For driving on a bumpy road

For ordinary driving such as

in the city traffic

For sporty type driving such

as on winding mountain

roads and high speed driv-

ing

272

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Four-wheel drive system

Use the four-wheel drive control switch and center differential lock/

unlock switch to select the following transfer and center differential

modes.

 Four-wheel drive control switch

“H4” (high speed position)

Normal driving on all types of

roads.

“L4” (low speed position)

Driving requiring maximum

power and traction such as

climbing or descending steep

hills, off-road driving, and hard

pulling in sand or mud, etc.

 Center differential lock/unlock switch

Lock the center differential

when your vehicle’s wheels

get stuck in a ditch or when

driving on a slippery or bumpy

surface.

Unlock the center differential

after the wheels have been

freed, or after moving to a flat,

non-slippery surface.

273

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Shifting between “H4” and “L4”

 Shifting from “H4” to “L4”

Stop the vehicle completely.

Shift the shift lever to “N”.

Push and turn the four-wheel drive control switch fully clock-

wise.

Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indica-

tor light turns on.

 Shifting from “L4” to “H4”

Stop the vehicle completely.

Shift the shift lever to “N”.

Turn the four-wheel drive control switch fully counterclock-

wise.

Maintain this condition until the low speed four-wheel drive indica-

tor light turns off.

 The four-wheel drive control switch can be operated when

 The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 The shift lever is in the “N” position.

 The vehicle is stopped completely.

 The low speed four-wheel drive indicator light

The indicator light blinks while shifting between “H4” and “L4”.

STEP

274

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Advice for driving on slippery roads

 If you shift the four-wheel drive control switch to “L4” and the shift lever to

the “2” range of “S” while driving in steep off-road areas, the output of the

brake can be controlled effectively by the Active TRC, which assists the

driver to control the driving power of 4 wheels.

 Use the “1” range of “S” of the shift lever for maximum power and traction

when your wheels get stuck or when driving down a steep incline.

 The center differential lock indicator light

The indicator light blinks while locking/unlocking the center differential.

 The center differential lock/unlock switch can be operated when

 The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 The vehicle speed is less than 100 km/h (60 mph).

 Locking/unlocking the center differential

 When the four-wheel drive control switch is in L4 with the center differen-

tial locked, VSC is automatically turned off. (The center differential lock

and VSC OFF indicator lights come on.)

 If the operation is not completed, the center differential lock indicator

blinks. If the indicator light does not turn off when unlocking the center

differential, drive straight ahead while accelerating or decelerating, or

drive in reverse.

 If the center differential lock/unlock is not completed within 5 seconds

while the cruise control system is on, cancel the cruise control system.

275

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differen-

tial lock indicator light blinks

 If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light continues to blink when

using the four-wheel drive control switch, stop the vehicle completely,

move the shift lever to “N” and operate the switch again.

 If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator

turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The trans-

fer mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the power-

train and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At

this time, the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in

“P”. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete

the shifting of the transfer mode.

To complete the shifting, stop the vehicle completely, return the shift lever

to “N”, and confirm that the shift was completed (the indicator turns on/off).

 If the engine coolant temperature is too low, the four-wheel drive control

system may not be able to shift. When the engine is warmer operate the

switch again.

If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differential lock

indicator light continues to blink even after attempting the above, there may

be a malfunction in the engine, the brake system or the four-wheel drive sys-

tem. In this case, you may not be able to shift between “H4” and “L4”, and

the center differential lock may not be operable. Have the vehicle inspected

by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional immediately.

276

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

Never move the four-wheel drive control switch if the wheels have lost trac-

tion. Doing so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

 When the vehicle is parked

If the shift lever is moved before the low speed four-wheel drive indicator

turns on/off, the transfer mode may not be shifted completely. The transfer

mode disengages both the front and rear driveshafts from the powertrain

and allows the vehicle to move regardless of the shift position. (At this time,

the indicator blinks and the buzzer sounds.)

Therefore, the vehicle is free to roll even if the automatic transmission is in

“P”. You or someone else could be seriously injured. You must complete the

shifting of the transfer mode. (P. 272)

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the center differential

 For normal driving on dry and hard surface roads, unlock the center differ-

ential.

 Unlock the center differential after the wheels are out of the ditch or off the

slippery or bumpy surface.

 Do not push the center differential lock/unlock switch when the vehicle is

turning or when its wheels are spinning freely off the ground.

277

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Crawl Control (with Turn Assist function)

Allows travel on extremely rough off-road surfaces at a fixed low

speed without pressing the accelerator or brake pedal. Minimizes

loss of traction or vehicle slip when driving on slippery road sur-

faces, allowing for stable driving.

 Crawl Control switch

ON/OFF switch

Speed selection switch

Indicators

The Crawl Control indicator is

lit and the slip indicator flashes

when operating.

Multi-information display

The operating status and

speed select status of the

Crawl Control are shown on

the multi-information display.

278

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Speed modes

The following table shows

some typical terrains and the

recommended speed modes.

 Turn Assist function

This function assists cornering performance in accordance with

steering operation when driving through a tight corner. It main-

tains vehicle speed while driving and reduces the number of

turns needed to navigate a corner that requires turning the

wheel in the opposite direction.

Press the Turn Assist switch

while Crawl Control is operat-

ing.

Turn Assist indicator will come

on.

To turn the system off, press

the switch again.

Mode Road condition

Lo Rock, mogul (downhill) and gravel

(downhill)

Lo-Med

Mogul (uphill)

Med

Snow, mud, gravel (uphill), sand,

dirt, mogul (uphill) and grass

Med-Hi

279

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

When the system is turned off

Crawl Control

Press the ON/OFF switch while Crawl Control is operating. If the

switch is turned off, the slip indicator and the Turn Assist indicator

will go off (if the Turn Assist function is in use), the Crawl Control

indicator will flash until the system has turned off completely, and a

message stating that Crawl Control has been turned off will be dis-

played on the multi-information display for several seconds.

When turning off Crawl Control while driving, stop the vehicle

before the Crawl Control indicator turns off, or drive extremely

carefully.

Turn Assist function

Press the Turn Assist switch while the Turn Assist function is oper-

ating. When the switch is pressed, the Turn Assist indicator will go

off, and a message stating that the Turn Assist function has been

turned off will be displayed on the multi-information display for sev-

eral seconds.

280

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The Crawl Control and Turn Assist function can be operated when

Crawl Control

 The engine is running.

 The shift lever is in any gear other than “P” or “N”.

 The four-wheel drive control switch is in “L4”.

 The driver’s door is closed.

Turn Assist function

 Crawl Control is operating.

 The center differential is not locked.

 The accelerator and brake are not being operated.

 The shift lever is in any gear other than “P”, “R” or “N”.

 The steering wheel is turned very far.

 Automatic system cancelation

Crawl Control

In the following situations, the buzzer will sound intermittently and Crawl

Control will be canceled automatically. In this event, the Crawl Control indi-

cator will flash and then go off, the Turn Assist indicator will go off (if the Turn

Assist function is in use), and a message stating that Crawl Control has

been turned off will be displayed on the multi-information display for several

seconds

 When the shift lever is moved to “P” or “N”.

 When the four-wheel drive control switch is in “H4”.

 When the driver’s door is opened.

Turn Assist function

When the center differential is locked, the buzzer will sound intermittently

and the Turn Assist function will be canceled automatically. In this event, the

Turn Assist indicator will go off, and a message stating that the Turn Assist

function has been turned off will be displayed on the multi-information dis-

play for several seconds.

281

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Function limitations

Crawl Control

 In the following situations, brake control can be used to drive downhill at

a constant speed. However, engine control is not available when driving

uphill at a constant speed.

• When switched to second start mode.

 In the following situation, engine control and brake control will stop tem-

porarily. In this event, the Crawl Control indicator will flash.

• When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 25 km/h (15 mph).

Turn Assist function

In the following situations, the Turn Assist function will stop temporarily. In

this event, the Turn Assist indicator will flash.

 When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 10km/h (6 mph).

 When the shift lever is moved to “R”.

 When the Crawl Control system is operated continuously

 If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will

sound, a malfunction notification will be displayed on the multi-informa-

tion display, the Crawl Control indicator will go off, and Crawl Control will

be temporarily inoperable as a result of the brake system overheating. In

this event, stop the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the

brake system to cool down sufficiently until the “TRC OFF” on the multi-

information display goes off. (In the meantime, normal driving is possi-

ble.)

 If Crawl Control is used continuously for a long time, the buzzer will

sound, the system will be temporarily canceled, and a malfunction notifi-

cation will be displayed on the multi-information display as a result of the

automatic transmission system overheating. Stop the vehicle in a safe

place until the display goes off.

282

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Sounds and vibrations caused by the Crawl Control system

 A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is

started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-

cate that a malfunction has occurred in Crawl Control system.

 Either of the following conditions may occur when the Crawl Control sys-

tem is operating. None of these are indicators that a malfunction has

occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

 When there is a malfunction in the system

Warning lights and/or warning messages will turn on. (P. 601, 607)

CAUTION

 When using Crawl Control and Turn Assist function

Do not rely solely on the Crawl Control and Turn Assist function. This func-

tion does not extend the vehicle’s performance limitations. Always thor-

oughly check the road conditions, and drive safely.

 These conditions may cause the system not to operate properly

When driving on the following surfaces, the system may not be able to main-

tain a fixed low speed, which may result in an accident:

 Extremely steep inclines.

 Extremely uneven surfaces.

 Snow-covered roads, or other slippery surfaces.

NOTICE

 When using Turn Assist function

The Turn Assist function is a function to assist turning performance when

driving off road. The function may be less effective on paved road surfaces.

283

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Multi-terrain Select

Multi-terrain Select is a system that assists drivability in off-road sit-

uations.

Select a mode that most closely matches the type of terrain on

which you are driving from among 5 modes.

Brake control can be optimized in accordance with the selected

mode.

Multi-terrain Select mode

select switch

Multi-terrain Select indicator

Multi-information display

Displays status information

including operating status

and road type selection.

284

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Selectable modes

A mode which matches the road conditions can be selected from

among the following 5 modes.

MUD & SAND

LOOSE ROCK

MOGUL

ROCK & DIRT

ROCK

Mode Road condition

MUD & SAND

Suitable for muddy roads, sandy

roads, snow-covered roads, dirt

trails and other slippery or dirty con-

ditions

LOOSE ROCK

Suitable for slippery conditions con-

sisting of mixtures of earth and loose

rock

MOGUL

Suitable for very bumpy road condi-

tions, such as mogul roads

ROCK & DIRT

Suitable for very bumpy road condi-

tions, such as mogul or rocky roads

ROCK Suitable for rocky terrain

285

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Multi-terrain Select control starting conditions

When all of the following conditions are satisfied, the Multi-ter-

rain Select indicator will come on, the mode select screen will be

displayed on the multi-information display, and Multi-terrain

Select control will begin.

 The four-wheel drive control switch is in “L4”.

 Both Active TRC and VSC are not off.

 Crawl Control is off.

 Switching modes

Operate the Multi-terrain

Select mode select switch

during Multi-terrain Select

control to select a mode.

Once the mode is confirmed,

the mode name will be dis-

played and the control will

switch.

286

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Statement on the multi-information display

Mode selection

Display the Multi-terrain Select

mode.

The display switches in accor-

dance with the pressing of the

DISP switch (P. 220) or the

conditions of each system.

Mode status

Display the name of the

selected mode.

287

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Automatic system cancelation

In the following situations, the Multi-terrain Select indicator will go off, and

Multi-terrain Select will be canceled automatically.

 When the four-wheel drive control switch is in “H4”.

 When Active TRC and VSC are off.

 When Crawl Control is on.

 When it is difficult to generate traction

MUD & SAND mode provides the largest amount of tire slippage, followed

by LOOSE ROCK, MOGUL, ROCK & DIRT and ROCK mode.

Drivability can be improved by selecting a mode which provides a smaller

amount of tire slippage than the current mode when the amount of tire slip-

page is large, or conversely selecting a mode which provides a larger

amount of tire slippage than the current mode when the amount of tire slip-

page is small.

 When the vehicle is stuck

Switching the transfer and differential

For the operation of the following functions, refer to the following pages.

 Four-wheel drive system (P. 272)

 Center differential lock (P. 272)

 When the brake system operates continuously

The brake system may overheat. In this case, a buzzer will sound, either the

“TRC OFF” will be displayed on the multi-information display, and Multi-ter-

rain Select will be temporarily inoperable. In this event, stop the vehicle

immediately in a safe place, and allow the brake system to cool down suffi-

ciently. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

After a short time, the message on the multi-information display will go off,

and you will be able to use Multi-terrain Select.

 When there is a malfunction in the system

The slip indicator light will come on. Have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional, immediately.

288

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When using the Multi-terrain Select

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in

death or serious injuries:

 There is a chance that the selected mode may not be the most appropriate

in terms of road conditions such as pitch, slipperiness, undulation, etc.

(P. 284)

 Multi-terrain Select is not intended to expand the limits of the vehicle.

Check the road conditions thoroughly beforehand, and drive safely and

carefully.

NOTICE

 Precaution for use

The Multi-terrain Select is intended for use during off-road driving. Do not

use the system at any other time.

289

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Multi-terrain Monitor



: If equipped

The Multi-terrain Monitor displays the vehicle surroundings when

driving at low speeds, thus assisting off-road driving and helping the

driver to check the vehicle surroundings.

 By pressing the VIEW switch, the display can be shown, or the

display image can be changed between the front screen, wide

view front & side monitor screen, side-front simultaneous display

monitor screen, side-rear simultaneous display monitor screen

or rear screen. (The screens that can be selected differ depend-

ing on the shift position and the transfer mode.)

 By referring to the guidelines shown on the front monitor screen,

you can decide a driving line while assessing the distance to

obstacles ahead of the vehicle and confirm the projected path,

and by using the wide view front & side monitors, the side-front

simultaneous display monitor and the side-rear simultaneous

display monitor to identify objects in the vicinity or course of the

tires, you can drive while preventing the vehicle from becoming

stuck unexpectedly.

VIEW switch

Touch screen

290

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Switching the image

 When the shift lever is in “D”, “S” or “N”

Normal display mode: Press the VIEW switch to display the screen.

Automatic display mode: The screen is displayed automatically.

The screen will switch each time the VIEW switch is pressed. (The

switching screen differs in accordance with the transfer range.)

 When the shift lever is in “R”

If the shift lever is shifted to “R”, the rear monitor (Toyota parking

assist monitor) will be displayed, and the screen will switch every

time the VIEW switch is pressed.

Four-wheel drive

control switch position

Display

Wide view front & side monitor display

Side-front simultaneous display monitor

Side-rear simultaneous display monitor

Front monitor

Side-front simultaneous display monitor

Side-rear simultaneous display monitor

Rear monitor (Toyota parking assist monitor)

Side-front simultaneous display monitor

Side-rear simultaneous display monitor

291

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Automatic display mode

In this mode, the screen is switched automatically in response to vehi-

cle speed and shift lever operation, in addition to screen switching by

operating the VIEW switch.

Touch “AUTO” on the front or

wide view front & side monitor

screen.

The “AUTO” indicator will

come on.

Touch “AUTO” again to return

to normal display mode.

292

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Range covered by each camera

Front monitor

Side-front simultaneous dis-

play monitor

Side-rear simultaneous dis-

play monitor

Rear monitor

*: Range of wide view front & side

monitor display (The monitor for

side displays passenger’s side

only.)

The illustration shown here is an example. As such, the actual visible area

may be different. See P. 306 for information about the visual range of each

camera.

293

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Display

 Front monitor

The image from the front camera

is displayed. Use this monitor to

help check the area in front of

the vehicle for safety. Guidelines

are shown to help determine the

course.

 Wide view front & side monitor display

Images from the front and the

sides of the vehicle are dis-

played.

This display is used to verify the

situation at crossings with poor

visibility, and to assist with safety

confirmation when turning right

(left-hand drive vehicles) or left

(right hand drive vehicles).

Guidelines can also be displayed

as a steering guide when turning

right (left-hand drive vehicles) or

left (right-hand drive vehicles).

294

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Side-front simultaneous display monitor

The image from both side cam-

eras is displayed. Use this moni-

tor to help check the area on

both sides of the vehicle at the

same time, and to check for

objects near the tires or the sides

of the vehicle. Guidelines show-

ing an image of the vehicle width

and the position of the front tires

are displayed.

 Side-rear simultaneous display monitor

The image from both side cam-

eras is displayed. Use this moni-

tor to help check the area on

both sides of the vehicle at the

same time, and to check for

objects near the tires or the sides

of the vehicle. Guidelines show-

ing an image of the vehicle width

and the position of the rear tires

are displayed.

 Rear monitor (Toyota parking assist monitor)

The image from the rear camera

is displayed. For information

regarding the Toyota parking

assist monitor, refer to “Naviga-

tion System Owner’s Manual”.

295

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the monitor

 Front monitor

Vehicle icon

Displays the image being shown

by the front monitor.

Trajectory line (outside)*

Indicates the outer path of the

tire.

Trajectory line (inside)*

Indicates the inner path of the

tire.

Distance guideline (yellow)

Shows the position about 1 m

(3.3 ft.) away from the front edge

of the vehicle.

Distance guideline (red)

Shows the position about 0.5 m

(1.6 ft.) away from the front edge

of the vehicle.

296

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Automatic display mode

Switches the projected course

mode

The trajectory lines move

according to the steering wheel

position.

*: While the Turn Assist function

of Crawl Control is operating,

the trajectory lines will be dis-

played as dotted lines. At this

time, there may be a differ-

ence between the trajectory

lines and the actual course of

progression.

297

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Wide view front & side monitor display

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles. In addition, the

displayed area is reversed for right-hand drive vehicles.

Projected course line switch-

ing button

The course line display mode will

change as follows each time the

switch is touched.

When the shift lever is in “R”, dis-

play mode can not be changed.

Vehicle icon

Displays the image being shown

by the front monitor.

Front wheel contact point

Shows the position of the vehi-

cle’s front tire.

Vehicle front edge line

Shows the position of the vehi-

cle’s leading edge.

Projected course line (yellow)

Displays a rough guide of the

vehicle path that moves accord-

ing to the steering wheel position.

Displayed along with the mini-

mum projected turning circle.

298

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Minimum projected turning cir-

cle (blue)

Displays the smallest turning cir-

cle projected by the system if the

steering wheel is turned to full

lock. Displayed when the steering

wheel is turned to the right (left-

hand drive vehicles) or left (right-

hand drive vehicles) (further than

90° from straight ahead).

Vehicle width line (blue)

Indicates the width of the vehicle

including the outside rear view

mirror.

Rear wheel contact point

Shows the position of the vehi-

cle’s rear tire.

Automatic display mode

Switches the projected course

mode

299

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Side-front simultaneous display monitor

Vehicle icon

Displays the image being shown

by the side-front simultaneous

display monitor.

Vehicle front edge line

Shows the position of the vehi-

cle’s front edge.

Vehicle width line

Indicates the width of the vehicle

including the outside rear view

mirror.

Front wheel contact point

Shows the position of the vehi-

cle’s front tire.

300

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Side-rear simultaneous display monitor

Vehicle icon

Displays the image being shown

by the side-rear simultaneous dis-

play monitor.

Vehicle width line

Indicates the width of the vehicle

including the outside rear view

mirror.

Rear wheel contact point

Shows the position of the vehi-

cle’s rear tire.

Vehicle rear edge line

Shows the position of the vehi-

cle’s rear edge.

 Rear monitor (Toyota parking assist monitor)

Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

301

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Projected course line display mode (Wide view front & side

monitor display)

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles. In addition, the

displayed area is reversed for right-hand drive vehicles.

No course lines mode

Vehicle width line displayed.

Minimum projected turning circle display mode

The minimum projected turning

circle line is added to the no

course lines mode.

Turning course line display mode

The projected course line is

added to the minimum projected

turning circle mode.

302

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Switching projected course line display mode

To uch .

Turning course line display

mode

Minimum projected turning

circle display mode

No course lines mode

303

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Using the vehicle width line & course line

Vehicle width line

Use the vehicle width line to

check the vehicle’s distance from

objects such as curbstones etc.

As shown in the illustration, be

sure that the vehicle width line

does not overlap the object. If

you also move the vehicle so

that the vehicle width line and

the object are parallel, you can

park parallel to the object.

304

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Minimum projected turning circle & projected course line

Use the minimum projected turn-

ing circle & projected course line

(when displayed) to check the

vehicle’s path with relation to

obstacles.

If the minimum projected turning

circle line (blue) is over the

obstacle as shown in the illustra-

tion, or the obstacle falls within

the minimum projected turning

circle, if you turn with the mini-

mum possible turning circle, the

vehicle may collide with the

object.

When the projected course line

(yellow) is displayed, be sure to

operate the steering wheel so

that the obstacle stays outside

the projected course line until the

vehicle has passed the object.

305

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The Multi-terrain Monitor can be operated when

Normal display mode

The vehicle speed is less than approximately 12 km/h (7 mph).

Automatic display mode

 When automatic display mode is selected

 When the shift lever is shifted to “D”, “S” or “N”

 When the shift lever is in “D”, “S” or “N” and the vehicle speed is

below approximately 10 km/h (6 mph)

 Automatic system cancellation

In the following situations, the image is canceled automatically.

 When the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 12 km/h (7 mph).

After the vehicle speed exceeds approximately 12 km/h (7 mph), the

image will continue to be displayed for a short time.

If the vehicle speed returns to below 12 km/h (7 mph) before the image

extinguishes, the image will continue to be displayed.

 When “MAP” or another switch outside the screen has been pressed

 Interruption screens

An interruption screen is displayed when an obstacle is within the detection

range of the Toyota parking assist-sensor. (P. 250)

 When the door mirrors are folded.

The screen will be turned off temporarily while the door mirrors are folding,

and the screen will return to normal once folding has been completed.

306

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Displayed area

The area covered by the camera is limited. Objects which are close to either

corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen.

The area displayed on the screen may vary depending on vehicle orientation

or road conditions.

Front camera

Camera’s field of view

Objects visible to the camera

Objects not visible to the camera

Parts of the vehicle (bumper, grille,

etc.)

307

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Side camera (Wide view front & side monitor display)

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles. In addition, the dis-

played area is reversed for right-hand drive vehicles.

Camera’s field of view

Objects visible to the camera

Right (left-hand drive vehicles) or left

(right-hand drive vehicles) side of vehi-

cle

308

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Side camera (side-front simultaneous display monitor)

Camera’s field of view

Objects visible to the camera

Right side of vehicle

Left side of vehicle

309

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Side camera (side-rear simultaneous display monitor)

Rear camera

Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”

Camera’s field of view

Objects visible to the camera

Right side of vehicle

Left side of vehicle

310

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Multi-terrain Monitor cameras

In the following cases, it may be difficult to see images on the screen even

when the system is functioning correctly:

 The vehicle is in a dark area, such as at night.

 The temperature near the lens is extremely high or low.

 Water droplets are on the camera lens or humidity is high, such as when

it rains.

 Foreign matter, such as snow and mud, adheres to the camera lens.

 The camera has scratches or dirt on it.

 The sun or headlights are shining directly into the camera lens.

 The camera lens is damaged by flying stones.

Side cameras

Front camera

Rear camera

311

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Smear effect

 Flicker effect

When the camera is used under fluorescent lights, sodium lights, mercury

lights etc., the lights and the illuminated areas may appear to flicker.

 Display settings

Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”

If a bright light, such as sunlight reflected

off the vehicle body, is picked up by the

camera, a smear effect

* characteristic to

the camera may occur.

*: Smear effectA phenomenon that

occurs when a bright light is picked up

by the camera; when transmitted by

the camera, the light source will

appear to have streaks of light emanat-

ing from it. The streaks will also appear

when the light source is in the vehicle

icon area.

312

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 If the message “System initializing.” is displayed

“System initializing.” will be displayed on

the screen under the following conditions:

• The battery has been reinstalled.

• The steering wheel has been moved

while the battery was being rein-

stalled.

• Battery power is low.

• The steering sensor has been rein-

stalled.

• There is a malfunction in the signals

being output by the steering sensor.

Initialize the system by performing either

of the procedures below:

• Drive for a short period of time while

keeping the steering wheel straight.

• Stop the vehicle, and turn the steering

wheel as far as it will go to the left and

right. On the system initialization

screen, touch the “?” button to display

the operating procedure.

If this does not resolve the symptom,

have the vehicle inspected by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

313

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When using the Multi-terrain Monitor system

Observe the following precautions to avoid an accident that could result in

death or serious injuries:

 Never depend solely on the monitor system.

 Always check visually and with the mirrors to confirm your intended path is

clear.

 Depicted distances between objects and flat surfaces differ from actual

distances.

 Do not use the system if the hood or doors are open.

 Conditions which may affect the Multi-terrain Monitor system

 If the front or the rear of the vehicle or the outside rear view mirror has

been hit, the camera’s position and mounting angle may have changed.

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 As the camera has a water proof construction, do not detach, disassemble

or modify it. This may cause incorrect operation.

 Rapid temperature changes, such as when hot water is poured on the

vehicle in cold weather, may cause the system to function abnormally.

 If the camera lens is dirty, it cannot transmit a clear image. Rinse with

water and wipe with a soft cloth. If the camera lens is extremely dirty, wash

with a mild cleanser and rinse.

 Do not strongly rub the camera lens. If the camera lens is scratched, it

cannot transmit a clear image.

 Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or glass coat to

adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible.

 The displayed image may be darker and moving images may be slightly

distorted when the system is cold.

 Situations unsuitable for Multi-terrain Monitor

• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow

• When using tire chains

314

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Conditions which may affect the Multi-terrain Monitor system

 If the tires are changed, the position of the guide lines displayed on the

screen may be incorrect. When changing the tires, consult any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

 Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers,

amount of luggage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the

screen may change. Be sure to check visually behind and all around the

vehicle before proceeding.

 Depending on the overall length of the vehicle (if a frontal protection sys-

tem is installed or the bumper has been replaced, etc.), the position of the

distance guidelines displayed on the front monitor may change. Be sure to

check visually behind and all around the vehicle before proceeding.

 When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the

camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunction-

ing.

NOTICE

 When using the Multi-terrain Monitor

 Even if an obstacle is no longer visible on the side monitor, do not turn the

steering wheel further in the direction the vehicle is turning until the vehicle

has moved completely past the obstacle. If the steering wheel is turned to

full lock, the vehicle will turn in the smallest possible turning circle, and

may collide with the obstacle.

 It may be difficult to judge distance with the image from the front camera

due to the characteristics of the lens. Drive carefully while checking the

actual distance to the obstacles displayed on the screen. Also, give your

full attention to sudden bumps in the road.

315

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Driving assist systems

To help enhance driving safety and performance, the following sys-

tems operate automatically in response to various driving situations.

Be aware, however, that these systems are supplementary and

should not be relied upon too heavily when operating the vehicle.

 Multi Terrain ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)

Helps to prevent wheel lock when the brakes are applied suddenly, or if

the brakes are applied while driving on a slippery road surface, or in off-

road conditions (such as rough roads, sand and mud).

 Brake assist

Generates an increased level of braking force after the brake pedal is

depressed, when the system detects a panic stop situation.

 VSC (Vehicle Stability Control)

Helps the driver to control skidding when swerving suddenly or turning

on slippery road surfaces.

 Active TRC (Traction Control)

Helps to maintain drive power and prevent the 4 wheels from spinning

when starting the vehicle or accelerating on slippery roads.

 Hill-start assist control

Helps prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards when starting on an

incline or slippery slope.

316

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

When the VSC/Trailer Sway Control/Active TRC/hill-start assist

control systems are operating

The slip indicator light flashes to

indicate that the VSC/Trailer

Sway Control/Active TRC/hill-

start assist control systems have

been engaged.

The stop lights and high mounted

stoplight turn on when the hill-

start assist control system or

Trailer Sway Control is operating.

 KDSS (Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System) (if equipped)

KDSS helps to ensure ride comfort and handling response by using a

hydraulic control system to control the suspension stabilizer bars in

response to road surface and driving conditions during cornering or off-

road driving.

 VGRS (Variable Gear Ratio Steering) (if equipped)

Helps to adjust the wheel turning angle in accordance with the vehicle

speed and steering wheel movement.

 PCS (Pre-Crash Safety) (if equipped)

P. 323

 Trailer Sway Control

Helps the driver to control trailer sway by selectively applying brake

pressure for individual wheels and reducing engine torque when trailer

sway is detected.

Trailer Sway Control is part of the VSC system and will not operate if

VSC turned off or experiences a malfunction.

317

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

To disable Active TRC and/or VSC and Trailer Sway Control

If the vehicle gets stuck in fresh snow or mud, Active TRC, VSC and

Trailer Sway Control may reduce power from the engine to the

wheels. You may need to turn the system off to enable you to rock the

vehicle in order to free it.

 Turning off Active TRC

To turn the Active TRC system

off, quickly press and release the

button.

The “TRC OFF” will be shown on

the multi-information display.

This mode can be used when the

transfer mode is H4.

Press the button again to turn the

system back on.

 Turning off Active TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

To turn the TRC, VSC and Trailer

Sway Control off, press and hold

the button for more than 3 sec-

onds while the vehicle is

stopped.

The VSC OFF indicator light will

come on and the “TRC OFF” will

be shown on the multi-information

display.

Press the button again to turn the

system back on.

318

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Automatic reactivation of Active TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control

Turning the “ENGINE START STOP” switch off after turning off the Active

TRC and VSC systems will automatically re-enable them.

 Automatic Active TRC reactivation

If only the Active TRC system is turned off, the Active TRC system will turn

on when vehicle speed increases.

 Automatic Active TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control reactivation

If the Active TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control are turned off, the systems

will not turn on even when vehicle speed increases.

 If the brake system overheats

The brake system may overheat. In this case, a buzzer will sound, and the

“TRC OFF” will be displayed on the multi-information display, and Active

TRC and hill-start assist control will be temporarily inoperable. In this event,

stop the vehicle immediately in a safe place, and allow the brake system to

cool down sufficiently until the “TRC OFF” on the multi-information display

goes off. (There is no problem with continuing normal driving.)

 Sounds and vibrations caused by the Multi Terrain ABS, brake assist,

Active TRC, VSC, Trailer Sway Control, hill-start assist control and

VGRS

 A sound may be heard from the engine compartment when the engine is

started or just after the vehicle begins to move. This sound does not indi-

cate that a malfunction has occurred in any of these systems.

 Any of the following conditions may occur when the above systems are

operating. None of these indicates that a malfunction has occurred.

• Vibrations may be felt through the vehicle body and steering.

• A motor sound may be heard after the vehicle comes to a stop.

• The brake pedal may pulsate slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is acti-

vated.

• The brake pedal may move down slightly after the Multi Terrain ABS is

activated.

319

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Hill-start assist control is operational when

 The shift lever is in “D” or “S”.

 The brake pedal is not depressed.

 VGRS is disabled in the following situations

 During stopping or the steering wheel has been moved for a long time

while driving at lower speeds.

 After the engine is restarted at less than -30°C (-22°F).

 If you disconnect the battery with the steering wheel turned, the center

position of the steering wheel could be slightly and temporary changed.

To initialize the VGRS, drive for a short while.

CAUTION

Any of the following conditions may result in an accident which could cause

death or serious injury:

 The Multi Terrain ABS does not operate effectively when

 The limits of tire gripping performance have been exceeded (such as

excessively worn tires on a snow covered road).

 The vehicle hydroplanes while driving at high speed on the wet or slick

road.

 Stopping distance when the Multi Terrain ABS is operating may exceed

that of normal conditions

The Multi Terrain ABS is not designed to shorten the vehicle’s stopping dis-

tance. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you, espe-

cially in the following situations.

 When driving on dirt, gravel or snow-covered roads

 When driving with tire chains

 When driving over bumps in the road

 When driving over roads with potholes or uneven roads

320

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Active TRC may not operate effectively when

Directional control and power may not be achievable while driving on slip-

pery road surfaces, even if the Active TRC is operating.

Do not drive the vehicle in conditions where stability and power may be lost.

 If the hill-start assist control does not operate effectively

Do not overly rely on the hill-start assist control. The hill-start assist control

may not operate effectively on steep inclines and roads covered in ice.

 When Active TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control are off

Be especially careful and drive at a speed appropriate to the road condi-

tions. As there are systems to ensure vehicle stability and driving force, do

not turn off Active TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control unless necessary.

 When the VSC and Trailer Sway Control are activated

The slip indicator light flashes. Always drive carefully.

Reckless driving may cause an accident. Exercise particular care when the

indicator light flashes.

 Replacing tires

Make sure that all tires are of the same size, brand, tread pattern and total

load capacity. In addition, make sure that the tires are inflated to the speci-

fied tire pressure level.

The Multi Terrain ABS, Active TRC, VSC and Trailer Sway Control will not

function correctly if different tires are fitted on the vehicle.

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional for further information when replacing tires or

wheels.

 Handling of tires and suspension

Using tires with any kind of problem or modifying the suspension will affect

the driving assist systems, and may cause the system to malfunction.

321

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Trailer Sway Control precaution

The Trailer Sway Control system is not able to reduce trailer sway in all situ-

ations. Depending on many factors such as the conditions of the vehicle,

trailer, road surface, and driving environment, the Trailer Sway Control sys-

tem may not be effective. Refer to your trailer owner’s manual for information

on how to tow your trailer properly.

 If trailer sway occurs

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause death or serious injury.

 Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

 Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to

reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle

and trailer should stabilize. (P. 345)

322

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 KDSS

In the following situations, there is the possibility that a system malfunction

has occurred, and drive comfort and the vehicle’s ability to travel on poor

road surfaces may be reduced. Take the vehicle to any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional imme-

diately.

 When turning a corner, the vehicle’s body seems to roll further than nor-

mal.

 If after the vehicle has been left in a slanted position for a long time, for

example with the wheels of one side parked on a curb, the vehicle does

not return to level when driving (the vehicle remains slanted to one side

after returning the vehicle to level ground).

323

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

PCS (Pre-Crash Safety)



: If equipped

 The pre-crash safety system is operational when

 Vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (19 mph).

 The system detects sudden braking or skidding.

 The front occupants are wearing a seat belt.

 When there is a malfunction in the system, or if the system is tempo-

rarily unusable

Warning message will be displayed on the multi-information display.

(P. 607)

CAUTION

 Limitations of the pre-crash safety system

Do not rely on the pre-crash safety system. Always drive safely, taking care

to observe your surroundings and checking for any obstacles or other road

hazards.

Failure to do so may cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

The system detects emergency braking from the speed and force

with which the driver presses the brake pedal, and quickly retracts

the seat belt to assist the effectiveness of the seat belt pretension-

ers (P. 101). This system also operates in the same manner

when the driver loses control of the vehicle.

However, when the VSC system is disabled, the system will not

operate in the event of skidding.

324

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

DPF (Diesel Particulate Filter) system



: If equipped

When the deposit collected by the filter reaches a predetermined

amount, it is automatically regenerated.

 Regeneration

Regeneration is performed as necessary in accordance with

driving conditions.

 System characteristics

The DPF system has the following characteristics:

 Idle speed increases during regeneration

 The smell of the exhaust gas differs from that of a conven-

tional diesel vehicle

325

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

DPF system failure warning

 If the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL ENGINE SER-

VICE REQUIRED” appears on the display, have the vehicle

inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional, immediately. (P. 607)

 If the DPF system warning message “DPF FULL SEE OWNER’S

MANUAL” appears on the display, follow the procedure below to

regenerate.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place.

Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to “P”.

Do not stop the engine.

Also, make sure that there are no flammable materials near the

exhaust pipe. (P. 327)

Press the DPF switch.

The DPF system warning mes-

sage “DPF MANUAL REGENER-

ATION IN PROCESS” appears on

the display, and the idling engine

speed will increase.

Regeneration will take around 20

- 30

* minutes to complete.

When the DPF system warning

message goes out, the idling

engine speed will have finished

returning to normal.

*: Differs in accordance with the

outside temperature.

STEP

326

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Regeneration with the DPF switch

 After pressing the DPF switch, do not depress the accelerator pedal.

Depressing the pedal will stop regeneration. If regeneration has been

stopped, restart regeneration as soon as possible.

 If regeneration is carried out while the exhaust pipe is hot (for example

directly after driving), it will take less time than when the engine is cold.

 Replacing the engine oil

Make sure to use an oil of the recommended grade or of matching quality.

(P. 682)

 DPF system warning

Under the following driving conditions, the DPF system warning message

may come on earlier than normal.

 When only driving at low speeds (for example 20 km/h [12 mph] or

below).

 If the engine is turned on and off frequently (if the engine is not left run-

ning for more than 10 minutes at a time).

*: Differs in accordance with weather, driving conditions, etc.

327

2-4. Using other driving systems

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 During regeneration

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in burning injuries caused by the hot exhaust

pipe and exhaust gases, or may cause a fire.

 Do not carry out regeneration when the vehicle is in an enclosed area,

such as a garage.

 Do not touch the exhaust pipe and exhaust gases during regeneration.

 Do not place flammable materials near

the exhaust pipe.

 Make sure that there are no people

near the exhaust pipe.

328

2-4. Using other driving systems

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If the malfunction indicator light comes on

The malfunction indicator light comes on if you continue driving while the

DPF system warning message “DPF FULL ENGINE SERVICE REQUIRED”

appears on the display. In this event, damage may be caused to the vehicle

or an accident may occur. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toy-

ota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional,

immediately.

NOTICE

 To prevent the DPF system from failing

 Do not drive for long periods of time while the DPF system warning mes-

sage “DPF FULL ENGINE SERVICE REQUIRED” appears on the display

 Do not use fuel other than the specified type

 Do not use engine oil other than the recommended type

 Do not modify the exhaust pipe

329

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

2-5. Driving information

Off-road precautions

Off-road vehicle feature

 Specific design characteristics give it a higher center of gravity

than ordinary passenger cars. This vehicle design feature causes

this type of vehicle to be more likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles

have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehi-

cles.

 An advantage of the higher ground clearance is a better view of the

road allowing you to anticipate problems.

 It is not designed for cornering at the same speeds as ordinary

passenger cars any more than low-slung sports cars are designed

to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. Therefore, sharp

turns at excessive speeds may cause rollover.

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class, which has higher

ground clearance and narrower tread in relation to the height of its

center of gravity to make it capable of performing in a wide variety

of off-road applications.

330

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Off-road vehicle precautions

Always observe the following precautions to help minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

 In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die

than a person wearing a seat belt. Therefore, the driver and all passengers

should fasten their seat belts whenever the vehicle is moving.

 Avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers, if at all possible.

Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or

vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury.

 Loading cargo on the roof luggage carrier/roof rack will make the center of

the vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,

sudden braking or abrupt maneuvers, otherwise it may result in loss of

control or vehicle rollover due to failure to operate this vehicle correctly.

 Always slow down in gusty crosswinds. Because of its profile and higher

center of gravity, your vehicle is more sensitive to side winds than an ordi-

nary passenger car. Slowing down will allow you to have better control.

 Do not drive horizontally across steep slopes. Driving straight up or

straight down is preferred. Your vehicle (or any similar off-road vehicle)

can tip over sideways much more easily than forward or backward.

331

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Off-road driving precautions

Always observe the following precautions to help minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your vehicle:

 Drive carefully when off the road. Do not take unnecessary risks by driving

in dangerous places.

 Do not grip the steering wheel spokes when driving off-road. A bad bump

could jerk the wheel and injure your hands. Keep both hands and espe-

cially your thumbs on the outside of the rim.

 Always check your brakes for effectiveness immediately after driving in

sand, mud, water or snow.

 After driving through tall grass, mud, rock, sand, rivers, etc., check that

there is no grass, bush, paper, rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or trapped

on the underbody. Clear off any such matter from the underbody. If the

vehicle is used with these materials trapped or adhering to the underbody,

a breakdown or fire could occur.

 When driving off-road or in rugged terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns, strike objects, etc. This may cause loss

of control or vehicle rollover causing death or serious injury. You are also

risking expensive damage to your vehicle’s suspension and chassis.

332

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To prevent the water damage

Take all necessary safety measures to ensure that water damage to the

engine or other components does not occur.

 Water entering the engine air intake will cause severe engine damage.

 Water entering the automatic transmission will cause deterioration in shift

quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by vibration, and ulti-

mately damage.

 Water can wash the grease from wheel bearings, causing rusting and pre-

mature failure, and may also enter the differentials, transmission and

transfer case, reducing the gear oil’s lubricating qualities.

 When you drive through water

If driving through water, such as when crossing shallow streams, first check

the depth of the water and the bottom of the river bed for firmness. Drive

slowly and avoid deep water.

 Inspection after off-road driving

 Sand and mud that has accumulated in brake drums and around brake

discs may affect braking efficiency and may damage brake system compo-

nents.

 Always perform a maintenance inspection after each day of off-road driv-

ing that has taken you through rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.

333

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Cargo and luggage

CAUTION

 Things that must not be carried in the luggage compartment

The following things may cause a fire if loaded in the luggage compartment.

 Receptacles containing gasoline

 Aerosol cans

Take notice of the following information about storage precautions,

cargo capacity and load.

 Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever

possible.

 Be sure all items are secured in place.

 Be careful to keep the vehicle level. Placing the weight as far for-

ward as possible helps maintain vehicle balance.

 For better fuel economy, do not carry unnecessary weight.

334

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Storage precautions

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may result in death or serious injury.

 Stow cargo and luggage in the luggage compartment whenever possible.

 Do not stack anything in the luggage compartment higher than the seat-

backs.

Such items may be thrown about and possibly injure people in the vehicle

during sudden braking, sudden swerving or in an accident.

 Do not place cargo or luggage in or on the following locations as the items

may get under the brake or accelerator pedal and prevent the pedals from

being depressed properly, block the driver’s vision, or hit the driver or pas-

sengers, causing an accident.

• Feet of the driver

• Front passenger or rear seats (when stacking items)

• Luggage cover (if equipped)

• Instrument panel

• Dashboard

• Auxiliary box or tray that has no lid

 Secure all items in the occupant compartment, as they may shift and injure

someone during sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 When you fold down the rear seats, long items should not be placed

directly behind the front seats.

 Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage compartment. It is not designed

for passengers. They should ride in their seats with their seat belts prop-

erly fastened. Otherwise, they are much more likely to suffer death or seri-

ous injury, in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an accident.

 Load and distribution

 Do not overload your vehicle.

 Do not apply loads unevenly.

Improper loading may cause deterioration of steering or braking control

which may cause death or serious injury.

335

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Winter driving tips

Carry out the necessary preparations and inspections before driving

the vehicle in winter. Always drive the vehicle in a manner appropri-

ate to the prevailing weather conditions.

 Pre-winter preparations

 Use fluids that are appropriate to the prevailing outside tem-

peratures.

• Engine oil

• Engine coolant

• Washer fluid

 Have a service technician inspect the condition of the battery.

 Have the vehicle fitted with four snow tires or purchase a set

of tire chains for the rear tires.

Ensure that all tires are the same size and brand, and that chains

match the size of the tires.

336

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Before driving the vehicle

Perform the following according to the driving conditions.

 Do not try to forcibly open a window or move a wiper that is

frozen. Pour warm water over the frozen area to melt the ice.

Wipe away the water immediately to prevent it from freezing.

 To ensure proper operation of the climate control system fan,

remove any snow that has accumulated on the air inlet vents

in front of the windshield.

 Check for and remove any excess ice or snow that may have

accumulated on the exterior lights, vehicle’s roof, chassis,

around the tires or on the brakes.

 Remove any snow or mud from the bottom of your shoes

before getting in the vehicle.

 When driving the vehicle

Accelerate the vehicle slowly, keep a safe distance between you

and the vehicle ahead, and drive at a reduced speed suitable to

road conditions.

 When parking the vehicle

Park the vehicle and move the shift lever to “P” without setting

the parking brake. The parking brake may freeze up, preventing

it from being released. If necessary, block the wheels to prevent

inadvertent sliding or creeping.

337

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Selecting tire chains

Use the correct tire chain size when mounting the tire chains.

Chain size is regulated for each tire size.

Side chain

(5 mm [0.20 in.] in diameter)

Cross chain

(6.3 mm [0.25 in.] in diameter)

Regulations on the use of tire chains

 Regulations regarding the use of tire chains vary according to loca-

tion and type of road. Always check local regulations before install-

ing chains.

 Retighten the chains after driving 0.5 - 1.0 km (1/4 - 1/2 mile).

ITY25C045

 Tire chains

Observe the following precautions when installing and removing chains.

 Install and remove tire chains in a safe location.

 Install tire chains on the rear tires only. Do not install the chains on the

front tires.

 Install tire chains following the instructions provided in the accompanying

manual.

338

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Driving with snow tires

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in a loss of vehicle control and cause death or

serious injury.

 Use tires of the size specified for your vehicle.

 Maintain the recommended level of tire inflation pressure.

 Do not drive at speeds in excess of the speed limit or the speed limit spec-

ified for the snow tires being used.

 Snow tires should be installed on all wheels.

 Driving with tire chains

Observe the following precautions to reduce the risk of accidents.

Failing to do so may result in the vehicle being unable to be driven safely,

and may cause death or serious injury.

 Do not drive in excess of the speed limit specified for the tire chains being

used or 50 km/h (30 mph), whichever is lower.

 Avoid driving on bumpy road surfaces or over potholes.

 Avoid sudden acceleration, abrupt steering, sudden braking and shifting

operations that cause sudden engine braking.

 Slow down sufficiently before entering a curve to ensure that vehicle con-

trol is maintained.

 When installing tire chains

Vehicles with the 4-Wheel AHC: Turn off the vehicle height control.

The vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function and

you may catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an accident.

(P. 261)

339

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Trailer towing

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a passenger carrying vehicle.

Towing a trailer will have an adverse effect on handling, perfor-

mance, braking, durability, and fuel consumption. Your safety and

satisfaction depend on the proper use of correct equipment and cau-

tious driving habits. For your safety and the safety of others, do not

overload the vehicle or trailer.

To tow a trailer safely, use extreme care and drive the vehicle in

accordance with the trailer’s characteristics and operating condi-

tions.

Toyota warranties do not apply to damage or malfunction caused by

towing a trailer for commercial purposes.

Ask your local authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional for further details before towing,

as there are additional legal requirements in some countries.

 Weight limits

Check the allowable towing capacity, GVM (Gross Vehicle

Mass), MPAC (Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity), and per-

missible drawbar load before towing. (P. 674)

 Towing hitch/bracket

Toyota recommends the use of the Toyota hitch/bracket for your

vehicle. Other products of a suitable nature and comparable

quality may also be used.

340

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Important points regarding trailer loads

 Total trailer weight and permissible drawbar load

Total trailer weight

Weight of the trailer itself plus the

trailer load should be within the

maximum towing capacity.

Exceeding this weight is danger-

ous.

(P. 674)

When towing a trailer, use a fric-

tion coupler or friction stabilizer

(sway control device).

When the total trailer weight is

over 2000 kg (4409 lb.), a friction

stabilizer (sway control device) is

required.

Permissible drawbar load

Allocate the trailer load so that

the drawbar load is greater than

25 kg (55.1 lb.) or 4 % of the tow-

ing capacity. Do not let the draw-

bar load exceed the indicated

weight. (P. 674)

341

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Information tag (manufacturer’s label)

Type A

Gross vehicle mass

The combined weight of the

driver, passengers, luggage, tow-

ing hitch, total curb mass and

drawbar load should not exceed

the gross vehicle mass by more

than 100 kg (220.5 lb.). Exceed-

ing this weight is dangerous.

Maximum permissible rear

axle capacity

The weight borne by the rear axle

should not exceed the maximum

permissible axle capacity by 15 %

or more. Exceeding this weight is

dangerous.

The values for towing capacity

were derived from testing con-

ducted at sea level. Take note

that engine output and towing

capacity will be reduced at high

altitudes.

Type B

CAUTION

 When the gross vehicle mass limit or maximum permissible axle

capacity is exceeded

Do not exceed the established speed limit for towing a trailer in built-up

areas or 100 km/h (62 mph), whichever is the lower.

Failing to observe this precaution may lead to an accident causing death or

serious injury.

342

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Installation positions for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch ball

98 mm (3.9 in.)

70 mm (2.8 in.)

43 mm (1.7 in.)

1272 mm (50.1 in.)

142 mm (5.6 in.)

175 mm (6.9 in.)

148 mm (5.8 in.)

126 mm (5.0 in.)

104 mm (4.1 in.)

63 mm (2.5 in.)

343

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Connecting and disconnecting a trailer (vehicles with 4-Wheel

AHC)

Stop your vehicle and a trailer in line and perform the following:

 Connecting a trailer

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “LO” (low) mode.

Turn off the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the 4-Wheel

AHC.

Connect a trailer.

Turn on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the 4-Wheel

AHC.

Select the “N” (normal) mode with the height select switch.

When a vehicle loaded with four occupants tows a trailer of about

1800 kg (4000 lb.) with more than about 180 kg (400 lb.) tongue

load, the normal mode may not be selected. However, there is no

problem to continue normal driving. Drive with sufficient care

because of large load.

 Disconnecting a trailer

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “LO” (low) mode. (Make sure the

vehicle height is in the “LO” mode by pushing

“” on the

height select switch.)

Turn off the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the 4-Wheel

AHC.

Set the supporting leg of a trailer on the ground and raise the

hitch by 100 mm (4 in.).

Turn on the “ENGINE START STOP” switch or the 4-Wheel

AHC.

STEP

344

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Wait for about 20 seconds until the rear vehicle height is low-

ered by the automatic leveling function.

Make sure the hitch is disconnected. If not, raise the hitch

higher and repeat steps 2 through 5.

Move the vehicle forward in the “LO” mode where the hitch

does not touch anything in the “N” (normal) mode.

Put the 4-Wheel AHC in the “N” mode.

 Tire information

Increase the air pressure of the trailer tires in accordance with the total trailer

weight and according to the values recommended by the manufacturer of

your trailer.

 Trailer lights

Please consult at any authorized dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional when installing trailer lights, as incorrect installa-

tion may cause damage to the vehicle’s lights. Please take care to comply

with your state’s laws when installing trailer lights.

 Break-in schedule

Toyota recommends that vehicles fitted with new power train components

should not be used for towing trailers for the first 800 km (500 miles).

 Maintenance

 Maintenance must be performed more frequently when using the vehicle

for towing due to the greater weight burden placed on the vehicle com-

pared to normal driving.

 Retighten all bolts securing the hitching ball and bracket after towing for

approximately 1000 km (600 miles).

STEP

345

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Safety checks before towing

 Check that the maximum load limit for the towing hitch/bracket and hitch

ball is not exceeded. Bear in mind that the coupling weight of the trailer

will add to the load exerted on the vehicle. Also make sure that total load

exerted on the vehicle is within the range of the weight limits. (P. 340)

 Ensure that the trailer load is secure.

 Supplementary outside rear view mirrors should be added to the vehicle

if the traffic behind cannot be clearly seen with standard mirrors. Adjust

the extending arms of these mirrors on both sides of the vehicle so that

they always provide maximum visibility of the road behind.

 If trailer sway occurs

One or more factors (crosswinds, passing vehicles, rough roads, etc.) can

adversely affect handling of your vehicle and trailer, causing instability.

 If trailer swaying occurs:

• Firmly grip the steering wheel. Steer straight ahead.

Do not try to control trailer swaying by turning the steering wheel.

• Begin releasing the accelerator pedal immediately but very gradually to

reduce speed.

Do not increase speed. Do not apply vehicle brakes.

If you make no extreme correction with the steering or brakes, your vehicle

and trailer should stabilize (if enabled, Trailer Sway Control can also help to

stabilize the vehicle and trailer.).

 After the trailer swaying has stopped:

• Stop in a safe place. Get all occupants out of the vehicle.

• Check the tires of the vehicle and the trailer.

• Check the load in the trailer.

Make sure the load has not shifted.

Make sure the tongue weight is appropriate, if possible.

• Check the load in the vehicle.

Make sure the vehicle is not overloaded after occupants get in.

If you cannot find any problems, the speed at which trailer swaying occurred

is beyond the limit of your particular vehicle-trailer combination.

Drive at a lower speed to prevent instability. Remember that swaying of the

towing vehicle-trailer increases as speed increases.

346

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To avoid accident or injury

Set the vehicle height to the “LO” mode and turn off the 4-Wheel AHC when

you connect a trailer, otherwise the vehicle height may change due to the

automatic leveling function, and you may catch part of your body in the vehi-

cle, resulting in an accident. (P. 261)

NOTICE

 When the rear bumper strengthening material is aluminum

Ensure the steel bracket part does not come directly in contact with that

area.

When steel and aluminum come into contact, there is a reaction similar to

corrosion, which will weaken the section concerned which may result in

damage. Apply a rust inhibitor to parts that will come in contact when attach-

ing a steel bracket.

347

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Guidance

Your vehicle will handle differently when towing a trailer. In order to

avoid accident, death or serious injury, keep the following in mind

when towing:

 Checking connections between trailer and lights

Stop the vehicle and check the operation of the connection

between the trailer and lights after driving for a brief period as well

as before setting off.

 Practicing driving with a coupled trailer

 Get the feel for turning, stopping and reversing with the trailer

coupled by practicing in an area with no or light traffic.

 When reversing with a coupled trailer, hold the section of the

steering wheel nearest to you and rotate clockwise to turn the

trailer left or counterclockwise to turn right. Always rotate gradu-

ally to prevent steering error. Have someone guide you when

reversing to lessen the risk of accident.

 Increasing vehicle-to-vehicle distance

At a speed of 10 km/h (6 mph), the distance to the vehicle running

ahead of you should be equivalent to or greater than the combined

length of your vehicle and trailer. Avoid sudden braking that may

cause skidding. Otherwise, the vehicle may spin out of control.

This is especially true when driving on wet or slippery road sur-

faces.

348

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Sudden acceleration/steering input/cornering

Executing sharp turns when towing may result in the trailer collid-

ing with your vehicle. Decelerate well in advance when approach-

ing turns and take them slowly and carefully to avoid sudden

braking.

 Important points regarding turning

The wheels of the trailer will travel closer to the inside of the curve

than the wheels of the vehicle. To make allowance for this, take the

turns wider than you would normally.

 Important points regarding stability

Vehicle movement resulting from uneven road surfaces and strong

crosswinds will affect handling. The vehicle may also be rocked by

passing buses or large trucks. Frequently check behind when mov-

ing alongside such vehicles. As soon as such vehicle movement

occurs, immediately start to decelerate smoothly by slowly apply-

ing the brakes. Always steer the vehicle straight ahead while brak-

ing.

 Passing other vehicles

Consider the total combined length of your vehicle and trailer, and

ensure that the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is sufficient before exe-

cuting lane changes.

349

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Transmission information

To maintain engine braking efficiency, when using engine braking,

do not put the transmission in “D”.

If in the S mode, the transmission shift range position must be in 5

or lower.

 If the engine overheats...

Towing a loaded trailer up a long steep incline in temperatures

exceeding 30C (85F) may result in the engine overheating. If the

engine coolant temperature gauge indicates that the engine is

overheating, turn the air conditioning off immediately, leave the

road and stop the vehicle in a safe place. (P. 663)

 When parking the vehicle

Always place wheel chocks under the wheels of both the vehicle

and trailer. Firmly set the parking brake and shift the shift lever to

“P”.

CAUTION

Follow all the precautions described in this section. Failure to do so could

cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

 Trailer towing precautions

When towing, make sure that none of the weight limits are exceeded.

(P. 340)

 Vehicle speed in towing

Observe the legal maximum speeds for trailer towing.

 Before descending hills or long declines

Reduce speed and downshift. However, never downshift suddenly while

descending steep or long downhill grades.

 Operation of the brake

Do not hold the brake pedal depressed often or for long periods.

Doing so may result in the brake overheating or reduce braking effects.

350

2-5. Driving information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Do not directly splice trailer lights

Do not directly splice trailer lights. Directly splicing trailer lights may damage

your vehicle’s electrical system and cause a malfunction.

351

2-5. Driving information

When driving

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

352

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-1. Using the air conditioning

system and defogger

Front air conditioning

system ............................ 354

Rear air conditioning

system ............................ 368

Heater idle up switch ........ 372

Power heater .................... 373

Rear window and outside

rear view mirror

defoggers ....................... 374

Windshield wiper

de-icer ............................ 376

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types........... 379

Using the radio.................. 381

Using the CD player.......... 385

Playing back MP3 and

WMA discs...................... 392

Operating an iPod............. 399

Operating a USB

memory........................... 407

Optimal use of the audio

system ............................ 415

Using the AUX port ........... 417

Using the steering

switches.......................... 418

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Bluetooth

audio

system ............................ 421

Using the Bluetooth

audio system .................. 426

Operating a Bluetooth

enabled portable

player.............................. 429

Setting up a Bluetooth

enabled portable

player.............................. 432

Bluetooth

audio system

setup............................... 436

Interior features

353

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-4. Using the hands-free

system (for cellular

phone)

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone).......... 437

Using the hands-free

system ............................ 442

Making a phone call.......... 449

Setting a cellular phone .... 453

Security and system

setup............................... 457

Using the phone book....... 461

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list................ 467

• Interior lights................... 468

• Personal lights................ 469

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features ..... 471

• Glove box ....................... 472

• Console box ................... 473

• Overhead console .......... 474

• Cup holders .................... 475

• Bottle holders ................. 477

• Card holder..................... 479

• Auxiliary boxes ............... 479

3-7. Other interior features

Cool box............................ 480

Sun visors ......................... 482

Vanity mirror ..................... 483

Clock................................. 484

Outside temperature

display ............................ 485

Ashtrays............................ 487

Cigarette lighter ................ 489

Power outlet...................... 490

Heated steering wheel ...... 493

Seat heaters and

ventilators ....................... 495

Armrest ............................. 499

Assist grips ....................... 500

Floor mats......................... 501

Luggage compartment

features........................... 503

354

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Front air conditioning system

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tem-

perature setting.

With navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should

refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Without navigation system and rear air conditioning system

Vehicles with windshield wiper de-icer

Vehicles without windshield wiper de-icer

The above illustration is for a left-hand drive vehicle. The button

positions are reversed for right-hand drive vehicles.

Driver’s side temperature control

Changes the air outlets used

Automatic

mode

Windshield defogger

Dual operation

Air conditioning on/off

Pollen removal mode

Off *

Driver’s side

temperature

setting display

Airflow display

Fan speed display

Fan speed

Passenger’s side

temperature

setting display

Passenger’s side temperature control

Outside air or

recirculated

air mode

Outside air

mode

Recirculated

air mode

355

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Others

Vehicles with windshield wiper de-icer

Vehicles without windshield wiper de-icer

The above illustration is for a left-hand drive vehicle. The button

positions are reversed for right-hand drive vehicles.

*: The front air conditioning system cannot be switched off while the cool

box is on. (P. 480)

Driver’s side temperature control

Changes the air outlets used

Automatic

mode

Windshield defogger

4-zone operation

Air conditioning on/off

Pollen removal mode

Off *

Driver’s side

temperature

setting display

Airflow display

Fan speed display

Fan speed

Passenger’s side

temperature

setting display

Passenger’s side temperature control

Outside air or

recirculated

air mode

Outside air

mode

Recirculated

air mode

Airflow display

Changes the air outlets used

Rear air conditioning operation mode

356

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the automatic mode

Press .

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan

speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-

ting.

Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the

temperature on .

The temperature for the driver’s and front passenger’s seats can be

set separately.

STEP

6'/2

357

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Adjusting the settings

 Adjusting the temperature setting (with rear air conditioning

system)

Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the tem-

perature on .

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simultane-

ous modes each time is pressed.

Individual mode (the indicator on is on.): The temperature for the

driver’s, front passenger’s and rear seats (P. 362) can be adjusted

separately. Operating the passenger’s side or rear temperature control

will enter individual mode.

Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is off.): Only

(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.

6'/2

358

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Adjusting the temperature setting (without rear air condition-

ing system)

Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the tem-

perature on .

The air conditioning system switches between dual and simultaneous

modes each time is pressed.

Dual mode (the indicator on is on.): The temperature for the

driver’s seat and front passenger’s seat can be adjusted separately.

Operating the passenger’s side temperature control will enter dual

mode.

Simultaneous mode (the indicator on is off.): Only

(driver’s side) can be used to adjust the temperature for all seats.

 Adjusting the fan speed

Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on .

The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)

Press to turn the fan off.

6'/2

359

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Changing the air outlets

With rear air conditioning system

Press .

For left-hand front seat

For right-hand front seat

The air outlets switch each time

the button is pressed.

Different air outlets for the driver’s

and front passenger’s seats can

be chosen.

*:Driver side only

Without rear air conditioning system

Press .

The air outlets switch each time

the button is pressed.

Air flows to the upper body.

: Depending on the rear air con-

ditioning setting.

: Only in the automatic mode

360

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Air flows to the upper body and

feet.

: Depending on the rear air con-

ditioning setting.

Air flows to the feet.

: Depending on the rear air con-

ditioning setting.

Air flows to the feet and the

windshield defogger operates.

ITY31C014

361

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Vehicles with windshield wiper de-icer

Press .

The mode switches between outside air mode (indicator off) and recir-

culated air mode (indicator on) each time the button is pressed.

Vehicles without windshield wiper de-icer

Press to switch to recirculated air mode and press

to switch to outside air mode.

362

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Changing the rear seat settings from the front seat (with rear air

conditioning system)

 Adjusting the temperature setting

Press .

Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the

temperature on (for left-hand rear seat) and

(for right-hand rear seat).

The temperature for the right-hand and left-hand rear seats can be

adjusted separately. Operating the switch will enter individual

mode.

The air conditioning system switches between individual and simul-

taneous modes each time is pressed.

 Adjusting the fan speed

Press .

Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on .

The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)

Press to turn the fan off.

 Changing the air outlets

Press .

The air outlets switch each time the button is pressed (P. 370)

STEP

6'/2

STEP

363

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Defogging the windshield

Press .

The air conditioning system con-

trol operates automatically.

Recirculated air mode will auto-

matically switch to outside air

mode.

Pollen removal mode

Press .

Outside air mode switches to recirculated air mode. Pollen is removed

from the air and the air flows to the upper part of the body.

Usually the system will turn off automatically approximately 1 to 3 min-

utes.

To stop the operation, press

again.

FRONT

REAR

A/C

ITY31C023

364

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets

Front center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

Front side outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

Rear center outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob to open or close

the vent.

ITY31C030

365

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Using the automatic mode

Fan speed is adjusted automatically in accordance with the temperature set-

ting and ambient conditions. As a result, the following may occur.

 Immediately after

is pressed, the fan may stop for a while until

warm or cool air is ready to flow.

 Cool air may flow to the area around the upper body when the heater is

on.

 Using the system in recirculated air mode

The windows will fog up more easily if the recirculated air mode is used for

an extended period.

 Switching between outside air and recirculated air modes

Recirculated air mode or outside air mode may be automatically switched in

accordance with the temperature setting and the inside temperature.

 Window defogger feature

Recirculated air mode may automatically switch to outside air mode in situa-

tions where the windows need to be defogged.

366

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When outside temperature approaches 0°C (32°F)

The air conditioning system may not operate even when

pressed.

 Pollen removal mode

 In order to prevent the windows from fogging up when the outside air is

cold, the following may occur.

• Outside air mode does not switch to recirculated air mode.

• The air conditioning system operates automatically.

• The operation cancels after 1 minute.

 In rainy weather, the windows may fog up. Press .

 Air conditioning odors

 During use, various odors from inside and outside the vehicle may enter

into and accumulate in the air conditioning system. This may then cause

odor to be emitted from the vents.

 To reduce potential odors from occurring:

• It is recommended that the air conditioning system be set to outside air

mode prior to turning the vehicle off.

• The start timing of the blower may be delayed for a short period of time

immediately after the air conditioning system is started in automatic

mode.

 Air conditioning filter

P. 546

 Customization

Settings (e.g. A/C Auto switch operation) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

367

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To prevent the windshield from fogging up

Do not use during cool air operation in extremely humid weather.

The difference between the temperature of the outside air and that of the

windshield can cause the outer surface of the windshield to fog up, blocking

your vision.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

368

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Rear air conditioning system



Using the automatic mode

Press .

The air conditioning system will begin to operate. Air outlets and fan

speed are automatically adjusted according to the temperature set-

ting.

Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the

temperature on .

The temperature for the right-hand and left-hand rear seats can be

set separately.

: If equipped

Airflow and outlets are automatically adjusted according to the tem-

perature setting.

Left side temperature control

Left side temperature setting display

Fan speed display Airflow display

Right side temperature setting display

Right side temperature control

Automatic mode Fan speed

Changes

the air

outlets used

Off

STEP

369

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Adjusting the settings

 Adjusting the temperature setting

Press “” to increase the temperature and “” to decrease the tem-

perature on .

The temperature for the right-hand and left-hand rear seats can be set

separately.

 Adjusting the fan speed

Press “” (increase) or “” (decrease) on .

The fan speed is shown on the display. (7 levels)

Press to turn the fan off.

370

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Changing the air outlets

Press .

The air outlets switch each time the button is pressed.

Air flows to the upper body.

Air flows to the upper body and

feet.

Air flows to the feet.

ITY31C020

371

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Adjusting the position and opening and closing the air outlets

Direct air flow to the left or

right, up or down.

Turn the knob fully to the back

of the vehicle to close the

vent.

ITY31C035

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the air conditioning system on longer than necessary when the

engine is stopped.

372

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Heater idle up switch



: If equipped

 Heater idle up switch can be operated when

 The engine is running.

 The outside temperature is low.

 The engine coolant temperature is low.

This feature is used to boost heating effect in extremely cold condi-

tions when the vehicle is not moving.

Left-hand drive vehicles

Press the switch to increase

engine speed.

Press the switch again to

return the engine to the normal

idle speed. If you do not turn

the switch to off, the engine

speed is increased whenever

the engine is started.

Right-hand drive vehicles

IDLE

373

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Power heater



: If equipped

 Power heater can be operated when

 The engine is running.

 The outside temperature is low.

 The engine coolant temperature is low.

 When refueling your vehicle

The engine must be turned off. Turning the engine off turns the power heater

off.

This feature is used to heat the engine coolant, speed up warming of

the cab in cold weather, and keep the cab warm.

Left-hand drive vehicles

On/off

If you do not turn the switch to

off, the engine speed is

increased whenever the

engine is started.

Right-hand drive vehicles

PWR

HEAT

PWR

HEAT

374

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers

Clear the rear window using the defogger. (For vehicles with outside

rear view mirror defoggers, turning the rear window defogger on will

turn the outside rear view mirror defoggers on. The outside rear view

mirror is used to remove raindrops, dew and frost from the outside

rear view mirrors.)

With navigation system

On/off

The operation time changes

according to the ambient tem-

perature and vehicle speed.

Pressing the switch again also

turns the defoggers off.

Left-hand drive vehicles without navigation system

375

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers can be oper-

ated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

CAUTION

 When the outside rear view mirror defoggers are on

Do not touch the rear view mirror surfaces, as they can become very hot and

burn you.

Right-hand drive vehicles without navigation system

376

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Windshield wiper de-icer



: If equipped

This feature is used to prevent ice from building up on the wind-

shield and wiper blades.

With navigation system

On/off

Pressing the switch again also

turns the de-icer off.

Left-hand drive vehicles without navigation system

377

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The windshield wiper de-icer can be operated when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Vehicles without Heated Windshield Defroster

The windshield wiper de-icer will automatically turn off after approxi-

mately 15 minutes.

Vehicles with Heated Windshield Defroster

 The windshield wiper de-icer and Heated Windshield Defroster will

automatically turn off. The operation time varies depending on the

outside temperature.

 The lower the outside temperature, the longer the operation (at most

15 minutes).

 If the outside temperature is high, the operation will stop in few sec-

onds.

 Heated Windshield Defroster (if equipped)

When the windshield wiper de-icer is operated, the Heated Windshield

Defroster will operate automatically at the same time, preventing ice from

building up on the windshield.

Right-hand drive vehicles without navigation system

378

3-1. Using the air conditioning system and defogger

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When the windshield wiper de-icer is on

Vehicles without Heated Windshield Defroster

Do not touch the glass at the lower part of the windshield or the side of

the front pillars as the surfaces can become very hot and burn you.

Vehicles with Heated Windshield Defroster

Do not touch the windshield (especially the lower part) as the surfaces can

become very hot and burn you.

379

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-2. Using the audio system

Audio system types



: If equipped

With navigation system

Owners of models equipped with a navigation system should

refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Without navigation system

CD player with changer and AM/FM radio

This illustration is for a left-hand drive vehicle. Some button posi-

tions are reversed for right-hand drive vehicles.

Title Page

Using the radio P. 381

Using the CD player P. 385

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs P. 392

Operating an iPod P. 399

Operating a USB memory P. 407

Optimal use of the audio system P. 415

Using the steering switches P. 418

380

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Using cellular phones

Interference may be heard through the audio system’s speakers if a cellular

phone is being used inside or close to the vehicle while the audio system is

operating.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the audio system on longer than necessary with the engine off.

 To avoid damaging the audio system

Take care not to spill drinks or other fluids over the audio system.

381

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the radio

Setting station presets

 Manually

In AF-ON mode the radio changes frequency to the strongest sig-

nal of the selected station.

Search for desired stations by turning the dial or press-

ing “

”or “” on .

Press and hold the button (from to ) the sta-

tion is to be set to, and you hear a beep.

Automatic presetting radio stations

Station selector TA mode button

AM·DAB/FM mode buttons

Seeking the frequency AF mode button

Changing the program type

Adjusting the frequency

Volume

Power

STEP

382

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Automatically

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

Up to 6 stations are set in order of reception quality. When the settings

are finished, 2 beeps will be heard.

In the FM1 or FM2 mode, the stations automatically set by the audio sys-

tem will be set in the FM3 presets.

RDS (Radio Data System)

This feature allows your radio to receive station and program informa-

tion (classical, news, etc.) from radio stations that broadcast this

information.

 Listening to stations of the same network

Press .

AF-ON, REG-OFF modes: A station among those of the same net-

work with strong reception is selected.

Switching between different regional

programs of the same station might

occur.

AF-ON, REG-ON modes: A station among those of the same net-

work with strong reception and broad-

casting the same program is selected.

Each time is pressed, the mode changes in the order of AF-ON,

REG-OFF AF-ON, REG-ON AF-OFF, REG-OFF.

 Specifying program type

Press .

Each time is pressed, the program type changes in the order of

“NEWS” “SPORTS” “TALK” “POP” “CLASSICS”.

383

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Traffic information

Press .

TP mode: The system automatically switches to traffic information

when a broadcast with a traffic information signal is

received.

The station returns to the previous one when the traffic infor-

mation ends.

TA mode: Traffic information can be heard only when a signal is

received. The system switches to the mute mode when

a signal is not received. In the CD or MP3/WMA mode,

the system automatically switches to traffic information

when a signal is received.

The audio system returns to the mute, CD or MP3/WMA

mode when the traffic information ends.

The audio system mode changes as follows each time is

pressed.

FM modes: TP TA OFF

Modes other than the radio modes: TA OFF

 Emergency broadcast reception mode

“ALARM” appears in the display in the event that an emergency

broadcast is received, and the emergency broadcast is aired.

384

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 EON (Enhanced Other Network) system (for traffic announcement

function)

If the RDS station (with EON data) you are listening to is not broadcasting a

traffic information program and the audio system is in the TA (traffic

announcement) mode, the radio will be switched automatically to a station

broadcasting a traffic information program in the EON AF list when traffic

information begins.

 When the battery is disconnected

All preset stations are erased.

 Reception sensitivity

 Maintaining perfect radio reception at all times is difficult due to the con-

tinually changing position of the antenna, differences in signal strength

and surrounding objects, such as trains, transmitters, etc.

 When is used, automatic station selection and automatic registering

of stations may not be possible.

 The radio antenna is mounted inside the rear quarter window. To main-

tain clear radio reception, do not attach metallic window tinting or other

metallic objects to the antenna wire mounted inside the rear quarter win-

dow.

 Digital Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio

The optional radio antenna and tuner are necessary for the use of Digital

Audio Broadcast (DAB) radio.

385

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the CD player

Loading CDs

 Loading a single CD

Press .

“WAIT” appears on the display.

Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to

green.

The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.

CD eject

Random playback

Repeat play

CD selection

CD slot

CD insert

Selecting a track,

fast forwarding

or reversing

Playback/pause

Display text message

Power Volume

Playback

STEP

386

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Loading multiple CDs

Press and hold until you hear a beep.

“WAIT” appears on the display.

Insert a CD when the indicator on the slot turns from amber to

green.

The display changes from “WAIT” to “LOAD”.

The indicator on the slot turns to amber when the CD is inserted.

Insert the next CD when the indicator on the slot turns from

amber to green again.

Repeat the procedure for the remaining CDs.

To cancel the operation, press or . If you do not insert

a CD within 15 seconds, loading will be canceled automatically.

Ejecting CDs

 Ejecting a CD

To select the CD to be ejected, press

() or

().

The number of the CD selected is shown on the display.

Press and remove the CD.

 Ejecting all the CDs

Press and hold until you hear a beep, then remove the

CDs.

Selecting a CD

Press

() or () until the desired CD number

appears on the display.

STEP

387

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Selecting a track

Press “

” to move up or “” to move down using

until the desired track number appears on the display.

Playing and pausing tracks

To play or pause a track, press .

Fast forwarding and rewinding tracks

Press and hold “

” or “” on .

Random playback

 Current CD

Press (RAND).

Tracks are played in random order until the button is pressed once

again.

 All CDs

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

Tracks on all loaded CDs are played in random order until the button is

pressed once again.

388

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Repeating a track or a disc

 Repeating a track

Press (RPT).

 Repeating a disc

Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the order of Track

no./Elapsed time CD title Track again.

 Display

Up to 12 characters can be displayed at a time.

If there are 13 characters or more, pressing and holding for 1 sec-

ond or more will display the remaining characters.

A maximum of 24 characters can be displayed.

If is pressed for 1 second or more again or has not been pressed

for 6 seconds or more, the display will return to the first 12 characters.

Depending on the contents recorded, the characters may not be displayed

properly or may not be displayed at all.

 Canceling random and repeat playback

Press

(RAND) or (RPT) again.

389

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player. The

CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

 Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-

tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

CDs with copy-protect features may not play correctly.

 CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when

a problem is detected.

 If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for

extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

 Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

390

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Certification for the CD player

This product is a class I laser product.

 A laser beam leak may result in hazardous radiation exposure.

 Do not open the cover of the player or attempt to repair the unit yourself.

Refer servicing to qualified personnel.

 Laser power: No hazardous

NOTICE

 CDs and adapters that cannot be used

Do not use the following types of CDs.

Also, do not use 8 cm (3 in.) CD adapters, DualDiscs or printable discs.

Doing so may damage the player and/or the CD insert/eject function.

 CDs that have a diameter that is not 12

cm (4.7 in.)

 Low-quality and deformed CDs

391

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Player precautions

Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious damage to the

CDs or the player itself.

 Do not insert anything other than CDs into the CD slot.

 Do not apply oil to the CD player.

 Store CDs away from direct sunlight.

 Never try to disassemble any part of the CD player.

 CDs with a transparent or translucent

recording area

 CDs that have tape, stickers or CD-R

labels attached to them, or that have

had the label peeled off

 Do not insert more than one CD at a

time.

392

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Playing back MP3 and WMA discs

Loading and ejecting MP3 and WMA discs

P. 385

Selecting a CD

Press

() or () until the desired CD number

appears on the display.

CD eject

Random playback

Repeat play

CD selection

CD slot

CD insert

Selecting a file,

fast forwarding

or reversing

Playback/pause

Display text message

Folder selection

Power Volume

Playback

393

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Playing and pausing files

To play or pause a file, press .

Selecting a folder

Press () or () to select the desired folder.

To return to the first folder, press and hold () until you hear a

beep.

Selecting a file

Turn the dial or press “” or “” on to select

the desired file.

Fast forwarding and reversing files

Press and hold “

” or “” on .

394

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Random playback

 To play files from a particular folder in random order

Press (RAND).

 To play all of the files on a disc in random order

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

Repeating a file or a folder

 Repeating a file

Press (RPT).

 Repeating a folder

Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the switch is pressed, the display changes in the order of

Folder no./File no./Elapsed time Folder name File name 

Album title (MP3 only) Track title Artist name.

395

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Display

P. 388

 Canceling random and repeat playback

Press

(RAND) or (RPT) again.

 Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a trouble either in the CD or inside the player.

The CD may be dirty, damaged or inserted up-side down.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that the MP3/WMA file is not included in the

CD.

 Discs that can be used

Discs with the marks shown below can be used.

Playback may not be possible depending on recording format or disc fea-

tures, or due to scratches, dirt or deterioration.

 CD player protection feature

To protect the internal components, playback is automatically stopped when

a problem is detected.

 If CDs are left inside the CD player or in the ejected position for

extended periods

CDs may be damaged and may not play properly.

396

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Lens cleaners

Do not use lens cleaners. Doing so may damage the CD player.

 MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size by using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards and to the media/formats

recorded by them that can be used.

 MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2 LSF LAYER3)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

MPEG1 LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 160, 192, 224, 256, 320 (kbps)

• MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 64, 80, 96, 112, 128, 144, 160 (kbps)

* Compatible with VBR

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and

monaural

 WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

Ver. 7, 8: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192 (kbps)

Ver. 9: CBR 48, 64, 80, 96, 128, 160, 192, 256, 320 (kbps)

* Only compatible with 2-channel playback

397

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Compatible media

Media that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback are CD-Rs and CD-

RWs.

Playback in some instances may not be possible, depending on the status

of the CD-R or CD-RW. Playback may not be possible or the audio may

jump if the disc is scratched or marked with fingerprints.

 Compatible disc formats

The following disc formats can be used.

• Disc formats: CD-ROM Mode 1 and Mode 2

CD-ROM XA Mode 2, Form 1 and Form 2

• File formats: ISO9660 Level 1, Level 2, (Romeo, Joliet)

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not

be displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows.

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum length of folder names/file names: 32 characters

• Maximum number of folders: 192 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files per disc: 255

 File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

 Multi-sessions

As the audio system is compatible with multi-sessions, it is possible to play

discs that contain MP3 and WMA files. However, only the first session can

be played.

 ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title and artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3 ID3 tags.

(The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

398

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 MP3 and WMA playback

When a disc containing MP3 or WMA files is inserted, all files on the disc

are first checked. Once the file check is finished, the first MP3 or WMA file

is played. To make the file check finish more quickly, we recommend you

do not write in any files other than MP3 or WMA files or create any unnec-

essary folders.

If the discs contain a mixture of music data and MP3 or WMA format data,

only music data can be played.

 Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage

to the speakers.

 Playback

• To play MP3 file with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit

rate of 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• CD-R or CD-RW playback may not be possible in some instances,

depending on the characteristics of the disc.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for

MP3 and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the

encoding and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of

playback may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at

all.

• When files other than MP3 or WMA files are recorded on a disc, it may

take more time to recognize the disc and in some cases, playback may

not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are the registered trade-

marks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and other countries.

NOTICE

 CDs and adapters that cannot be used (P. 390)

 Player precautions (P. 391)

399

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Operating an iPod



: If equipped

Connecting an iPod enables you to enjoy music from the vehicle

speakers.

 Connecting an iPod

Open the cover and connect

an iPod using an iPod cable.

Turn on the power of the iPod if

it is not turned on.

Press .

STEP

400

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Control panel

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-

cles.

Text button

Repeat play

Selecting a song

Playback/pause

Random playback

Power Volume

Go back

iPod menu/song selector knob

401

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Selecting a play mode

Press to select iPod menu mode.

Turning changes the play mode in the following order:

“PLAYLISTS” “ARTISTS” “ALBUMS” “SONGS” 

“PODCASTS” “GENRES” “COMPOSERS” 

“AUDIOBOOKS”

Press to select the desired play mode.

STEP

402

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Play mode list

 Selecting a list

Turn to display the first selection list.

Press to select the desired item.

Pressing the knob changes to the second selection list.

Repeat the same procedure to select the desired song name.

To return to the previous selection list, select “GO BACK” or press

().

Play mode

First

selection

Second

selection

Third

selection

Fourth

selection

“PLAYLISTS”

Playlists

select

Songs

select

“ARTISTS” Artists select

Albums

select

Songs

select

“ALBUMS”

Albums

select

Songs

select

“SONGS”

Songs

select

---

“PODCASTS”

Albums

select

Songs

select

“GENRES” Genre select Artists select

Albums

select

Songs

select

“COMPOSERS”

Composers

select

Albums

select

Songs

select

“AUDIOBOOKS”

Songs

select

---

STEP

403

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Selecting songs

Turn or press “” or “” on to select the

desired song.

Playing and pausing songs

To play or pause a song, press .

Fast-forwarding and rewinding songs

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “

” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

Shuffle playback

 Playing songs from one playlist or album in random order

Press (RAND).

To cancel, press (RAND) again.

 Playing songs from all the playlists or albums in random order

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

To cancel, press (RAND) again.

Repeat play

Press (RPT).

To cancel, press (RPT) again.

404

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following

order:

Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance

Press to enter iPod menu mode.

Pressing changes sound modes. (P. 415)

 About iPod

 Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance

with safety and regulatory standards.

 iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other coun-

tries.

 iPod functions

 When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod

mode, the iPod will resume play from the same point in which it was last

used.

 Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions

may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it once

again may resolve some malfunctions.

STEP

405

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 iPod problems

To resolve most problems encountered when using your iPod, disconnect

your iPod from the vehicle iPod connection and reset it.

For instructions on how to reset your iPod, refer to your iPod Owner’s Man-

ual.

 Display

P. 388

 Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the iPod or its connection.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that there is no music data in the iPod.

“EMPTY”: This indicates that an empty playlist is selected.

“UPDATE”: This indicates that the version of the iPod is not compatible.

Upgrade your iPod software to the latest version.

 Compatible models

Depending on differences between models or software version etc., some

models listed above might be incompatible with this system.

iPod 4th generation and earlier models are not compatible with this system.

iPhone, iPod mini, iPod shuffle and iPod photo are not compatible with this

system.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

 Maximum number of lists in device: 9999

 Maximum number of songs in device: 65535

 Maximum number of songs per list: 65535

Model Generation Software version

iPod 5th generation Ver. 1.2.0 or higher

iPod nano

1st generation Ver. 1.3.0 or higher

2nd generation Ver. 1.1.2 or higher

3rd generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher

iPod touch 1st generation Ver. 1.1.0 or higher

iPod classic 1st generation Ver. 1.0.0 or higher

406

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not connect iPod or operate the controls.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to iPod

 Do not leave iPod in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may

become high, resulting in damage to the player.

 Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the iPod while it is

connected as this may damage the iPod or its terminal.

 Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the iPod or

its terminal.

407

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Operating a USB memory



: If equipped

Connecting a USB memory enables you to enjoy music from the

vehicle speakers.

 Connecting a USB memory

Open the cover and connect a

USB memory.

Turn on the power of the USB

memory if it is not turned on.

Press .

STEP

408

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Control panel

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-

cles.

Text button

Repeat play

Selecting a file

Playback/pause

Random playback

Power Volume

Go back

File selector knob

409

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Selecting a folder

 Selecting folders one at a time

Press () or () to select the desired folder.

 Returning to the first folder

Press and hold () until you hear a beep.

Selecting files

Turn or press “” or “” on to select the

desired file.

Playing and pausing files

To play or pause a file, press .

Fast-forwarding and rewinding files

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “

” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

410

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Random playback

 Playing files from a folder in random order

Press (RAND).

To cancel, press (RAND) again.

 Playing all the files from a USB memory in random order

Press and hold (RAND) until you hear a beep.

To cancel, press (RAND) again.

Repeat play

 Repeating a file

Press (RPT).

To cancel, press (RPT) again.

 Repeating all the files in a folder

Press and hold (RPT) until you hear a beep.

To cancel, press (RPT) again.

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following

order:

Elapsed time  Folder name  File name  Album title  Track title 

Artist name

411

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When using the USB port

You may be unable to use the instrument panel power outlet if a device is

connected to the USB port at the same time.

 USB memory functions

Depending on the USB memory that is connected to the system, certain

functions may not be available. Disconnecting the device and reconnecting it

once again may resolve some malfunctions.

 Display

P. 388

 Error messages

“ERROR”: This indicates a problem in the USB memory or its connection.

“NO MUSIC”: This indicates that no MP3/WMA files are included in the USB

memory.

 USB memory

 Compatible devices

USB memory that can be used for MP3 and WMA playback

 Compatible device formats

The following device formats can be used:

• USB communication formats: USB2.0 FS (12mbps)

• File formats: FAT16/32 (Windows)

• Correspondence class: Mass storage class

MP3 and WMA files written in any format other than those listed above

may not play correctly, and their file names and folder names may not be

displayed correctly.

Items related to standards and limitations are as follows:

• Maximum directory hierarchy: 8 levels

• Maximum number of folders in a device: 999 (including the root)

• Maximum number of files in a device: 65025

• Maximum number of files per folder: 255

412

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 MP3 and WMA files

MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER 3) is a standard audio compression format.

Files can be compressed to approximately 1/10 of their original size using

MP3 compression.

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is a Microsoft audio compression format.

This format compresses audio data to a size smaller than that of the MP3

format.

There is a limit to the MP3 and WMA file standards that can be used and

to the media/formats on which the files are recorded.

 MP3 file compatibility

• Compatible standards

MP3 (MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III, MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III,

MPEG2.5)

• Compatible sampling frequencies

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 16, 22.05, 24 (kHz)

MPEG2.5: 8, 11.025, 12 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates (compatible with VBR)

MPEG1 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-320 (kbps)

MPEG2 AUDIO LAYERII, III: 32-160 (kbps)

MPEG2.5: 32-160 (kbps)

• Compatible channel modes: stereo, joint stereo, dual channel and

monaural

 WMA file compatibility

• Compatible standards

WMA Ver. 9

• Compatible sampling frequencies

HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48 (kHz)

• Compatible bit rates

HIGH PROFILE 32-320 (kbps, VBR)

413

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 File names

The only files that can be recognized as MP3/WMA and played are those

with the extension .mp3 or .wma.

 ID3 and WMA tags

ID3 tags can be added to MP3 files, making it possible to record the track

title, artist name, etc.

The system is compatible with ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, and Ver. 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 ID3

tags. (The number of characters is based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and 1.1.)

WMA tags can be added to WMA files, making it possible to record the

track title and artist name in the same way as with ID3 tags.

 MP3 and WMA playback

• When a device containing MP3 or WMA files is connected, all files in

the USB memory device are checked. Once the file check is finished,

the first MP3 or WMA file is played. To make the file check finish more

quickly, we recommend that you do not include any files other than

MP3 or WMA files or create any unnecessary folders.

• When the USB device is connected and the audio source is changed to

USB memory mode, the USB device will start playing the first file in the

first folder. If the same device is removed and reinserted (and the con-

tents have not been changed), the USB device will resume play from

the same point in which it was last used.

 Extensions

If the file extensions .mp3 and .wma are used for files other than MP3 and

WMA files, they will be mistakenly recognized and played as MP3 and

WMA files. This may result in large amounts of interference and damage

to the speakers.

414

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Playback

• To play MP3 files with steady sound quality, we recommend a fixed bit

rate of at least 128 kbps and a sampling frequency of 44.1 kHz.

• There is a wide variety of freeware and other encoding software for MP3

and WMA files on the market, and depending on the status of the encod-

ing and the file format, poor sound quality or noise at the start of playback

may result. In some cases, playback may not be possible at all.

• Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Media are registered trademarks of

Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not connect USB memory or operate the controls.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to USB memory

 Do not leave USB memory in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-

cle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

 Do not push down on or apply unnecessary pressure to the USB memory

while it is connected as this may damage the USB memory or its terminal.

 Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the USB

memory or its terminal.

415

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Optimal use of the audio system

Adjusting sound quality and volume balance

 Changing sound quality modes

Pressing selects the mode to be changed in the following

order.

“BAS” “MID” “TRE” “FAD” “BAL” “ASL”

Displays the current mode

Changes the following set-

tings

• Sound quality and vol-

ume balance

The sound quality and bal-

ance setting can be

changed to produce the

best sound.

• Automatic sound levelizer

on/off

416

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Adjusting sound quality

Turning adjusts the level.

*: The sound quality level is adjusted individually in each audio mode.

Turning the Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) on/off

Turning clockwise turns on the ASL, and turning

counterclockwise turns off the ASL.

ASL automatically adjusts the volume and tone quality according to the

noise level as you drive your vehicle.

Sound

quality mode

Mode

displayed

Level

Turn to the

left

Turn to the

right

Bass* BAS -5 to 5

Low HighMid-range* MID -5 to 5

Treble* TRE -5 to 5

Front/rear

volume

balance

FAD F7 to R7 Shifts to rear

Shifts to

front

Left/right

volume

balance

BAL L7 to R7 Shifts to left

Shifts to

right

417

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the AUX port



: If equipped

 Operating portable audio devices connected to the audio system

The volume can be adjusted using the vehicle’s audio controls. All other

adjustments must be made on the portable audio device itself.

This port can be used to connect a portable audio device and listen

to it using the vehicle’s speakers.

Open the cover and connect

the portable audio device.

Press .

STEP

418

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the steering switches



: If equipped

Some audio features can be controlled using the switches on the

steering wheel.

Operation may differ depending on the type of audio system or navi-

gation system. For details, refer to the manual provided with the

audio system or navigation system.

Volume

Radio mode: Selects a radio

station

CD mode: Selects a

track, file (MP3

and WMA) and

disc

Bluetooth

audio mode:

Selects a track

and album

iPod mode: Selects a song

USB memory mode:

Selects a file

and folder

Power on, select audio

source

MODE

ITY32C014

419

3-2. Using the audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Turning on the power

Press when the audio system is turned off.

The audio system can be turned off by holding the switch down until you

hear a beep.

Changing the audio source

Press when the audio system is turned on. The audio source

changes as follows each time the button is pressed. If a mode cannot

be used, it will be skipped.

FM1 FM2 FM3 CD player Bluetooth

audio AUX 

iPod or USB memory MW

Adjusting the volume

Press “+” on to increase the volume and “-” to decrease the

volume.

Hold down the button to continue increasing or decreasing the volume.

Selecting a radio station

Press to select the radio mode.

Press “” or “” on to select a preset station.

To scan for receivable stations, press and hold the switch until you

hear a beep.

Selecting a track/file or song

Press to select the CD, Bluetooth

audio, iPod or USB

memory mode.

Press “” or “” on to select the desired track/file or

song.

STEP

420

3-2. Using the audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Selecting an album

Press to select Bluetooth

audio mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a folder

Press to select USB memory mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

Selecting a disc in the CD player

Press to select the CD mode.

Press and hold “” or “” on until you hear a beep.

 Canceling automatic selection of a radio station

Press again.

CAUTION

 To reduce the risk of an accident

Exercise care when operating the audio switches on the steering wheel.

STEP

421

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Bluetooth

audio system



: If equipped

 Conditions under which the system will not operate

 If using a portable player that does not support Bluetooth

 If the portable player is switched off

 If the portable player is not connected

 If the portable player’s battery is low

 If the portable player is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box

 If metal is covering or touching the player

The Bluetooth

audio system enables you to enjoy music played on

a portable player from the vehicle speakers via wireless communica-

tion.

This audio system supports Bluetooth

, a wireless data system

capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your por-

table player does not support Bluetooth

, the Bluetooth

audio sys-

tem will not function.

Vehicles with a navigation system

Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Vehicles without a navigation system

Title Page

Using the Bluetooth

audio system P. 426

Operating a Bluetooth

enabled portable player P. 429

Setting up a Bluetooth

enabled portable player P. 432

Bluetooth

audio system setup P. 436

422

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent personal data from being improp-

erly accessed. (P. 459)

 About Bluetooth

 Compatible models

 Bluetooth

specifications:

Ver. 1.2, or higher (Recommended: Ver. 2.0+EDR or higher)

 Following Profiles:

• A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

• AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 or higher

(Ver. 1.3 or higher recommended)

Portable players must correspond to the above specifications in order to be

connected to the Bluetooth

audio system. However, please note that some

functions may be limited depending on the type of portable player.

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

423

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Certification

Hereby, Pioneer, declares that this DEX-MG9597 is in compliance with the

essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

424

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Hereby, Pioneer, declares that this DEX-MG9497 is in compliance with the

essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.

425

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not connect portable players or operate the controls.

 Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

 Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth

antennas. People with implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or

implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-

tance between themselves and the Bluetooth

antennas. The radio waves

may affect the operation of such devices.

 Before using Bluetooth

devices, users of any electrical medical device

other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con-

sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation

under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected

effects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to portable players

Do not leave portable players in the vehicle. The temperature inside the

vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player.

426

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the Bluetooth

audio system

 Audio unit

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions and shapes may differ slightly for right-hand

drive vehicles.

Display

A message, name, number,

etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters

and special characters

cannot be displayed.

Displays information that is

too long to be displayed at

one time on the display

(press and hold)

Selects items such as menu

and number

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected

item

Bluetooth

connection con-

dition

If “BT” is not displayed,

the Bluetooth

audio sys-

tem cannot be used.

427

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the Bluetooth

audio system for the first time

Before using the Bluetooth

audio system, it is necessary to register

a Bluetooth

enabled portable player in the system. Follow the proce-

dure below to register (pair) a portable player:

Press and select “BT•A MENU” using .

Select “BT•A Setup” using .

Select “Pair Audio” using .

Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to be

registered after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using .

A passkey will be displayed.

Input the passkey into the audio player.

Refer to the manual that comes with the portable player for the oper-

ation of the portable player.

If the portable player has a Bluetooth

phone, the phone can be reg-

istered at the same time.

When “Pair Phone?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No” using

. (Bluetooth

phone P. 440)

STEP

428

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Menu list of the Bluetooth

audio system

First menu

Second

Third menu Operation detail

“Setup”

“BT•A

Setup”

“Pair Audio”

Registering a portable audio

player

“Select Audio”

Selecting a portable audio

player to be used

“Change Name”

Changing the registered

name of a portable player

“List Audios”

Listing the registered porta-

ble players

“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey

“Delete Audio”

Deleting a registered

portable player

“System

Setup”

“Guidance Vol”

Setting voice guidance

volume

“Device Name”

Displaying the Bluetooth

device address and name

“Initialize” Initializing the system

 Operations that cannot be performed while driving

 Operating the system with

 Registering a portable player to the system

 Changing the passkey

P. 435

429

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Operating a Bluetooth

enabled portable player

The illustrations below are for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehicles.

Text button

Repeat play

Selecting a track

Playback/pause

Random playback

Power Volume

Selecting an album

BT•A menu knob

430

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Selecting an album

To select the desired album, press () or ().

Selecting tracks

Press “” or “” on to select the desired track.

Playing and pausing tracks

To play or pause a track, press .

Fast-forwarding and rewinding tracks

To fast-forward or rewind, press and hold “

” or “” on

until you hear a beep.

Random playback

Press (RAND).

To cancel, press (RAND) again.

Repeat play

Press (RPT).

To cancel, press (RPT) again.

431

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Switching the display

Press .

Each time the button is pressed, the display changes in the following

order: Elapsed time  Album title  Track title  Artist name

Using the steering wheel audio switches

P. 418

 Bluetooth

audio system functions

Depending on the portable player that is connected to the system, certain

functions may not be available.

 Display

P. 388

 Error messages

“Memory Error”: This indicates a problem in the system.

432

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Setting up a Bluetooth

enabled portable player

Registering a portable audio player in the Bluetooth

audio system

allows the system to function. The following functions can be used

for registered portable players:

 Functions and operation procedures

To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below.

Press to select “BT•A MENU” or press the off-hook

switch and select “Setup” using .

Select “BT•A Setup” using .

Select one of the following items using :

 Registering a portable player

“Pair Audio”

 Selecting a portable player to be used

“Select Audio”

 Changing the registered name of a portable player

“Change Name”

 Listing the registered portable players

“List Audios”

 Changing the passkey

“Set Passkey”

 Deleting a registered portable player

“Delete Audio”

STEP

433

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Registering a portable player

Select “Pair Audio” using , and perform the procedure for reg-

istering a portable player. (P. 427)

Selecting a portable player to be used

Select “Select Audio” using .

Select the portable player to be used using .

Select “From Car” or “From Audio” using .

If “From Car” is selected, the portable player will be automatically

connected whenever the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in either

ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON mode.

STEP

434

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Changing the registered name of a portable player

Select “Change Name” using .

Select the desired portable player name to be changed using

Select “Record Name” using , and say the new name

after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using .

Listing the registered portable players

Select “List Audios” using . The list of registered portable play-

ers will be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “BT•A Setup”.

STEP

435

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” using .

Select a 4 to 8-digit number using .

The number should be input 1 digit at a time.

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has

been input, press again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the knob is

not necessary.

Deleting a registered portable player

Select “Delete Audio” using .

Select the desired portable player to be deleted using .

If the portable player to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth

phone,

the registration of the mobile phone can be deleted at the same time.

When “Del Phone?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No” using

. (Bluetooth

phone P. 440)

 The number of portable players that can be registered

Up to 2 portable players can be registered in the system.

STEP

436

3-3. Using the Bluetooth

audio system

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Bluetooth

audio system setup

 System setup items and operation procedures

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.

Press to select “BT•A MENU” or press the off-hook

switch and select “Setup” using .

Select “System Setup” using .

Select one of the following items using :

 Setting voice guidance volume

“Guidance Vol” (P. 459)

 Displaying the Bluetooth

device address and name

“Device Name” (P. 459)

 Initializing the system

“Initialize” (P. 459)

STEP

437

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Hands-free system (for cellular phone)



: If equipped

The hands-free system is a function that allows you to use your cel-

lular phone without touching it.

This system supports Bluetooth

cellular phones. Bluetooth

is a

wireless data system that allows the cellular phone to wirelessly

connect to the hands-free system and make/receive calls.

Vehicles with a navigation system

Refer to the “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Vehicles without a navigation system

 Hands-free system quick guide

Setting a cellular phone. (P. 445)

Adding an entry to the phonebook. (Up to 20 names can be

stored) (P. 461)

Dialing by inputting a name. (P. 450)

STEP

438

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Title Page

Using the hands-free system

 Using the hands-free system for the first time

P. 442

Making a phone call

 Making a phone call

• Dialing by inputting a name

• Speed dialing

• Redial

• Call back

 Receiving a phone call

• Answering the phone

• Refusing the call

 Transferring a call

 Using a call history memory

• Dialing

• Storing data in the phone book

• Deleting

P. 449

Setting a cellular phone

 Functions and operation procedures

P. 453

Security and system setup

 Security setting items and operation

procedures

 System setup items and operation

procedures

P. 457

Using the phone book

 Adding a new phone number

 Changing the registered name in the phone

book

 Listing the registered data

 Setting speed dials

 Deleting registered name

 Deleting speed dial

P. 461

439

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Conditions under which the system will not operate

 If using a cellular phone that does not support Bluetooth

 If the cellular phone is switched off

 If you are outside service range

 If the cellular phone is not connected

 If the cellular phone’s battery is low

 The cellular phone is behind the seat or in the glove box or console box

 Metal is covering or touching the phone

 When using the hands-free system

 The audio system and voice guidance are muted when making a call.

 If both parties speak at the same time, it may be difficult to hear.

 If the incoming call volume is overly loud, an echo may be heard.

 Try to face toward the microphone as much as possible when speaking.

 In the following circumstances, it may be difficult to hear the other party:

• When driving on unpaved roads

• When driving at high speeds

• When a window is open

• When the air conditioning is blowing directly on the microphone

• When the air conditioning is set to high

440

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When transferring ownership of the vehicle

Be sure to initialize the system to prevent the personal data from being

improperly accessed.

 About Bluetooth

 Compatible models

Compatible with HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.5 and OPP (Object Push

Profile) Ver. 1.1.

If your cellular phone does not support HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetooth

phone. If your cellular phone supports OPP alone, you cannot use the

Bluetooth

phone.

 Certification

P. 423

Bluetooth is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG, Inc.

441

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

Do not use a cellular phone or connect the Bluetooth

phone.

 Caution regarding interference with electronic devices

 Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth

antennas. People with implantable

cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or

implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable dis-

tance between themselves and the Bluetooth

antennas. The radio waves

may affect the operation of such devices.

 Before using Bluetooth

devices, users of any electrical medical device

other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization

therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should con-

sult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation

under the influence of radio waves. Radio waves could have unexpected

effects on the operation of such medical devices.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the cellular phone

Do not leave cellular phones in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehi-

cle may become high, resulting in damage to the phone.

442

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the hands-free system

 Audio unit

The illustration below is for left-hand drive vehicles.

The button positions may differ slightly for right-hand drive vehi-

cles.

Display

A massage, name, phone

number, etc. is displayed.

Lower-case characters

and special characters

cannot be displayed.

Displays information that is

too long to be displayed at

one time on the display

(press and hold)

Selects speed dials

Selects items such as menu

and number

Turn: Selects an item

Press: Inputs the selected

item

Reception level

Bluetooth

connection con-

dition

If “BT” is not displayed,

the hands-free phone

system cannot be used.

443

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Steering wheel switches

Volume

The voice guidance volume

cannot be adjusted using

this button.

Off-hook switch

Turns the hands-free sys-

tem on/start a call

On-hook switch

Turns the hands-free sys-

tem off/ends a call/refuse a

call

Talk switch

Turns the voice command

system on (press)/turns the

voice command system off

(press and hold)

444

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Microphone

Type A

Type B

445

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the hands-free system for the first time

Before using the hands-free phone system, it is necessary to register

a cellular phone in the system. The system will enter phone registra-

tion automatically when starting the system with no cellular phone

registered. Follow the procedure below to register (pair) a cellular

phone:

Press the off-hook switch, select “Pair phone” using .

Select “Record Name” using , and say the name to be

registered after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using .

A passkey will be displayed.

Input the passkey into the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-

ation of the phone.

If the cellular phone has a Bluetooth

audio player, the audio player

can be registered at the same time.

When “Pair Audio?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No” using

. (Bluetooth

audio player P. 422)

STEP

446

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Menu list of the hands-free phone system

First menu

Second

Third menu Operation detail

“Callback” - -

Dialing a number stored in

the incoming call history

memory

“Redial” - -

Dialing a number stored in

the outgoing call history

memory

“Phonebook”

“Add

Entry”

- Adding a new phone number

“Change

Name”

Changing the registered

name in the phone book

“Delete

Entry”

- Deleting the registered data

“Del Spd

Dial”

- Deleting speed dials

“List

Names”

- Listing the registered data

“Speed

Dial”

- Setting speed dials

447

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

“Setup”

“Security”

“Set PIN” Setting a PIN code

“Phbk Lock” Locking the phone book

“Phbk Unlock” Unlocking the phone book

“Phone

Setup”

“Pair Phone” Registering a cellular phone

“Select Phone”

Selecting a cellular phone to

be used

“Change Name”

Changing the registered

name of a cellular phone

“List Phones”

Listing the registered cellular

phones

“Set Passkey” Changing the passkey

“Delete Phone”

Deleting a registered cellular

phone

“System

Setup”

“Guidance Vol”

Setting voice guidance

volume

“Device Name”

Displaying the Bluetooth

device address and name

“Initialize” Initializing the system

First menu

Second

Third menu Operation detail

448

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Automatic volume adjustment

When vehicle speed reaches 80 km/h (50 mph) or more, the volume auto-

matically increases. The volume returns to the previous volume setting when

vehicle speed drops to 70 km/h (43 mph) or less.

 Operations that cannot be performed while driving

 Operating the system with

 Registering a cellular phone to the system

 Changing the passkey

P. 455

449

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Making a phone call

 Making a phone call

 Dialing by inputting a name

“Dial by name”

 Speed dialing

 Dialing a number stored in the outgoing history memory

“Redial”

 Dialing a number stored in the incoming history memory

“Call back”

 Receiving a phone call

 Answering the phone

 Refusing the call

 Transferring a call

 Using a call history memory

 Dialing

 Storing data in the phone book

 Deleting

450

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Dialing by inputting a name

Press the talk switch and say a registered name.

The desired name or number is displayed.

Dial by one of the following methods:

a. Press the off-hook switch.

b. Select “Dial” using .

In , if the pronounced name cannot be recognized, select the

desired name using .

Speed dialing

Press the off-hook switch.

Press the preset button in which the desired number is regis-

tered.

Press the off-hook switch.

STEP

451

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

When receiving a phone call

 Answering the phone

Press the off-hook switch.

 Refusing the call

Press the on-hook switch.

Transferring a call

A call can be transferred between the cellular phone and system

while dialing, receiving a call, or during a call. Use one of the follow-

ing methods:

a. Operate the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone for the oper-

ation of the phone.

b. Press the off-hook switch*.

*: This operation can be performed only when transferring a call

from the cellular phone to the system during a call.

452

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using a call history memory

Follow the procedure below to use number stored in call history

memory:

Press the off-hook switch and select “Redial” (when using a

number stored in the outgoing call history memory) or “Call

back” (when using a number stored in the incoming history

memory) using .

Select the desired number using .

The following operations can be performed:

Dialing: Press the off-hook switch or select “Dial” using .

Storing the number in the phone book: Select “Store” and then

“Confirm” using .

Deleting: Select “Delete” and then “Confirm” using .

 Call history

Up to 5 numbers can be stored in each of the outgoing and incoming history

memories.

 When talking on the phone

 Do not talk simultaneously with the other party.

 Keep the volume of the receiving voice down. Otherwise, voice echo will

increase.

STEP

453

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Setting a cellular phone

Registering a cellular phone in the hands-free system allows the

system to function. The following functions can be used for regis-

tered cellular phones:

 Functions and operation procedures

To enter the menu for each function, follow the steps below.

Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using .

Select “Phone Setup” using .

Select one of the following items using :

 Registering a cellular phone

“Pair Phone”

 Selecting a cellular phone to be used

“Select Phone”

 Changing the registered name of a cellular phone

“Change Name”

 Listing the registered cellular phones

“List Phones”

 Changing the passkey

“Set Passkey”

 Deleting a cellular phone

“Delete Phone”

STEP

454

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Registering a cellular phone

Select “Pair Phone” using , and perform the procedure for reg-

istering a cellular phone. (P. 445)

Selecting a cellular phone to be used

Select “Select Phone” using .

Select the cellular phone to be used using .

Changing a registered name of a cellular phone

Select “Change Name” using .

Select the desired cellular phone name to be changed using

Select “Record Name” using , and say the new name

after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using .

STEP

455

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Listing the registered cellular phones

Select “List Phones” using . The list of registered cellular

phones will be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phone Setup”.

Changing the passkey

Select “Set Passkey” using .

Select a 4 to 8 digit number using .

The number should be input digit at a time.

When the entire number to be registered as a passkey has

been input, press again.

If the number to be registered has 8 digits, pressing of the

knob is not necessary.

STEP

456

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Deleting a registered cellular phone

Select “Delete Phone” using .

Select the desired cellular phone to be deleted using .

If the cellular phone to be deleted is paired as a Bluetooth

audio

player, the registration of the audio player can be deleted at the

same time.

When “Del Audio?” is displayed, select “Yes” or “No” using

. (Bluetooth

audio player P. 422)

 The number of cellular phones that can be registered

Up to 6 cellular phones can be registered in the system.

STEP

457

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Security and system setup

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.

 Security setting items and operation procedure

Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using .

Select “Security” using .

Select one of the following items using :

 Setting or changing the PIN (Personal Identification Number)

“Set PIN”

 Locking the phone book

“Phbk Lock”

 Unlocking the phone book

“Phbk Unlock”

 System setup items and operation procedure

Press the off-hook switch and select “Setup” using .

Select “System Setup” using .

Select one of the following items using :

 Setting voice guidance volume

“Guidance Vol”

 Displaying the Bluetooth

device address and name

“Device Name”

 Initializing the system

“Initialize”

STEP

458

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Setting or changing the PIN

 Setting a PIN

Select “Set PIN” using .

Enter a PIN using .

Input the code 1 digit at a time.

 Changing the PIN

Select “Set PIN” using .

Enter the registered PIN using .

Enter a new PIN using .

Input the code 1 digit at a time.

Locking or unlocking the phone book

Select “Phbk Lock” or “Phbk Unlock” using .

Input the PIN using and select “Confirm” using .

Input the code 1 digit at a time.

STEP

459

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Setting voice guidance volume

Select “Guidance Vol” using .

Change the voice guidance volume.

To decrease the volume: Turn counterclockwise.

To increase the volume: Turn clockwise.

Displaying the Bluetooth

device address and name

Select “Device Name” using .

Turn to display the Bluetooth

device address and

name.

Select “Go Back” using to return to “System Setup”.

Initializing the system

Select “Initialize” and then “Confirm” using .

Select “Confirm” again using .

STEP

460

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Initialization

 The following data in the system can be initialized:

• Phone book

• Outgoing and incoming history

• Speed dials

• Registered cellular phone data

• Security code

• Registered Bluetooth

enabled portable player data

• Passkey for the cellular phones

• Passkey for the Bluetooth

audio players

• Guidance volume

• Receiver volume

• Ring tone volume

 Once the initialization has been completed, the data cannot be restored

to its original state.

 When the phone book is locked

The following functions cannot be used:

 Dialing by inputting a name

 Speed dialing

 Dialing a number stored in the call history memory

 Using the phone book

461

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using the phone book

Adding a new phone number

The following methods can be used to add a new phone number:

 Transferring data from the cellular phone

 Inputting a phone number using

 Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history

To enter the menu of each setting, follow the steps below.

Press the off-hook switch and select “Phonebook” using

Select one of the following items using :

 Adding a new phone number

“Add Entry”

 Changing the registered name in the phone book

“Change Name”

 Listing the registered data

“List Names”

 Setting speed dial

“Speed Dial”

 Deleting the registered data

“Delete Entry”

 Deleting speed dials

“Delete Spd Dial”

STEP

462

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Adding procedure

Select “Add Entry” using .

Use one of the following methods to input a telephone num-

ber:

STEP2-1 Select “By Phone” and then “Confirm” using

STEP2-2 When “Transfer” appears in the display, transfer

the data from the cellular phone.

Refer to the manual that comes with the cellular phone

for the details of transferring data.

STEP2-3 Select the desired data using .

Inputting a phone number using :

STEP2-1 Select “Manual Input” using .

STEP2-2 Input a phone number using , and press

again.

Input the phone number 1 digit at a time.

STEP

463

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Selecting a phone number from outgoing or incoming history:

STEP2-1 Select “Call History” using .

STEP2-2 Select “Outgoing” or “Incoming” using .

STEP2-3 Select the desired data using .

Select “Record Name” using , and say the desired

name after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using .

Select “Confirm” again using .

In , selecting “Speed Dial” instead of “Confirm” registers the

newly added phone number as a speed dial.

STEP

464

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Changing the registered name in the phone book

Select “Change Name” using .

Select the desired name to be changed using .

Select “Record Name” using , and say the new name

after the beep.

The name to be registered will be repeated aloud.

Select “Confirm” using .

Listing the registered data

Select “List names” using . The list of the registered data will

be read aloud.

When listing is complete, the system returns to “Phonebook”.

Pressing the talk switch while an entry is being read aloud selects the

entry, and calls the registered phone number.

STEP

465

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Setting speed dials

Select “Speed Dial” using .

Select the desired data using .

Select the desired preset button, and register the data into

speed dial by either of the following methods:

a. Press the desired preset button, and select “Confirm” using

b. Press and hold the desired preset button.

Deleting the registered data

Select “Delete Entry” using .

Select the data to be deleted using .

STEP

466

3-4. Using the hands-free system (for cellular phone)

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Deleting speed dials

Select “Del Spd Dial” using .

Press the preset button to which the desired speed dial is reg-

istered after the beep.

The name to be deleted will be heard.

Select “Confirm” using .

 Limitation of number of digits

A phone number that exceeds 24 digits cannot be registered.

STEP

467

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior lights list

Rear interior lights (P. 468)

Rear personal lights (P. 469)

Front interior light (P. 468)

Front personal lights (P. 469)

“ENGINE START STOP” switch light

Door courtesy lights

Scuff lighting (if equipped)

Running board lights (if equipped)

468

3-5. Using the interior lights

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Interior lights

Front

Door position on/off

On/off

Rear

Door position

ITY33C008

Interior lights

469

3-5. Using the interior lights

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Personal lights

Front

On/off

Rear

On/off

ITY33C014

Personal lights

470

3-5. Using the interior lights

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Illuminated entry system

The lights automatically turn on/off according to “ENGINE START STOP”

switch mode, the presence of the electronic key, whether the doors are

locked/unlocked, and whether the doors are open/closed.

 To prevent battery discharge

If the interior lights remain on when the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is

turned off, the lights will go off automatically after 20 minutes.

 Customization that can be configured at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional

Settings (e.g. Time period before the interior lights turn off) can be changed.

(Customizable features P. 695)

471

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-6. Using the storage features

List of storage features

CAUTION

 Items that should not be left in the storage spaces

Do not leave glasses, lighters or spray cans in the storage spaces, as this

may cause the following when cabin temperature becomes high:

 Glasses may be deformed by heat or cracked if they come into contact

with other stored items.

 Lighters or spray cans may explode. If they come into contact with other

stored items, the lighter may catch fire or the spray can may release gas,

causing a fire hazard.

Card holder

Overhead console

Glove box

Bottle holders

Door pockets

Auxiliary boxes

Console box

Cool box

Cup holders

472

3-6. Using the storage features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Glove box

Open (push button)

Lock with the mechanical key

Unlock with the mechanical

key

 Glove box light

The glove box light turns on when the tail lights are on.

 Removing the separate tray

CAUTION

 While driving

Keep the glove box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

Pull out the separate tray.

Glove box

473

3-6. Using the storage features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Console box

Your vehicle is equipped with either a lower console box or cool box.

For vehicles with the cool box, refer to page 480.

Upper console box

Press the tab to open.

Lower console box

Lift the lever to open.

Remove the tray.

ITY34C005

ITY34C006

STEP

ITY34C033

STEP

Console box

474

3-6. Using the storage features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Overhead console

Press the button.

The overhead console is useful

for temporarily storing small

items.

CAUTION

 While driving

Keep the console box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

CAUTION

 Items unsuitable for storing

Do not store items heavier than 0.2 kg (0.4 lb.).

Doing so may cause the overhead console to open and the items inside may

fall out, resulting in an accident.

 While driving

Do not leave the overhead console open.

Items may fall out and cause injury.

Console box and overhead console

475

3-6. Using the storage features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Cup holders

Front (type A)

Press down and release the lid.

You can adjust or remove the

separator inside.

Front (if equipped with type B)

Open the lower console box lid.

Rear

Pull the armrest down. (P. 499)

Press the button.

ITY34C011

ITY34C013

STEP

ITY34C015

STEP

Cup holders

476

3-6. Using the storage features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Removing the holder (front cup holders type A)

CAUTION

 Items unsuitable for the cup holder

Do not place anything other than cups or aluminum cans in the cup holders.

Other items may be thrown out of the holders in the event of an accident or

sudden braking and cause injury. If possible, cover hot drinks to prevent

burns.

 When not in use

Keep the cup holders closed.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the cup holders (vehicles with a rear cup holder)

Stow the cup holders before stowing the rear armrest.

Pull up the holder.

Cup holders

477

3-6. Using the storage features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Bottle holders

Front seats

Second seats

Third seats (if equipped)

ITY34C016

ITY34C024

Bottle holders

478

3-6. Using the storage features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Luggage compartment (if equipped)

ITY34C031

NOTICE

 Items that should not be stowed in the bottle holders

Put the cap on before stowing a bottle. Do not place open bottles in the bot-

tle holders, or glasses and paper cups containing liquid. The contents may

spill and glasses may break.

Bottle holders

479

3-6. Using the storage features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Card holder

Auxiliary boxes

ITY34C023

Card holder and auxiliary boxes

480

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

3-7. Other interior features

Cool box



: If equipped

 While the cool box is on

The front air conditioning system cannot be turned off.

 When the outside temperature is 0°C (32°F) or below

The cool box may not operate.

While the engine is running, the cool box, which is cooled by the air

conditioning, can be used.

Lift the lever to open.

On/off

When on, the indicator light

comes on.

If the front air conditioning sys-

tem is not in use, the front air

conditioning system is auto-

matically turned on when the

cool box is turned on.

ITY34C029

STEP

COOL

BOX

PWR

STEP

481

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While driving

Keep the cool box closed.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the cool box on longer than necessary when the engine is

stopped.

482

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Sun visors

Main sun visor

Forward position:

Flip down.

Side position:

Flip down, unhook, and

swing to the side.

Side extender:

Place in side position, then

slide backwards.

Sub-sun visor

Flip down with the main sun

visor in position or .

483

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Vanity mirror

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Do not leave the vanity lights on for extended periods while the engine is off.

Slide the cover.

The light turns on when the

cover is opened.

484

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Clock

 The clock is displayed when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode.

 When the battery is disconnected

The time display will automatically be set to 1:00.

With navigation system

Refer to “Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

Without navigation system

The clock can be adjusted by pressing the buttons.

Adjust hours.

Adjust minutes.

Round the nearest hour.

:e.g. 1:00 to 1:291:00

1:30 to 1:592:00

485

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Outside temperature display

The displayed temperature ranges from -30°C (-22°F) up to 50°C

(122°F).

Center panel (vehicles with navigation system)

Center panel (vehicles without navigation system)

486

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Operating conditions

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 When --- is displayed

The system may be malfunctioning. Take your vehicle to any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

 Display

In the following situations, the correct outside temperature may not be dis-

played, or the display may take longer than normal to change.

 When stopped, or driving at low speeds (less than 20 km/h [12 mph])

 When the outside temperature has changed suddenly (at the entrance/

exit of a garage, tunnel, etc.)

487

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Ashtrays

Front

Press in and release the lid to

open.

Press down on the lock spring

plate to remove.

Press the lid to close.

Rear

Pull the ashtray lid to open.

Pull the ashtray upwards to

remove.

488

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When not in use

Keep the ashtray closed.

Injuries may result in the event of sudden braking, sudden swerving or an

accident.

 To prevent fire

 Fully extinguish matches and cigarettes before putting them in the ashtray,

then make sure the ashtray is fully closed.

 Do not place paper or any other type of flammable object in the ashtray.

489

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Cigarette lighter

 The cigarette lighter can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION ON

mode.

CAUTION

 To avoid burns or fires

 Do not touch the metal parts of the cigarette lighter.

 Do not hold the cigarette lighter down. It could overheat and cause a fire.

 Do not insert anything other than the cigarette lighter into the outlet.

Push the cigarette lighter in.

The cigarette lighter will pop up

when ready for use.

490

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Power outlet

The power outlets can be used for a following component.

12 V: Accessories that run on less than 10 A

220 V AC: Accessories that use less than 100 W

Front (12V)

Rear (12V)

491

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The power outlet can be used when

12V: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in ACCESSORY or IGNITION

ON mode.

220V: The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 When using the instrument panel power outlet

You may be unable to use the USB port if a device is connected to the instru-

ment panel power outlet at the same time.

Luggage compartment (220V AC)

492

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To avoid damaging the power outlet

Close the power outlet lid when not in use.

Foreign objects or liquids that enter the power outlet may cause a short cir-

cuit.

 To prevent the fuse from being blown

12V: Do not use an accessory that uses more than 12 V/10 A.

220V: Do not use a 220V AC appliance that requires more than 100W.

If a 220V AC appliance that consumes more than 100W is used, the protec-

tion circuit will cut the power supply.

 To prevent the battery from being discharged

Do not use the power outlet longer than necessary when the engine is not

running.

 Appliances that may not operate properly (220V AC)

The following 220V AC appliances may not operate even if their power con-

sumption is under 100W.

 Appliances with high initial peak wattage

 Measuring devices that process precise data

 Other appliances that require an extremely stable power supply

493

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Heated steering wheel



: If equipped

 The heated steering wheel can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 Timer

The heated steering wheel will automatically turn off after about 30 minutes.

 If the indicator light flashes

Press the switch to turn the heated steering wheel off and then press the

switch again. If the indicator light still flashes, a malfunction may be occur-

ring. Turn the heated steering wheel off and have the vehicle inspected by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

The heated steering wheel can be used to heat the leather portion of

the steering wheel.

On/Off

The indicator light comes on

when the heater is operating.

494

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Burns

 Only appropriately qualified and capable non-impaired persons should

operate the vehicle. However, care should be taken to prevent injury if

anyone in the following categories comes into contact with the steering

wheel when the heated steering wheel is on:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the disabled

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

 Do not use the heated steering wheel more than necessary. Doing so may

cause minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE

 To prevent battery discharge

Turn the switch off when the engine is not running.

495

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Seat heaters and ventilators



: If equipped

The seat heaters and ventilators heat the seats and maintain good

airflow by blowing air from the seats.

 Front seat heaters/ventilators (if equipped)

Press the knob to release it.

Press the knob back in when

finished adjusting the tempera-

ture or the seat air flow.

Off

Blows air from the seat

The indicator light comes on.

The further you turn the knob

counterclockwise, the stronger

the airflow becomes.

Turns the seat heater on

The indicator light comes on.

The further you turn the knob

clockwise, the warmer the seat

becomes.

496

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Front seat ventilators (if equipped)

Press the knob to release it.

Press the knob back in when

finished adjusting the seat air

flow.

The indicator light comes on.

Adjusts the seat airflow

The further you turn the knob

clockwise, the stronger the air-

flow becomes.

497

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 The seat heaters and ventilators can be used when

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch is in IGNITION ON mode.

 Replacing the air filters

Filters are installed in the seat ventilators. For replacement of the filters, con-

tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

 Second seat heaters (if equipped)

For left second seat

For right second seat

High heating temperature

Low heating temperature

Off

To turn on the seat heater, press

“HI” or “LO”.

To turn off, press “OFF”.

The indicator light on “HI” or “LO”

switch indicates that the seat

heater is on.

AUTO

TEMP

OFF

TEMP

OFF

ITY35C018

498

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Burns

 Use caution when seating the following persons in a seat with the seat

heater on to avoid the possibility of burns:

• Babies, small children, the elderly, the sick and the physically chal-

lenged

• Persons with sensitive skin

• Persons who are fatigued

• Persons who have taken alcohol or drugs that induce sleep (sleeping

drugs, cold remedies, etc.)

 Do not cover the seat with anything when using the seat heater.

Using the seat heater with a blanket or cushion increases the temperature

of the seat and may lead to overheating.

 Do not use the seat heater more than necessary. Doing so may cause

minor burns or overheating.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the seat heaters and ventilators

Do not put heavy objects that have an uneven surface on the seat and do

not stick sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.) into the seat.

 To prevent battery discharge

Turn the seat heaters and ventilators off and observe that the indicator light

is off when the engine is not running.

499

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Armrest

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the armrest

Do not place too much strain on the armrest.

Fold down the armrest while

pulling the strap.

ITY35C052

500

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Assist grips

CAUTION

 Assist grip (Type A)

Do not use the assist grip (Type A) when getting in or out of the vehicle or

rising from your seat.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage of the assist grip

Do not hang any heavy object or put a heavy load on the assist grip.

An assist grip (Type A) installed on the ceiling can be used to sup-

port your body while sitting on the seat.

An assist grip (Type B) installed on the pillar can be used when get-

ting in or out of the vehicle and others.

Assist grip (Type A)

Assist grip (Type B)

501

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Floor mats

Use only floor mats designed specifically for vehicles of the same

model and model year as your vehicle. Fix them securely in place

onto the carpet.

Insert the retaining hooks

(clips) into the floor mat eye-

lets.

Turn the upper knob of each

retaining hook (clip) to secure

the floor mats in place.

*: Always align the marks.

The shape of the retaining hooks (clips) may differ from that shown

in the illustration.

STEP

502

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may cause the driver’s floor mat to slip, possibly interfering

with the pedals while driving. An unexpectedly high speed may result or it may

become difficult to stop the vehicle, leading to a serious accident.

 When installing the driver’s floor mat

 Do not use floor mats designed for other models or different model year

vehicles, even if they are Toyota Genuine floor mats.

 Only use floor mats designed for the driver’s seat.

 Always install the floor mat securely using the retaining hooks (clips) pro-

vided.

 Do not use two or more floor mats on top of each other.

 Do not place the floor mat bottom-side up or upside-down.

 Before driving

 Check that the floor mat is securely

fixed in the correct place with all the

provided retaining hooks (clips). Be

especially careful to perform this check

after cleaning the floor.

 With the engine stopped and the shift

lever in “P”, fully depress each pedal to

the floor to make sure it does not inter-

fere with the floor mat.

503

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Luggage compartment features

 Cargo hooks

Cargo hooks are provided for

securing loose items.

 Storage compartment (if equipped)

Remove the cover.

 Warning reflector holder

Remove the cover. Hold the

warning reflector with the

bands.

The warning reflector itself is

not included as an original

equipment.

504

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 First-aid kit holder

Remove the cover. Hold the

first-aid kit with a band.

The first-aid kit itself is not

included as an original equip-

ment.

 Luggage cover (if equipped)

Pull out the luggage cover and

hook it on the anchors.

505

3-7. Other interior features

Interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Removing luggage cover (if equipped)

Retract the cover and release

both ends, then lift it out.

After removing the luggage cover,

place it somewhere other than the

passenger compartment.

 When installing the luggage cover (if equipped)

CAUTION

 When the cargo hooks are not in use

To avoid injury, always return the cargo hooks to their positions when they

are not in use.

Keep the “TOP” mark on the luggage

cover ends upward.

506

3-7. Other interior features

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Maintenance and care

507

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle exterior ......... 508

Cleaning and protecting

the vehicle interior .......... 511

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance

requirements................... 514

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service

precautions ..................... 517

Hood ................................. 521

Engine compartment......... 522

Tires.................................. 539

Tire inflation pressure ....... 542

Wheels.............................. 544

Air conditioning filter ......... 546

Electronic key battery ....... 549

Checking and replacing

fuses ............................... 552

Light bulbs ........................ 573

508

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

4-1. Maintenance and care

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle exterior

 Automatic car washes

 Fold the mirrors back before washing the vehicle.

 Brushes used in automatic car washes may scratch the vehicle surface

and harm your vehicle’s paint.

 Rear spoiler may not be washable in some automatic car washes. There

may also be an increased risk of damage to vehicle.

 High pressure car washes

 Do not allow the nozzles of the car wash to come within close proximity

of the windows.

 Before car wash, check that the fuel filler door on your vehicle is closed

properly.

Perform the following to protect the vehicle and maintain it in prime

condition.

 Working from top to bottom, liberally apply water to the vehicle

body, wheel wells and underside of the vehicle to remove any

dirt and dust.

Wash the vehicle body using a sponge or soft cloth, such as a

chamois.

 For hard-to-remove marks, use car wash soap and rinse thor-

oughly with water.

 Wipe away any water.

 Wax the vehicle when the waterproof coating deteriorates.

If water does not bead on a clean surface, apply wax when the vehicle

body is cool.

509

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Aluminum wheels

 Remove any dirt immediately by using a neutral detergent. Do not use

hard brushes or abrasive cleaners. Do not use strong or harsh chemical

cleaners. Use the same mild detergent and wax as used on the paint.

 Do not use detergent on the wheels when they are hot, for example after

driving for long distance in the hot weather.

 Wash detergent from the wheels immediately after use.

 Bumpers and side moldings

Do not scrub with abrasive cleaners.

CAUTION

 When cleaning the windshield (vehicles with rain-sensing windshield

wiper)

 When the upper part of the windshield where the raindrop sensor is

located is touched by hand

 When a wet rag or similar is held close to the raindrop sensor

 If something bumps against the windshield

 If you directly touch the raindrop sensor body or if something bumps into

the raindrop sensor

 Caution about the exhaust pipe

Exhaust gasses cause the exhaust pipe to become quite hot.

When washing the vehicle, be careful not to touch the pipe until it has cooled

sufficiently, as touching a hot exhaust pipe can cause burns.

Set the wiper switch to off.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wip-

ers may operate unexpectedly in the fol-

lowing situations, and may result in hands

being caught or other serious injuries and

cause damage to the wiper blades.

ITO23C086

OFF

510

4-1. Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 To prevent paint deterioration and corrosion on the body and compo-

nents (aluminum wheels etc.)

 Wash the vehicle immediately in the following cases:

• After driving near the sea coast

• After driving on salted roads

• If you see coal tar or tree sap on the paint surface

• If you see dead insects or insect droppings on the paint

• After driving in an area contaminated with soot, oily smoke, mine dust,

iron powder or chemical substances

• If the vehicle becomes heavily soiled in dust or mud

• If liquids such as benzene and gasoline are spilled on the paint surface

 If the paint is chipped or scratched, have it repaired immediately.

 To prevent the wheels from corroding, remove any dirt and store in a place

with low humidity when storing the wheels.

 Cleaning the exterior lights

 Wash carefully. Do not use organic substances or scrub with a hard brush.

This may damage the surfaces of the lights.

 Do not apply wax on the surfaces of the lights.

Wax may cause damage to the lenses.

 When using an automatic car wash (vehicles with rain-sensing wind-

shield wipers)

Turn off the wiper switch.

If the wiper switch is in “AUTO”, the wipers may operate and the wiper

blades may be damaged.

511

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Cleaning and protecting the vehicle interior

The following procedures will help protect your vehicle’s interior and

keep it in top condition:

 Protecting the vehicle interior

Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner. Wipe dirty sur-

faces with a cloth dampened with lukewarm water.

 Cleaning the leather areas

 Remove dirt and dust using a vacuum cleaner.

 Wipe any excess dirt and dust with a soft cloth dampened with

diluted detergent.

Use a diluted water solution of approximately 5 % neutral wool

detergent.

 Wring out any excess water from the cloth and thoroughly

wipe off all remaining traces of detergent.

 Wipe the surface with a dry, soft cloth to remove any remain-

ing moisture. Allow the leather to dry in a shaded ventilated

area.

 Synthetic leather areas

 Remove loose dirt using a vacuum cleaner.

 Apply a mild soap solution to the synthetic leather using a

sponge or soft cloth.

 Allow the solution to soak in for a few minutes. Remove the

dirt and wipe off the solution with a clean, damp cloth.

512

4-1. Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Caring for leather areas

Toyota recommends cleaning the interior of the vehicle at least twice a year

to maintain the quality of the vehicle’s interior.

 Shampooing the carpets

There are several commercial foaming-type cleaners available. Use a

sponge or brush to apply the foam. Rub in overlapping circles. Do not apply

water. Excellent results are obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as possi-

ble.

 Seat belts

Clean with mild soap and lukewarm water using a cloth or sponge. Also

check the belts periodically for excessive wear, fraying or cuts.

CAUTION

 Water in the vehicle

 Do not splash or spill liquid in the vehicle.

Doing so may cause electrical components etc. to malfunction or catch

fire.

 Do not get any of the SRS components or wiring in the vehicle interior wet.

(P. 146)

Electrical malfunction may cause the airbags to deploy or not function

properly, resulting in death or serious injury.

 Cleaning the interior (especially instrument panel)

Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel may reflect off

the windshield, obstructing the driver’s view and leading to an accident,

resulting in death or serious injury.

513

4-1. Maintenance and care

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Cleaning detergents

 Do not use organic substances such as benzene or gasoline, acidic or

alkaline solutions, dye, bleach or other detergent. Doing so may discolor

the vehicle interior or cause streaks or damage to painted surfaces.

 Do not use polish wax or polish cleaner. The instrument panel’s or other

interior part’s painted surface may be damaged.

 Preventing damage to leather surfaces

Observe the following precautions to avoid damage to and deterioration of

leather surfaces.

 Remove any dust or dirt on leather surfaces immediately.

 Do not expose the vehicle to direct sunlight for extended periods of time.

Park the vehicle in the shade, especially during summer.

 Do not place items made of vinyl, plastic, or that contain wax on the uphol-

stery, as they may stick to the leather surface if the vehicle interior heats

up significantly.

 Water on the floor

Do not wash the vehicle floor with water.

Vehicle systems such as the audio system may be damaged if water comes

into contact with electrical components under the floor of the vehicle, and

may also cause the body to rust.

 Cleaning the inside of the rear window

 Do not use glass cleaner to clean the rear quarter windows and rear win-

dow, as this may cause damage to the antenna or rear window defogger

heater wires. Use a cloth dampened with lukewarm water to gently wipe

the window clean. Wipe the window in strokes running parallel to the

heater wires or antenna.

 Be careful not to scratch or damage the heater wires or antenna.

514

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance requirements

To ensure safe and economical driving, day-to-day care and regular

maintenance is essential. Toyota recommends the following mainte-

nance.

 Scheduled maintenance

Scheduled maintenance should be performed at specified inter-

vals according to the maintenance schedule.

For full details of your maintenance schedule, refer to the “Toyota

Service Booklet” or “Toyota Warranty Booklet”.

 Do-it-yourself maintenance

What about do-it-yourself maintenance?

Many maintenance items are easy to do yourself if you have a little

mechanical ability and a few basic automotive tools.

Note, however, that some maintenance tasks require special tools

and skills. These are best performed by qualified technicians. Even if

you’re an experienced do-it-yourself mechanic, we recommend that

repairs and maintenance be conducted by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer will keep a record of

maintenance, which could be useful should you ever require Warranty

Service. Should you choose to select a qualified and equipped profes-

sional other than an authorized Toyota repairer to service or maintain

your vehicle, we recommend that you request that a record of mainte-

nance be kept.

515

4-2. Maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Where to go for maintenance service?

In order to maintain your vehicle in the highest possible condition, Toyota

recommends that maintenance service operations as well as other inspec-

tions and repairs be carried out by authorized Toyota dealers or repairers or

other duly qualified and equipped professionals. For repairs and services

covered by your warranty, please visit an authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, who will use genuine Toyota parts in repairing any difficulties you

may encounter. There can also be advantages in utilizing authorized Toyota

dealers or repairers for non-warranty repairs and services, as members of

the Toyota network will be able to expertly assist you with any difficulties you

may encounter.

Your Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional service department will perform all of the scheduled maintenance

on your vehicle reliably and economically due to their experience with

Toyota vehicles.

 Does your vehicle need repair?

Be on the alert for changes in performance and sounds, and visual tip-offs

that indicate service is needed. Some important clues are:

 Engine missing, stumbling or pinging

 Appreciable loss of power

 Strange engine noises

 A fluid leak under the vehicle (However, water dripping from the air condi-

tioning after use is normal.)

 Change in exhaust sound (This may indicate a dangerous carbon mon-

oxide leak. Drive with the windows open and have the exhaust system

checked immediately.)

 Flat-looking tires, excessive tire squeal when cornering, uneven tire wear

 Vehicle pulls to one side when driving straight on a level road

 Strange noises related to suspension movement

 Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling brake pedal, pedal almost

touches the floor, vehicle pulls to one side when braking

 Engine coolant temperature continually higher than normal

 Engine continually runs hot, oil pressure gauge stays low

516

4-2. Maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If you notice any of these clues, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, as

soon as possible. Your vehicle may need adjustment or repair.

CAUTION

 If your vehicle is not properly maintained

Improper maintenance could result in serious damage to the vehicle and

possible serious injury or death.

 Handling of the battery

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds which are known to cause brain damage. Wash your hands after

handling. (P. 532)

 Used engine oil

Used engine oil contains chemicals that have been shown to cause cancer

in laboratory animals. Avoid prolonged and repeated contact. Always protect

your skin by washing thoroughly with soap and water.

517

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Do-it-yourself service precautions

If you perform maintenance yourself, be sure to follow the correct

procedures as given in these sections.

Items Parts and tools

Battery condition (P. 532)

•Warm water

• Baking soda

• Grease

• Conventional wrench

(for terminal clamp bolts)

• Distilled water

Engine coolant level (P. 530)

• Toyota Super Long Life Coolant

or similar high quality ethylene

glycol based non-silicate, non-

amine, non-nitrite and non-borate

coolant with long-life hybrid

organic acid technology. Toyota

Super Long Life Coolant is pre-

mixed with 50 % coolant and

50 % deionized water.

• Funnel (used only for adding cool-

ant)

Engine oil level P. 525)

• Toyota Genuine Motor Oil or

equivalent

• Rag or paper towel, funnel

(used only for adding oil)

Fuses (P. 552)

• Fuse with same amperage rating

as original

518

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Items Parts and tools

Light bulbs (P. 573)

• Bulb with same number and

wattage rating as original

• Phillips-head screwdriver

• Flathead screwdriver

• Wrench

Radiator, condenser and inter-

cooler (P. 532)



Tire inflation pressure (P. 542)

• Tire pressure gauge

• Compressed air source

Washer fluid (P. 536)

• Water or washer fluid containing

antifreeze (for winter use)

• Funnel

519

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

The engine compartment contains many mechanisms and fluids that may

move suddenly, become hot, or become electrically energized. To avoid death

or serious injury observe the following precautions.

 When working on the engine compartment

 Keep hands, clothing and tools away from the moving fan and engine

drive belt.

 Be careful not to touch the engine, radiator, exhaust manifold, etc. right

after driving as they may be hot. Oil and other fluids may also be hot.

 Do not leave anything that may burn easily, such as paper or rags, in the

engine compartment.

 Do not smoke, cause sparks or expose an open flame to fuel or the bat-

tery. Fuel and battery fumes are flammable.

 Be extremely cautious when working on the battery. It contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

 Take care because brake fluid can harm your hands or eyes and damage

painted surfaces.

If fluid gets on your hands or in your eyes, flush the affected area with

clean water immediately.

If you still experience discomfort, see a doctor.

 When working near the electric cooling fan or radiator grille

Be sure the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is off.

With the “ENGINE START STOP” switch in IGNITION ON mode, the electric

cooling fan may automatically start to run if the air conditioning is on and/or

the coolant temperature is high. (P. 532)

 When working on or under the vehicle

 Do not get under the vehicle with just the jack supporting it.

Always use automotive jack stands or other solid supports.

 Use eye protection to prevent flying or falling material, fluid spray, etc. from

getting in your eyes.

520

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 If you remove the air cleaner filter

Driving with the air cleaner removed may cause excessive engine wear due

to dirt in the air.

 If the fluid level is low or high

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go down slightly as the brake pads

wear or when the fluid level in the accumulator is high.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it may indicate a serious problem.

521

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Hood

CAUTION

 Pre-driving check

Check that the hood is fully closed and locked.

If the hood is not locked properly, it may open while the vehicle is in motion

and cause an accident, which may result in death or serious injury.

Release the lock from the inside of the vehicle to open the hood.

Pull the hood release lever.

The hood will pop up slightly.

Lift the hood catch and lift the

hood.

STEP

522

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Engine compartment

1UR-FE engine

Engine oil level dipstick

(P. 525)

Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 530)

Cooling fans

Engine oil filler cap

(P. 527)

Fuse box (P. 552)

Washer fluid tank (P. 536)

Battery (P. 532)

Condenser (P. 532)

Radiator (P. 532)

523

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

1VD-FTV engine

Engine coolant reservoir

(P. 530)

Engine oil level dipstick

(P. 525)

Engine oil filler cap

(P. 527)

Intercooler (P. 532)

Cooling fans

Fuel filter (P. 538, 667)

Fuse box (P. 552)

Washer fluid tank (P. 536)

Battery (P. 532)

Condenser (P. 532)

Radiator (P. 532)

524

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Engine compartment cover

 Removing the engine compartment cover

 Installing the clips

Push up center portion

Insert

Press

NOTICE

 After installing an engine compartment cover

Make sure that the cover is securely installed in its original position.

525

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Engine oil

With the engine at operating temperature and turned off, check the oil

level on the dipstick.

 Checking the engine oil

Park the vehicle on level ground. After warming up the engine

and turning it off, wait more than 5 minutes for the oil to drain

back into the bottom of the engine.

Hold a rag under the end and

pull the dipstick out.

Wipe the dipstick clean.

Reinsert the dipstick fully.

STEP

526

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Holding a rag under the end, pull the dipstick out and check

the oil level.

Non-flat dipstick

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may dif-

fer depending on the type of vehi-

cle or engine.

Flat dipstick

Low

Normal

Excessive

The shape of the dipstick may dif-

fer depending on the type of vehi-

cle or engine.

Wipe the dipstick and reinsert it fully.

STEP

527

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Adding engine oil

If the oil level is below or near

the low level mark, add engine

oil of the same type as already in

the engine. (P. 679)

Make sure to check the oil type and prepare the items needed before

adding oil.

Remove the oil filler cap.

Add engine oil slowly, checking the dipstick.

Install the filler cap, turning it clockwise.

Engine oil selection P. 679

Oil quantity

(Low  Full)

1.5 L (1.6 qt., 1.3 Imp.qt.)

Items Clean funnel

STEP

528

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Engine oil consumption

A certain amount of engine oil will be consumed while driving. In the follow-

ing situations, oil consumption may increase, and engine oil may need to be

refilled in between oil maintenance intervals.

 When the engine is new, for example directly after purchasing the vehicle

or after replacing the engine

 If low quality oil or oil of an inappropriate viscosity is used

 When driving at high engine speeds or with a heavy load, when towing,

or when driving while accelerating or decelerating frequently

 When leaving the engine idling for a long time, or when driving frequently

through heavy traffic

 After changing the engine oil (diesel engine only

The oil change system should be reset. Perform the following procedures:

Switch the display to trip meter A (P. 208) when the engine is run-

ning.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

While pressing the trip meter reset button, set the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode (but do not start the engine

because otherwise the reset mode will be cancelled). Continue to

press and hold the button until the multi-information display indi-

cates that the reset is complete.

*: Except for Russia, Ukraine, Azerbaijan, Georgia, Armenia, Belarus

STEP

529

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Used engine oil

 Used engine oil contains potentially harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as inflammation or skin cancer, so care should

be taken to avoid prolonged and repeated contact. To remove used engine

oil from your skin, wash thoroughly with soap and water.

 Dispose of used oil and filters only in a safe and acceptable manner. Do

not dispose of used oil and filters in household trash, in sewers or onto the

ground. Call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional, service station or auto parts store for

information concerning recycling or disposal.

 Do not leave used engine oil within the reach of children.

NOTICE

 To prevent serious engine damage

Check the oil level on regular basis.

 When replacing the engine oil

 Be careful not to spill engine oil on the vehicle components.

 Avoid overfilling, as the engine could be damaged.

 Check the oil level on the dipstick every time you refill the vehicle.

 Be sure the engine oil filler cap is properly tightened.

530

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Engine coolant

Gasoline engine

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “F” and “L” lines on

the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“F”

“L”

If the level is on or below the “L”

line, add coolant up to the “F” line.

Diesel engine

The coolant level is satisfactory if it is between the “FULL” and “LOW”

lines on the reservoir when the engine is cold.

Reservoir cap

“FULL”

“LOW”

If the level is on or below the

“LOW” line, add coolant up to the

“FULL” line.

531

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 If the coolant level drops within a short time after replenishing

Visually check the radiator, hoses, reservoir cap, radiator cap, drain cock

and water pump.

If you cannot find a leak, have any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional, test the cap and check for

leaks in the cooling system.

 Coolant selection

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene

glycol based non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and non-borate coolant

with long-life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a mixture of 50 % coolant and 50 %

deionized water. (Enabled: -35C [-31F])

For more details about engine coolant, contact any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

CAUTION

 When the engine is hot

Do not remove the coolant reservoir cap.

The cooling system may be under pressure and may spray hot coolant if the

cap is removed, causing serious injuries, such as burns.

NOTICE

 When adding engine coolant

Coolant is neither plain water nor straight antifreeze. The correct mixture of

water and antifreeze must be used to provide proper lubrication, corrosion

protection and cooling. Be sure to read the antifreeze or coolant label.

 If you spill coolant

Be sure to wash it off with water to prevent damage to parts or paint.

532

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Radiator, condenser and intercooler

Check the radiator, condenser and intercooler and clear any foreign

objects.

If any of the above parts are extremely dirty or you are not sure of

their condition, have your vehicle checked by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

Battery

Check the battery as follows.

 Caution symbol

The meanings of each caution symbol on the top of the battery are as

follows:

CAUTION

 When the engine is hot

Do not touch the radiator, condenser or intercooler, as they may be hot and

may cause serious injuries, such as burns.

No smoking, no naked

flames, no sparks

Battery acid

Shield eyes

Note operating

instructions

Keep away from chil-

dren

Explosive gas

533

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Battery exterior

Make sure that the battery terminals are not corroded and that

there are no loose connections, cracks, or loose clamps.

Terminals

Hold-down clamp

 Checking battery fluid

Check that the level is between

the upper and lower lines.

Upper line

Lower line

If the fluid level is at or below the

lower line, add distilled water.

ITY43C019

534

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Adding distilled water

Remove the vent plug.

Add distilled water.

If the upper line cannot be seen, check the fluid level by looking

directly at the cell.

Put the vent plug back on and close securely.

Low O.K.

 Before recharging

When recharging, the battery produces hydrogen gas which is flammable

and explosive. Therefore, before recharging:

 If recharging with the battery installed on the vehicle, be sure to discon-

nect the ground cable.

 Make sure the power switch on the charger is off when connecting and

disconnecting the charger cables to the battery.

 After recharging the battery

The engine may not start. Follow the procedure below to initialize the sys-

tem.

Depress the brake pedal with the shift lever in “N”.

Open and close any of the doors.

Restart the engine.

STEP

535

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Chemicals in the battery

A battery contains poisonous and corrosive sulfuric acid and may produce

hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. To reduce the risk of death

or serious injury, take the following precautions while working on or near bat-

tery:

 Do not cause sparks by touching the battery terminals with tools.

 Do not smoke or light a match near the battery.

 Avoid contact with eyes, skin and clothes.

 Never inhale or swallow electrolyte.

 Wear protective safety glasses when working near the battery.

 Keep children away from the battery.

 Where to safely charge the battery

Always charge the battery in an open area. Do not charge the battery in a

garage or closed room where there is not sufficient ventilation.

 Emergency measures regarding electrolyte

 If electrolyte gets in your eyes

Flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immedi-

ate medical attention. If possible, continue to apply water with a sponge or

cloth while traveling to the nearest medical facility.

 If electrolyte gets on your skin

Wash the affected area thoroughly. If you feel pain or burning, get medical

attention immediately.

 If electrolyte gets on your clothes

It can soak through clothing on to your skin. Immediately take off the cloth-

ing and follow the procedure above if necessary.

 If you accidentally swallow electrolyte

Drink a large quantity of water or milk. Get emergency medical attention

immediately.

536

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Washer fluid

If any washer does not work or

the warning message appears

on the multi-information display,

the washer tank may be empty.

Add washer fluid.

NOTICE

 When recharging the battery

Never recharge the battery while the engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

 When adding distilled water

Avoid overfilling. Water spilled during battery recharging may cause corro-

sion.

CAUTION

 When refilling the washer fluid

Do not refill the washer fluid when the engine is hot or running, as the

washer fluid contains alcohol and may catch fire if spilled on the engine etc.

537

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Do not use any fluid other than washer fluid

Do not use soapy water or engine antifreeze instead of washer fluid.

Doing so may cause streaking on the vehicle’s painted surfaces.

 Diluting washer fluid

Dilute washer fluid with water as necessary.

Refer to the freezing temperatures listed on the label of the washer fluid bot-

tle.

538

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Fuel filter (diesel engine only)

You may drain the fuel filter yourself. However, as the operation is dif-

ficult, we recommend having it drained by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional. Even if you decide to drain it yourself, contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

The water in the fuel filter needs to be drained if the warning mes-

sage is shown on the multi-information display and a buzzer sounds.

(P. 612)

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

Place a small tray under the drain plug to catch the water and

any fuel that comes out.

Turn the drain plug counterclock-

wise about 2 to 2 1/2 turns.

Operate the priming pump until

fuel begins to run out.

After draining, tighten the drain plug by hand.

STEP

539

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Tires

Replace or rotate the tires in accordance with treadwear.

 Checking tires

New tread

Treadwear indicator

Worn tread

The location of treadwear indi-

cators is shown by the “TWI” or

“ ” marks, etc., molded on

the sidewall of each tire.

Check spare tire condition and

inflation pressure if not rotated.

 Tire rotation

Rotate the tires in the order

shown.

To equalize tire wear and help

extend tire life, Toyota recom-

mends that you rotate your

tires approximately every 5000

km (3000 miles).

Front

540

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 When to replace your vehicle’s tires

Tires should be replaced if:

 You have tire damage such as cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric or bulges indicating internal damage

 A tire goes flat repeatedly or cannot be properly repaired due to the size

or location of a cut or other damage

If you are not sure, consult with any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Tire life

Any tire over 6 years old must be checked by a qualified technician even if

they have seldom or never been used or damage is not obvious.

 If the tread wears down 4 mm (0.16 in.) or more on snow tires

The effectiveness of snow tires is lost.

541

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When inspecting or replacing tires

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

Failure to do so may cause damage to parts of the drive train, as well as

dangerous handling characteristics, which may lead to an accident resulting

in death or serious injury.

 Do not mix tires of different makes, models or tread patterns.

Also, do not mix tires of remarkably different treadwear.

 Do not use tire sizes other than those recommended by Toyota.

 Do not mix differently constructed tires (radial, bias-belted or bias-ply

tires).

 Do not mix summer, all season and snow tires.

 Do not use tires that have been used on another vehicle.

Do not use tires if you do not know how they were used previously.

NOTICE

 Driving on rough roads

Take particular care when driving on roads with loose surfaces or pot holes.

These conditions may cause losses in tire air pressure, reducing the cush-

ioning ability of the tires. In addition driving on rough roads may cause dam-

age to the tires themselves, as well as the vehicle’s wheels and body.

 If tire inflation pressures become low while driving

Do not continue driving, or your tires and/or wheels may be ruined.

542

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Tire inflation pressure

 Effects of incorrect tire inflation pressure

Driving with incorrect tire inflation pressure may result in the following:

 Reduced fuel efficiency

 Reduced driving comfort and tire life

 Reduced safety

 Damage to the drive train

If a tire needs frequent refilling, have it checked by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Instructions for checking tire inflation pressure

When checking tire inflation pressure, observe the following:

 Check only when the tires are cold.

If your vehicle has been parked for at least 3 hours and has not been

driven for more than 1.5 km or 1 mile, you will get an accurate cold tire

inflation pressure reading.

 Always use a tire pressure gauge.

The appearance of the tire can be misleading. In addition, tire inflation

pressures that are even just a few pounds off can degrade ride and han-

dling.

 Do not bleed or reduce tire inflation pressure after driving. It is normal for

the tire inflation pressure to be higher after driving.

 Never exceed the vehicle capacity weight.

Passengers and luggage weight should be placed so that the vehicle is

balanced.

Make sure to maintain the proper tire inflation pressure. Tire inflation

pressure should be checked at least once per month. However,

Toyota recommends that tire inflation pressure be checked once

every two weeks. (P. 689)

543

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Proper inflation is critical to save tire performance

Keep your tires properly inflated. Otherwise, the following conditions may

occur and result in an accident causing death or serious injury.

 Excessive wear

 Uneven wear

 Poor handling

 Possibility of blowouts resulting from overheated tires

 Poor sealing of the tire bead

 Wheel deformation and/or tire separation

 A greater possibility of tire damage from road hazards

NOTICE

 When inspecting and adjusting tire inflation pressure

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve caps.

Without the valve caps, dirt or moisture could get into the valve and cause

air leakage, which could result in an accident. If the caps have been lost,

replace them as soon as possible.

544

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Wheels

If a wheel is bent, cracked or heavily corroded, it should be replaced.

Otherwise, the tire may separate from the wheel or cause loss of

handling control.

 Wheel selection

When replacing wheels, care should be taken to ensure that

they are equivalent to those removed in load capacity, diameter,

rim width, and inset

Replacement wheels are available at any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

*: Conventionally referred to as “offset”.

Toyota does not recommend using:

 Wheels of different sizes or types

 Used wheels

 Bent wheels that have been straightened

 Aluminum wheel precautions

 Use only Toyota wheel nuts and wrenches designed for use

with your aluminum wheels.

 When rotating, repairing or changing your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving 1600 km (1000 miles).

 Be careful not to damage the aluminum wheels when using

tire chains.

 Use only Toyota genuine balance weights or equivalent and a

plastic or rubber hammer when balancing your wheels.

545

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When replacing wheels

 Do not use wheels that are a different size from those recommended in the

Owner’s Manual, as this may result in loss of handling control.

 Never use an inner tube in a leaking wheel which is designed for a tube-

less tire. Doing so may result in an accident, causing serious injury or

death.

 When installing the wheel nuts

 Never use oil or grease on the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

Oil and grease may cause the wheel nuts to be excessively tightened,

leading to bolt or disc wheel damage. In addition, the oil or grease can

cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel may fall off, causing an acci-

dent and resulting in death or serious injury. Remove any oil or grease

from the wheel bolts or wheel nuts.

 Use of defective wheels prohibited

Do not use cracked or deformed wheels.

Doing so could cause the tire to leak air during driving, possibly causing an

accident.

 Be sure to install the wheel nuts with

the tapered ends facing inward. Install-

ing the nuts with the tapered ends fac-

ing outward can cause the wheel to

break and eventually cause the wheel

to come off while driving, which could

lead to an accident resulting in death or

serious injury.

Tapered

portion

546

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Air conditioning filter

The air conditioning filter must be cleaned or changed regularly to

maintain air conditioning efficiency.

 Removal method

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch IGNITION ON

mode and switch to recirculated air mode, then turn the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

Open the glove box and remove the separate tray.

(P. 472)

Remove the filter cover.

Remove the filter case.

STEP

ITY43C030

STEP

547

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Cleaning method

If the filter is dirty, clean by

blowing compressed air

through the filter from the

downward side.

Hold the air gun 5 cm (2 in.)

from the filter and blow for

approximately 2 minutes at

500 kPa (5.0 kgf/cm

or bar, 72

psi).

If it is not available, have the

filter cleaned by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

 Replacement method

Remove the air conditioning

filter and replace it with a new

one.

The “UP” marks shown on

the filter should be pointing up.

ITY43C090

548

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Checking interval

Inspect, clean and replace the air conditioning filter according to the mainte-

nance schedule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy traffic flow, more fre-

quent cleaning or early replacement may be required. (For scheduled

maintenance information, please refer to the “Toyota Service Booklet” or

“Toyota Warranty Booklet”.)

 If air flow from the vents decreases dramatically

The filter may be clogged. Check the filter and replace if necessary.

NOTICE

 To prevent damage to the system

 When using the air conditioning system, make sure that a filter is always

installed.

 When cleaning the filter, do not clean the filter with water.

549

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Electronic key battery

Replace the battery with a new one if it is discharged.

 You will need the following items:

 Flathead screwdriver (To prevent damage to the key, cover

the tip of the screwdriver with rag.)

 Small Phillips-head screwdriver

 Lithium battery CR1632

 Replacing the battery

Take out the mechanical key.

Remove the cover.

STEP

550

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 If the electronic key battery is discharged

The following symptoms may occur.

 The smart entry & start system and wireless remote control will not func-

tion properly.

 The operational range is reduced.

 Use a CR1632 lithium battery

 Batteries can be purchased at any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,

or another duly qualified and equipped professional, jewelers, or camera

stores.

 Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

 Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws.

Remove the depleted battery.

Insert a new battery with the

“+” terminal facing up.

STEP

551

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Removed battery and other parts

These parts are small and if swallowed by a child, they can cause choking.

Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious

injury.

 Certification for the smart entry & start system

RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT

TYPE. DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUC-

TIONS.

NOTICE

 For normal operation after replacing the battery

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidents.

 Always work with dry hands.

Moisture may cause the battery to rust.

 Do not touch or move any other components inside the electronic key.

 Do not bend the battery terminals.

552

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Checking and replacing fuses

If any of the electrical components do not operate, a fuse may have

blown. If this happens, check and replace the fuses as necessary.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

The fuses are located in the following places. To check the

fuses, follow the instructions below.

 Engine compartment (fuse box on the left side)

Push the tab in and lift the lid

off.

 Engine compartment (fuse box if equipped on the right

side)

Push the tabs in and lift the lid

off.

STEP

553

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Under the instrument panel (left-hand drive vehicles)

Driver’s side instrument panel (type A)

Remove the lid.

Passenger’s side instrument panel (type B)

Remove the cover.

Remove the lid.

ITY43C032

ITY43C033

ITY43C034

554

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Under the instrument panel (right-hand drive vehicles)

Passenger’s side instrument panel (type A)

Remove the cover.

Remove the lid.

Driver’s side instrument panel (type B)

Remove the lid.

ITY42C009

ITY42C010

ITY42C028

555

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

After a system failure, see “Fuse layout and amperage rat-

ings” (P. 557) for details about which fuse to check.

Remove the fuse with the pull-

out tool.

Check if the fuse has blown.

Type A and B

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Replace it with one of an

appropriate amperage rating.

The amperage rating can be

found on the fuse box lid.

STEP

ITY42C027

STEP

ITY42C012

Type A

ITY42C013

Type B

556

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Type C and D

Normal fuse

Blown fuse

Contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped

professional.

ITY42C014

Type C

ITY42C015

Type D

557

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Fuse layout and amperage ratings

 Engine compartment (fuse box on the left side)

Type A

Fuse Ampere Circuit

A/F*

15 A A/F heater

EFI MAIN2*

15 A*

25 A*

VNT DRIVER, EFI, EDU

2 HORN 10 A Horn

3 EFI MAIN 25 A EFI, A/F heater, fuel pump

4 IG2 MAIN 30 A INJ, IGN, MET

5 RR A/C 50 A Blower controller

6 SEAT-A/C LH 25 A Seat heaters and ventilators

7 RR S/HTR 20 A Rear seat heater

8 DEICER 20 A Windshield wiper de-icer

9 CDS FAN 25 A Condenser fan

10 TOW TAIL 30 A No circuit

558

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

11 RR P/SEAT 30 A No circuit

12 ALT-CDS 10 A ALT-CDS

13 FR FOG 7.5 A Front fog lights

14 SECURITY 5 A SECURITY

15 SEAT-A/C RH 25 A Seat heaters and ventilators

16 STOP 15 A

Stoplights, high mounted stoplight,

ABS, VSC, main body ECU, EFI,

trailer

AI PMP HTR

10 A AI pump heater

PWR HTR

7.5 A Power heater

18 AHC 50 A 4-Wheel AHC

19 PTC-1 50 A PTC heater

20 PTC-2 50 A PTC heater

21 PTC-3 50 A PTC heater

22 RH-J/B 50 A RH-J/B

23 SUB BATT 40 A Towing

24 VGRS 40 A VGRS ECU

25 H-LP CLN 30 A Headlight cleaner

26 DEFOG 30 A Rear window defogger

27 HTR 50 A Front air conditioning system

28 PBD 30 A Power back door ECU

29 LH-J/B 150 A LH-J/B

30 ALT 180 A Alternator

Fuse Ampere Circuit

559

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

A/PUMP

NO.1*

50 A AI DRIVER

GLOW1

80 A Engine glow system

A/PUMP

NO.2

50 A No circuit

GLOW2

80 A Engine glow system

33 MAIN 40 A

Headlight, HEAD LL, HEAD RL,

HEAD LH, HEAD RH

34 ABS1 50 A ABS

35 ABS2 30 A ABS

36 ST 30 A Starter system

37 IMB 7.5 A

ID code box, smart entry & push

start system, GBS

38 AM2 5 A Main body ECU

39 DOME2 7.5 A

Vanity lights, overhead module,

rear interior light

40 ECU-B2 5 A Driving position memory system

41 AMP 2 30 A Audio system

42 RSE 7.5 A No circuit

43 TOWING 30 A Towing

44 DOOR NO.2 25 A Main body ECU

45 STR LOCK 20 A Steering lock system

46 TURN-HAZ 15 A

Meter, front turn signal lights, side

turn signal lights, rear turn signal

lights, trailer

EFI MAIN2*

20 A Fuel pump

F/PMP*

20 A No circuit

Fuse Ampere Circuit

560

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

ETCS*

10 A EFI

A/F*

15 A A/F heater

49 ALT-S 5 A IC-ALT

50 AMP 1 30 A Audio system

51 RAD NO.1 10 A

Navigation system, audio system,

parking assist system

52 ECU-B1 5 A

Double lock system, smart entry &

start system, overhead module,

yaw rate & G sensor, tilt and tele-

scopic steering, meter, cool box,

gateway ECU, steering sensor,

VGRS

53 DOME1 10 A Illuminated entry system, clock

54 HEAD LH 15 A Headlight high beam (left)

55 HEAD LL 15 A

Headlight low beam (left), headlight

leveling system

56 INJ 10 A Injector, ignition system

57 MET 5 A Meter

58 IGN 10 A

Circuit open, SRS airbag system,

gateway ECU, smart entry & push

start system, ABS, VSC, steering

lock system, GBS

59 DRL 5 A Daytime running light

60 HEAD RH 15 A Headlight high beam (right)

61 HEAD RL 15 A Headlight low beam (right)

62 EFI NO.2 7.5 A Air injection system, air flow meter

63 RR A/C NO.2 7.5 A No circuit

Fuse Ampere Circuit

561

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: Vehicles with gasoline engine

: Vehicles with diesel engine (for Ukraine, Azerbaijan, Georgia, Armenia,

Belarus)

: Vehicles with diesel engine (except for Ukraine, Azerbaijan, Georgia,

Armenia, Belarus)

64 EFI NO.3

2, 3

7.5 A

EGR E-VRV B2, D-THROT SOL

65 DEF NO.2 5 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers

66 SPARE 5 A Spare fuse

67 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse

68 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse

Fuse Ampere Circuit

562

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Type B

Fuse Ampere Circuit

A/F*

15 A A/F heater

EFI MAIN2

2, 3

15 A*

25 A*

VNT DRIVER, EFI, EDU

2 HORN 10 A Horn

3 EFI MAIN 25 A EFI, A/F heater, fuel pump

4 IG2 MAIN 30 A INJ, IGN, MET

5 RR A/C 50 A Blower controller

6 CDS FAN 25 A Condenser fan

7 RR S/HTR 20 A Rear seat heater

8 FR FOG 7.5 A Front fog lights

9STOP 15 A

Stoplights, high mounted stoplight,

ABS, VSC, main body ECU, EFI,

trailer

10 SEAT-A/C LH 25 A Seat heaters and ventilators

563

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

11 HWD4 30 A Heated Windshield Defroster

12 HWD3 30 A Heated Windshield Defroster

13 AHC 50 A 4-Wheel AHC

14 PTC-1 50 A PTC heater

15 PTC-2 50 A PTC heater

16 PTC-3 50 A PTC heater

17 RH-J/B 50 A RH-J/B

18 SUB BATT 40 A Towing

19 VGRS 40 A VGRS ECU

20 H-LP CLN 30 A Headlight cleaner

21 DEFOG 30 A Rear window defogger

22 SUB-R/B 100 A SUB-R/B

23 HTR 50 A Front air conditioning system

24 PBD 30 A Power back door ECU

25 LH-J/B 150 A LH-J/B

26 ALT 180 A Alternator

A/PUMP

NO.1

50 A AI DRIVER

GLOW1

2, 3

80 A Engine glow system

A/PUMP

NO.2

50 A No circuit

GLOW2

2, 3

80 A Engine glow system

29 MAIN 40 A

Headlight, HEAD LL, HEAD RL,

HEAD LH, HEAD RH

30 ABS1 50 A ABS

Fuse Ampere Circuit

564

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

31 ABS2 30 A ABS

32 ST 30 A Starter system

33 IMB 7.5 A

ID code box, smart entry & push

start system, GBS

34 AM2 5 A Main body ECU

35 DOME2 7.5 A

Vanity lights, overhead module,

rear interior light

36 ECU-B2 5 A Driving position memory system

37 AMP 2 30 A Audio system

38 RSE 7.5 A No circuit

39 TOWING 30 A Towing

40 DOOR NO.2 25 A Main body ECU

41 STR LOCK 20 A Steering lock system

42 TURN-HAZ 15 A

Meter, front turn signal lights, side

turn signal lights, rear turn signal

lights, trailer

EFI MAIN2

20 A Fuel pump

F/PMP

2, 3

20 A No circuit

ETCS

10 A EFI

A/F

15 A A/F heater

45 ALT-S 5 A IC-ALT

46 AMP 1 30 A

Audio system

47 RAD NO.1 10 A

Navigation system, audio system,

parking assist system

Fuse Ampere Circuit

565

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

48 ECU-B1 5 A

Double lock system, smart entry &

start system, overhead module,

yaw rate & G sensor, tilt and tele-

scopic steering, meter, cool box,

gateway ECU, steering sensor,

VGRS

49 DOME1 10 A Illuminated entry system, clock

50 HEAD LH 15 A Headlight high beam (left)

51 HEAD LL 15 A

Headlight low beam (left), headlight

leveling system

52 INJ 10 A Injector, ignition system

53 MET 5 A Meter

54 IGN 10 A

Circuit open, SRS airbag system,

gateway ECU, smart entry & push

start system, ABS, VSC, steering

lock system, GBS

55 DRL 5 A Daytime running light

56 HEAD RH 15 A Headlight high beam (right)

57 HEAD RL 15 A Headlight low beam (right)

58 EFI NO.2 7.5 A Air injection system, air flow meter

59 RR A/C NO.2 7.5 A No circuit

Fuse Ampere Circuit

566

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: Vehicles with gasoline engine

: Vehicles with diesel engine (for Russia, Ukraine, Azerbaijan, Georgia,

Armenia, Belarus)

: Vehicles with diesel engine (except for Russia, Ukraine, Azerbaijan,

Georgia, Armenia, Belarus)

60 EFI NO.3

2, 3

7.5 A

EGR E-VRV B2, D-THROT SOL

61 DEF NO.2 5 A Outside rear view mirror defoggers

62 SPARE 5 A Spare fuse

63 SPARE 15 A Spare fuse

64 SPARE 30 A Spare fuse

Fuse Ampere Circuit

567

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Engine compartment (fuse box if equipped on the right side)

: Vehicles with gasoline engine

: Vehicles with diesel engine

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 HWD1 30 A Heated Windshield Defroster

2 TOW BRK 30 A No circuit

3 RR P/SEAT 30 A No circuit

PWR HTR

7.5 A No circuit

PWR HTR

7.5 A Power heater

5 DEICER 20 A Windshield wiper de-icer

6 ALT-CDS 10 A ALT-CDS

7 SECURITY 5 A SECURITY

8 SEAT A/C RH 25 A Seat heaters and ventilators

AI PMP HTR

10 A AI pump heater

AI PMP HTR

10 A No circuit

10 TOW TAIL 30 A No circuit

11 HWD2 30 A Heated Windshield Defroster

568

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Under the instrument panel (type A)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 CIG 15 A Cigarette lighter

2 BK/UP LP 10 A Back-up lights, trailer

3ACC 7.5 A

Audio system, parking assist sys-

tem, multi-display assembly, main

body ECU, mirror ECU, smart entry

& start system, clock

4 PANEL 10 A

Four-wheel drive system, ashtray,

cigarette lighter, cool box, cruise

control, center differential lock,

multi-display assembly, seat

heater, air conditioning system,

glove box light, emergency flash-

ers, audio system, headlight

cleaner switch, headlight leveling

dial, power heater, driving position

memory system, outside rear view

mirror switches, overhead module,

roll sensing of curtain shield air-

bags off switch, shift lever switch,

steering switches, VSC OFF

switch, console switch, PANEL

RLY

569

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

5 ECU-IG NO.2 10 A

Air conditioning system, heater,

overhead module, ABS, VSC,

steering sensor, yaw rate & G sen-

sor, main body ECU, stoplights,

moon roof, clock, EC mirror

6 WINCH 5 A No circuit

7 A/C IG 10 A

Cool box, condenser fan, cooler

compressor, rear window and out-

side rear view mirror defoggers, air

conditioning system

8TAIL 15 A

Tail lights, license plate lights, front

fog lights, rear fog light, trailer, front

position lights

9 WIPER 30 A Windshield wiper

10 WSH 20 A Windshield washer

11 RR WIPER 15 A Rear window wiper and washer

12 4WD 20 A Four-wheel drive system

13 LH-IG 5 A

Alternator, seat heater, windshield

wiper de-icer, front seat belt, emer-

gency flasher, shift lever switch

14 ECU-IG NO.1 5 A

ABS, VSC, tilt and telescopic steer-

ing, gateway ECU, shift lock sys-

tem, parking assist system, cruise

control system, pre-crash safety,

trailer, headlight cleaner, multi-dis-

play assembly, rain-sensing wind-

shield wipers, driving position

memory system, power door lock

system

15 S/ROOF 25 A Moon roof

Fuse Ampere Circuit

570

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

16 RR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows

17 MIR 15 A

Mirror ECU, outside rear view mir-

ror defoggers

18 RR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows

19 FR DOOR LH 20 A Power windows

20 FR DOOR RH 20 A Power windows

21 RR FOG 7.5 A Rear fog light

22 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioning system

23 AM1 5 A No circuit

24 TI & TE 15 A Tilt and telescopic steering

25 FR P/SEAT RH 30 A Power seat

26 PWR OUTLET 15 A Power outlet

27 OBD 7.5 A On-Board diagnosis

28 PSB 30 A Pre-crash safety

29 DR/LCK 25 A Main body ECU

30 FR P/SEAT LH 30 A Power seat

31 INVERTER 15 A Inverter

Fuse Ampere Circuit

571

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Under the instrument panel (type B)

Fuse Ampere Circuit

1 RSF LH 30 A No circuit

2 B/DR CLSR RH 30 A Back door closer

3 B/DR CLSR LH 30 A Back door closer

4 RSF RH 30 A No circuit

5 DOOR DL 15 A Double locking system

6 AHC-B 20 A 4-Wheel AHC

7 TEL 5 A Multimedia

8 TOW BK/UP 7.5 A No circuit

9 AHC-B NO.2 10 A 4-Wheel AHC

10 ECU-IG NO.4 5 A VGRS, 4-Wheel AHC

11 SEAT-A/C FAN 10 A Ventilators

12 SEAT-HTR 20 A Seat heater

13 AFS 5 A No circuit

14 ECU-IG NO.3 5 A Head LP auto leveling

15 STRG HTR 10 A Heated steering system

16 TV 10 A Multi-display assembly

572

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 After a fuse is replaced

 If the lights do not turn on even after the fuse has been replaced, a bulb

may need replacement. (P. 573)

 If the replaced fuse blows again, have the vehicle inspected by any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

 If there is an overload in the circuits

The fuses are designed to blow, protecting the wiring harness from damage.

CAUTION

 To prevent system breakdowns and vehicle fire

Observe the following precautions.

Failing to do so may cause damage to the vehicle, and possibly a fire or

injury.

 Never use a fuse of a higher amperage rating than indicated, or use any

other object in place of a fuse.

 Always use a genuine Toyota fuse or equivalent.

Never replace a fuse with a wire, even as a temporary fix.

 Do not modify the fuse or the fuse box.

NOTICE

 Before replacing fuses

Have the cause of electrical overload determined and repaired by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional, as soon as possible.

573

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Light bulbs

You may replace the following bulbs by yourself. The difficulty level

of replacement varies depending on the bulb. As there is a danger

that components may be damaged, we recommend that replacement

is carried out by any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Prepare a replacement light bulb

Check the wattage of the light bulb being replaced. (P. 691)

 Remove the engine compartment cover

P. 524

 Front bulb locations

Front fog light (if equipped)

Front turn signal light

Headlight

high beam

Running board light

(if equipped)

574

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Rear bulb locations

Rear fog light

Rear turn signal light Back-up light

License plate lights

575

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Replacing light bulbs

 Headlight high beams

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Unplug the connector while

depressing the lock release.

STEP

ITY43C041

STEP

576

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Replace the light bulb, and install

the bulb base.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb

with the mounting, and insert.

Turn and secure the bulb base.

Shake the bulb base gently to

check that it is not loose, turn the

headlights on once and visually

confirm that no light is leaking

through the mounting.

STEP

577

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Front fog lights (if equipped)

Remove the fender liner bolts,

loose the fender liner nut and

pull down the fender liner.

Fender liner bolts

Fender liner nut

Unplug the connector while

depressing the lock release.

Turn the light bulb counterclock-

wise.

STEP

578

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Replace the light bulb.

Align the 3 tabs on the light bulb

with the mounting, and insert.

Turn and secure the light bulb.

Install the bulb base.

Shake the bulb base gently to

check that it is not loose, turn the

fog lights on once and visually

confirm that no light is leaking

through the mounting.

When installing the fender liner, conduct in reverse.

STEP

579

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Front turn signal lights

For the left side only: Remove

the securing bolt and move the

washer fluid filler opener.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

ITY43C012

STEP

580

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Back-up lights

Open the back door and remove

the nuts and lamp assembly.

Remove the cover.

Unclip the connector wire and

turn the bulb bases counter-

clockwise.

STEP

581

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

ITY43C054

STEP

582

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Rear turn signal lights

Open the back door and remove

the bolts and lamp assembly.

Use a cloth to prevent scratches.

Unclip the connector wire.

Turn the bulb bases counter-

clockwise.

STEP

583

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

584

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Rear fog lights

Remove the under cover bolt

and pull down the under cover.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

ITY43C065

STEP

585

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 License plate lights

Open the back door and remove

the license plate light unit.

Turn the bulb base counterclock-

wise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

ITY43C067

STEP

ITY43C068

STEP

586

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Running board lights

Turn the bulb bases counter-

clockwise.

Remove the light bulb.

When installing, reverse the steps listed.

STEP

587

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Replacing the following bulbs

If any of the lights listed below has burnt out, have it replaced by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

 Headlight low beam

 Front position lights

 Side turn signal lights

 High mounted stoplight

 Stop/tail lights

 Tail lights

 Discharge headlights

If voltage to the discharge bulbs is insufficient, the bulbs may not come on,

or may go out temporarily. The discharge bulbs will come on when normal

power is restored.

 Condensation build-up on the inside of the lens

Temporary condensation build-up on the inside of the headlight lens does

not indicate a malfunction. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer,

or another duly qualified and equipped professional, for more information in

the following situations:

 Large drops of water are built up on the inside of the lens.

 Water has built up inside the headlight.

 LED lights

The front position lights, side turn signal lights, high mounted stoplight, stop/

tail lights and tail lights consist of a number of LEDs. If any of the LEDs burn

out, take your vehicle to any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional to have the light replaced.

588

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Replacing light bulbs

 Turn off the headlights. Do not attempt to replace the bulb immediately

after turning off the headlights.

The bulbs become very hot and may cause burns.

 Do not touch the glass portion of the light bulb with bare hands. When it is

unavoidable to hold the glass portion, use and hold with a clean dry cloth

to avoid getting moisture and oils on the bulb.

Also, if the bulb is scratched or dropped, it may blow out or crack.

 Fully install light bulbs and any parts used to secure them. Failing to do so

may result in heat damage, fire, or water entering the headlight unit. This

may damage the headlights or cause condensation to build up on the lens.

 While the low beam headlights are

turned on, and for a short time after

they have been turned off, metal com-

ponents at the rear of the headlight

assembly will be extremely hot.

To prevent burns, do not touch these

metal components until you are certain

they have cooled down.

Metal

components

589

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

Maintenance and care

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Discharge headlights

 Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional before replacing high-intensity discharge head-

lights (including light bulbs).

 Do not touch the high-intensity discharge headlight’s high voltage socket

when the headlights are turned on.

An extremely high voltage of 30000 V will be discharged and could result

in death or serious injury by electric shock.

 Do not attempt to take apart or repair the low beam discharge headlight

bulbs, connectors, power supply circuits, or related components.

Doing so could result in electric shock and serious injury or death.

 To prevent damage or fire

Make sure bulbs are fully seated and locked.

590

4-3. Do-it-yourself maintenance

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

When trouble arises

591

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers.......... 592

If your vehicle needs to

be towed......................... 593

If you think something is

wrong.............................. 599

Fuel pump shut off system

(gasoline engine only) .... 600

5-2. Steps to take in an

emergency

If a warning light turns on

or a warning buzzer

sounds... ........................ 601

If a warning message is

displayed ........................ 607

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with a

standard spare tire) ........ 624

If you have a flat tire

(vehicles with an

emergency tire

puncture repair kit).......... 638

If the engine will not

start................................. 651

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ................. 653

If you lose your keys ......... 654

If the electronic key does

not operate properly ....... 655

If the battery is

discharged ...................... 658

If your vehicle

overheats........................ 663

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls (diesel

engine only) .................... 667

If the vehicle becomes

stuck ............................... 668

If your vehicle has to

be stopped in an

emergency...................... 670

592

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

5-1. Essential information

Emergency flashers

 Emergency flashers

If the emergency flashers are used for a long time while the engine is not

operation, the battery may discharge.

The emergency flashers are used to warn other drivers when the

vehicle has to be stopped in the road due to a breakdown, etc.

Press the switch.

All the turn signal lights will

flash.

To turn them off, press the

switch once again.

593

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If your vehicle needs to be towed

Before towing

The following may indicate a problem with your transmission. Contact

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, before towing.

 The engine is running, but the vehicle will not move.

 The vehicle makes an abnormal sound.

If towing is necessary, we recommend having your vehicle towed by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional or a commercial towing service, using a

lift-type truck or a flat bed truck.

Use a safety chain system for all towing, and abide by all state/pro-

vincial and local laws.

Use a towing dolly or flat bed truck.

594

5-1. Essential information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Emergency towing

If a tow truck is not available, in an emergency your vehicle may be

temporarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the towing

hook(s). This should only be attempted on hard, surfaced roads for

short distances at low speeds.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer and operate the brakes. The

vehicle’s wheels, drive train, axles, steering and brakes must be in

good condition.

Towing hook

 Emergency towing procedure

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must be in ACCESSORY

mode (engine off) or IGNITION ON mode (engine running).

Put the four-wheel drive control switch in “H4”. (The center differen-

tial is unlocked.)

Put the vehicle height in the “N” mode and press the height control

OFF switch to turn off the height control. (if equipped) (P. 261)

Put the shift lever in “N”.

Release the parking brake.

STEP

595

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 While towing

 Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle.

Avoid sudden starts or erratic driving maneuvers which place excessive

stress on the emergency towing hook and the cables or chains. Always be

cautious of the surroundings and other vehicles while towing.

 If the engine is not running, the power assist for the brakes and steering

will not function, making steering and braking more difficult.

NOTICE

 To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

 Never tow this vehicle with the wheels on the ground.

 Use only the front emergency towing hooks or towing eyelets when towing

your vehicle.

596

5-1. Essential information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Towing with a sling-type truck

Towing with a wheel lift-type truck

From front

Use a towing dolly under the rear

wheels.

NOTICE

 To prevent body damage

Do not tow with a sling-type truck, either from the front or rear.

597

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

From rear

Use a towing dolly under the

front wheels.

NOTICE

 To prevent causing serious damage to the transmission

Never tow this vehicle wheels on the ground.

 To prevent damaging the vehicle

 Do not tow the vehicle with the “ENGINE START STOP” switch OFF.

The steering lock mechanism is not strong enough to hold the front wheel

straight.

 When raising the vehicle, ensure adequate ground clearance for towing at

the opposite end of the raised vehicle. Without adequate clearance, the

vehicle could be damaged while being towed.

598

5-1. Essential information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Using a flat bed truck

If your Toyota is transported by a

flat bed truck, it should be tied

down at the locations shown in

the illustration. When attaching

the hooks to the rear of the vehi-

cle, make sure to attach them to

the inside of the vehicle.

If you use chains or cables to tie

down your vehicle, the angles

shaded in black must be 45.

Do not overly tighten the tie

downs or the vehicle may be

damaged.

NOTICE

 To avoid serious damage to your vehicle

Do not use the rear emergency towing

hook.

ITY51C023

599

5-1. Essential information

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If you think something is wrong

If you notice any of the following symptoms, your vehicle probably

needs adjustment or repair. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, as

soon as possible.

 Visible symptoms

 Fluid leaks under the vehicle

(Water dripping from the air conditioning after use is normal.)

 Flat-looking tires or uneven tire wear

 Engine coolant temperature gauge needle continually points

higher than normal

 Engine oil pressure gauge continually points lower than nor-

mal.

 Voltmeter continually points higher or lower than normal.

 Audible symptoms

 Changes in exhaust sound

 Excessive tire squeal when cornering

 Strange noises related to the suspension system

 Pinging or other noises related to the engine

 Operational symptoms

 Engine missing, stumbling or running rough

 Appreciable loss of power

 Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when braking

 Vehicle pulls heavily to one side when driving on a level road

 Loss of brake effectiveness, spongy feeling, pedal almost

touches the floor

600

5-1. Essential information

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Fuel pump shut off system (gasoline engine only)

Follow the procedure below to restart the engine after the system is

activated.

Turn the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to ACCESSORY mode

or OFF.

Restart the engine.

NOTICE

 Before starting the engine

Inspect the ground under the vehicle.

If you find that fuel has leaked on to the ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and is in need of repair. Do not restart the engine.

To minimize the risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls or an air-

bag inflates upon collision, the fuel pump shut off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine.

STEP

601

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

If a warning light turns on or a warning buzzer sounds...

Stop the vehicle immediately. Continuing to drive the vehicle

may be dangerous.

The following warning indicates a possible problem in the brake sys-

tem. Immediately stop the vehicle in a safe place and contact any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

*: Parking brake engaged warning buzzer:

A buzzer will sound if the vehicle is driven at a speed of approximately 5 km/h

(3 mph) or more.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Brake system warning light (warning buzzer)

• Low brake fluid

• Malfunction in the brake system

This light also comes on when the parking brake is not

released. If the light turns off after the parking brake is fully

released the system is operating normally.

Calmly perform the following actions if any of the warning lights turn

on or flash. If a light turns on or flashes, but then turns off, this does

not necessarily indicate a malfunction in the system.

However, if this continues to occur, have the vehicle inspected by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional.

602

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Stop the vehicle immediately.

The following warning indicates the possibility of damage to the vehi-

cle that may lead to an accident. Immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failing to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to

the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional, immedi-

ately.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Charging system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the vehicle’s charging system.

Warning light Warning light/Details

Malfunction indicator lamp

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The emission control system;

• The electronic engine control system;

• The electronic throttle control system; or

• The electronic automatic transmission control system.

SRS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The SRS airbag system; or

• The seat belt pretensioner system.

ABS warning light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• The Multi Terrain ABS; or

• The brake assist system.

603

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

(Comes on or

flashes)

Pre-crash safety system warning light (if equipped)

Indicates:

Malfunction in the pre-collision system if the light comes

on.

The system cannot temporarily be used if the light flashes.

(P. 616)

Slip indicator light

Indicates a malfunction in:

• Vehicle stability control;

• Trailer Sway Control;

• Active Traction Control;

• The hill-start assist control system;

• Crawl Control system; or

• Multi-terrain Select.

(If equipped)

Power steering system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the variable flow control power

steering system

Automatic headlight leveling system warning light

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic headlight leveling

system

Warning light Warning light/Details

604

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning light turns off.

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

Open door warning light

(warning buzzer)

Indicates that a door is not

fully closed.

Check that all doors are

closed.

Low fuel level warning

light

Indicates that remaining

fuel is about 15.0 L (4.0

gal., 3.3 Imp.gal.) or less

Refuel the vehicle.

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light

(warning buzzer)

Warns the driver to fasten

his/her seat belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

(On the center

panel without

navigation sys-

tem)

(On the center

panel with nav-

igation sys-

tem)

Front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

(warning buzzer)

Warns the front passen-

ger to fasten his/her seat

belt.

Fasten the seat belt.

605

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

:Open door warning buzzer:

The open door warning buzzer sounds to alert one or more of the doors is

not fully closed (with the vehicle having reached a speed of 5 km/h [3 mph]).

:Driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt reminders:

The driver’s and front passenger’s seat belts reminder sounds to alert the

driver and front passenger that his/her seat belt is not fastened. The buzzer

sounds for 30 seconds after the vehicle has reached a speed of at least 20

km/h (12 mph). Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened, the buzzer will sound

in a different tone for 90 more seconds.

Unengaged “Park” warn-

ing light

Indicates that the trans-

mission “Park” mecha-

nism is not engaged.

Shift four-wheel drive con-

trol to “H4” or “L4”.

(P. 272)

Master warning light

A buzzer sounds and the

warning light comes on or

flashes to indicate that the

master warning system

has detected a malfunc-

tion.

P. 607

Warning light Warning light/Details Correction procedure

606

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 If the malfunction indicator lamp comes on while driving

For some models, the malfunction indicator lamp will come on if the fuel tank

becomes completely empty. If the fuel tank is empty, refuel the vehicle

immediately. The malfunction indicator lamp will go off after several trips.

If the malfunction indicator lamp does not go off, contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

 If the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center differen-

tial lock indicator light blinks

Take the specified steps. (P. 275)

If the brake system warning light or the malfunction indicator light also

comes on, or the low speed four-wheel drive indicator light or the center dif-

ferential lock indicator light continues to blink after taking the specified steps,

there may be a malfunction in the engine, the brake system or the four-

wheel drive system. In this case, you may not be able to transfer between

“H4” and “L4” modes, and the center differential lock may not be able to be

locked or unlocked. Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional,

immediately.

 Front passenger detection sensor and passenger seat belt reminder

 If luggage is placed on the front passenger seat, the front passenger

detection sensor may cause the warning light to flash, even if a passen-

ger is not sitting in the seat.

 If a cushion is placed on the seat, the sensor may not detect a passen-

ger, and the warning light may not operate properly.

607

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If a warning message is displayed

The multi-information display shows warnings of system malfunc-

tions, incorrectly performed operations, or shows messages that

indicate a need for maintenance.

If a warning is shown on the multi-information display, stay calm and

perform the following actions:

Master warning light

The master warning light also

comes on or flashes in order to

indicate that a message is cur-

rently being displayed on the

multi-information display.

Multi-information display

If any of the warning messages is shown again after its correction

procedure has been performed, contact any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional.

608

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Have the vehicle inspected immediately.

Failure to investigate the cause of the following warnings may lead to

the system operating abnormally and possibly cause an accident.

Have the vehicle inspected by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional immedi-

ately.

Warning message Details

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the automatic

transmission system

A buzzer also sounds.

Indicates a malfunction in the steering lock

system

A buzzer also sounds.

609

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the pre-crash safety

system

A buzzer also sounds.

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the parking assist-

sensor

The site of malfunction is shown flashing on the

display.

Indicates a malfunction in the cruise control

system

Press the “ON-OFF” button once to deactivate

the system, and then press the button again to

reactivate the system.

Warning message Details

610

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

(Diesel engine)

Indicates a malfunction in the fuel system

(Diesel engine)

Indicates a malfunction in the Diesel Particu-

late Filter system

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the VGRS

A buzzer also sounds.

Warning message Details

611

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the 4-wheel AHC

system

A buzzer also sounds.

(If equipped)

Indicates a malfunction in the Automatic High

Beam

A buzzer also sounds.

Warning message Details

612

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Follow the correction procedures.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning message goes off.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

Indicates that one or

more of the doors is

not fully closed

The system also indi-

cates which doors are

not fully closed.

If the vehicle reaches

a speed of 5 km/h (3

mph), flashes

and a buzzer sounds

to indicate that the

door(s) are not yet fully

closed.

Make sure that all the

doors are closed.

613

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the

moon roof is not fully

closed (with the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch off, and

the driver’s door

open)

Close the moon roof.

(Flashes)

Indicates, if the vehi-

cle reaches a speed of

5 km/h (3 mph), that

the parking brake is

still engaged.

Release the parking

brake.

(If equipped)

Indicates that the

automatic transmis-

sion fluid temperature

is too high

A buzzer also sounds.

Stop the vehicle in a

safe place, shift the

shift lever to “P” and

wait until the light

goes off.

If the light goes off,

you may start the vehi-

cle again. If the light

does not go off, con-

tact any authorized

Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another

duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

614

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Indicates that engine

oil level is low

A buzzer also sounds.

Check the level of

engine oil, and add if

necessary.

This message may

appear if the vehicle is

stopped on a slope.

Move the vehicle to a

level surface and

check to see if the

message disappears.

(Diesel engine)

Indicates that the

amount of accumu-

lated water in the fuel

filter has reached the

specified level

Drain the water from the

fuel filter. (P. 538)

Indicates that the

washer fluid level is

low

Add washer fluid

Warning message Details Correction procedure

615

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

(Diesel engine*)

Indicates that the

engine oil is sched-

uled to be changed

Comes on approxi-

mately 27000 km

(17000 miles) after the

engine oil is changed.

(The indicator will not

work properly unless

the oil maintenance

data has been reset.)

Check the engine oil

and change if neces-

sary. After changing the

engine oil, the oil

change system should

be reset. (P. 528)

(Diesel engine

Indicates that the

engine oil and oil fil-

ter should be changed

Comes on approxi-

mately 30000 km

(19000 miles) after the

engine oil is changed

(and the oil mainte-

nance data has been

reset)

Have the engine oil and

oil filter checked and/or

changed by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped

professional. After

changing the engine oil,

the oil change system

should be reset.

(P. 528)

Indicates that remain-

ing fuel is about 15.0 L

(4.0 gal., 3.3 Imp.gal.)

or less

Refuel the vehicle.

Warning message Details Correction procedure

616

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

*: Except for Russia, Ukraine, Azerbaijan, Georgia, Armenia, Belarus

(Flashes)

(If equipped)

Indicates that the pre-

crash safety system is

not currently func-

tional due to overheat-

ing.

The system will

become functional

once the system cools

down.

(If equipped)

Indicates that parking

assist-sensor is dirty

or covered with ice

A buzzer also sounds.

Clean the sensor.

(Diesel engine)

Indicates the amount

of accumulated

deposit in the DPF cat-

alytic converter has

reached the specified

level

Regenerate the DPF.

(P. 324)

Warning message Details Correction procedure

617

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Have the malfunction repaired immediately.

After taking the specified steps to correct the suspected problem,

check that the warning message and light go off.

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details

Correction

procedure

Once

3 times

(Flashes)

The electronic key

was carried out-

side the vehicle

and a door other

than the driver’s

door was opened

and closed while

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch was in a

mode other than

off.

Bring the

electronic

key back

into the

vehicle.

The driver’s door

was opened and

closed while the

electronic key was

not in the vehicle,

the shift lever was

in “P” and the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch was

not turned off.

Turn the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch off

or bring the

electronic

key back

into the

vehicle.

618

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

*: If the engine does not start when the electronic key is inside the vehicle, the

electronic key battery may be depleted or there may be difficulty receiving

signal from the key. (P. 655)

Once



(Flashes)

An attempt was

made to start the

engine without the

electronic key

being present, or

the electronic key

was not function-

ing normally.

An attempt was

made to drive

when the regular

key was not inside

the vehicle.

Start the

engine with

the elec-

tronic key

present

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details

Correction

procedure

619

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details

Correction

procedure

Contin-

uous



(Flashes)

The driver’s door

was opened when

the shift lever was

not in “P” and the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch was

not turned off.

Shift the

shift lever

to “P”.

Contin-

uous

Contin-

uous

(Displayed alternately)

(Flashes)

The driver’s door

was opened and

closed while the

electronic key was

not in the vehicle,

the shift lever was

not in “P” and the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch was

not turned off.

• Shift the

shift lever

to “P”.

• Bring the

electronic

key back

into the

vehicle.

620

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details

Correction

procedure

Once



(Flashes)

• When the doors

were unlocked with

the mechanical

key and then the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch was

pressed, the elec-

tronic key could

not be detected in

the vehicle.

• The electronic key

could not be

detected in the

vehicle even after

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch was

pressed two con-

secutive times.

Touch the

electronic

key to the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depressing

the brake

pedal.

Once



The electronic key

has a low battery.

Replace

the elec-

tronic key

battery.

(P. 549)

621

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Interior

buzzer

Exterior

buzzer

Warning message Details

Correction

procedure

Once



(Flashes)

A door was

opened and closed

with the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch turned off

and then the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch was

put in ACCES-

SORY mode twice

without the engine

being started.

Press the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depressing

the brake

pedal.

Once



(Flashes)

The steering lock

could not be

released within 3

seconds of the

“ENGINE START

STOP” switch

being pressed.

Press the

“ENGINE

START

STOP”

switch

while

depressing

the brake

pedal and

moving the

steering

wheel left

and right.

622

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Other messages

If the following message is displayed, take appropriate action and

confirm that the message has disappeared. (P. 277)

Message Correction procedure

Select the four-wheel drive control switch in L4

and shift the shift lever to “D” or “R”.

Confirm the operating conditions.

Confirm the operating conditions to operate

Turn Assist function.

Turn on the Crawl Control switch to operate

Turn Assist function.

623

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 After changing the engine oil (Diesel engine*)

Make sure to reset the oil maintenance data. (P. 528)

*: Except for Russia, Ukraine, Azerbaijan, Georgia, Armenia, Belarus

NOTICE

 While the engine oil level warning is displayed

Continued engine operation with low engine oil will damage the engine.

 Engine oil maintenance message (Diesel engine only

The warning message is based on the projected driving range after engine

oil maintenance message is reset.

The system does not monitor the purity of the engine oil.

*: Except for Russia, Ukraine, Azerbaijan, Georgia, Armenia, Belarus

 If the “DRAIN WATER FROM FUEL FILTER” warning message is dis-

played

Never drive the vehicle if the warning message is displayed. Continued driv-

ing with water accumulated in the fuel filter will damage the fuel injection

pump.

624

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with a standard spare tire)



: If equipped

Remove the flat tire and replace it with the spare provided.

 Before jacking up the vehicle

 Stop the vehicle on a hard, flat surface.

 Set the parking brake.

 Shift the shift lever to “P”.

 Turn off the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor (if equipped)

(P. 136)

 Turn off the 4-Wheel AHC (if equipped). (P. 261)

 Stop the engine.

 Turn on the emergency flashers.

 Location of the spare tire, jack and tools

Jack

Tool box

Spare tire

625

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Taking out the jack

Remove the cover.

Unhook the rubber band and

take out the jack.

Loosen

Tighten

Loosen and remove the jack.

STEP

626

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Taking out the tool box

Remove the cover.

Take out the tool box.

STEP

627

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Taking out the spare tire

Assembling the jack handle.

Remove the jack handle and the jack extension bar from the tool box

and assemble by following these steps.

Loosen the screw using a

screwdriver.

Assemble the jack handle and

the jack handle extension bar

and tighten the screw.

Check that the screw is firmly

tightened.

Open the cover.

STEP

628

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Insert the jack handle extension

into the lowering screw.

Lower

Raise

Place a rag under the jack handle

extension to protect the back

door.

Lower the spare tire completely

to the ground.

Pull out the spare tire and

remove the holding bracket.

STEP

629

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Replacing a flat tire

Chock the tires.

Pry off the wheel ornament,

using the beveled end of the

wheel ornament remover as

shown.

Slightly loosen the wheel nuts

(one turn).

STEP

Flat tire Wheel chock positions

Front

Left-hand side Behind the rear right-hand side tire

Right-hand side Behind the rear left-hand side tire

Rear

Left-hand side In front of the front right-hand side tire

Right-hand side In front of the front left-hand side tire

STEP

630

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Assembling the jack handle.

Remove the jack handle, jack extension bar and jack handle bar

from the tool box and assemble by following these steps.

Loosen the bolts and the

screw using either the jack

handle or a screwdriver.

Assemble the jack handle

extension bar and the jack

handle bar and tighten the

bolts.

Check that the bolts are firmly

tightened.

Assemble the jack handle

extension bar and the jack

handle and tighten the screw.

Check that the screw is firmly

tightened.

STEP

631

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Position the jack at the jack

points as shown.

Front - Under the chassis frame

side rail

Rear - Under the rear axle hous-

ing

Raise the vehicle until the tire is

slightly raised off the ground.

Remove all the wheel nuts and

the tire.

When resting the tire on the

ground, place the tire so that the

wheel design faces up to avoid

scratching the wheel surface.

STEP

632

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Installing the spare tire

Remove any dirt or foreign mat-

ter from the wheel contact sur-

face.

If foreign matter is on the wheel

contact surface, the wheel nuts

may loosen while the vehicle is in

motion, and the tire may come off

the vehicle.

Install the spare tire and loosely

tighten each nut by hand to

approximately the same amount.

Turn the nut washers until they

come into contact with the disc

wheel.

Lower the vehicle.

STEP

Washer

Disc wheel

STEP

633

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Firmly tighten each nut two or

three times in the order shown in

the illustration.

Tightening torque:

131 N•m (13.4 kgf•m, 97 ft•lbf)

Reinstall the wheel ornament.

Stowing the flat/spare tire, jack and tools

Lay down the tire with the outer

side facing up, and install the

holding bracket.

Raise the tire.

Vehicles with kinetic dynamic suspension: Pull the tire

towards the rear of the vehicle when raising. After raising,

visually check that the tire is not interfering with suspension

components.

Stow the tools and jack securely, and replace all covers.

STEP

634

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Certification for the jack

635

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Using the tire jack

Improper use of the tire jack may lead to death or serious injuries due to the

vehicle suddenly falling off the jack.

 Do not use the tire jack for any purpose other than replacing tires or install-

ing and removing tire chains.

 Only use the tire jack that comes with this vehicle for replacing a flat tire.

Do not use it on other vehicles, and do not use other tire jacks for replac-

ing tires on this vehicle.

 Always check that the tire jack is securely set to the jack point.

 Be sure to turn off the 4-Wheel AHC and stop the engine. (Vehicles with 4-

Wheel AHC)

 Do not put any part of your body under the vehicle supported by a jack.

 Do not start or run the engine while your vehicle is supported by the jack.

 Do not raise the vehicle while someone is in it.

 When raising the vehicle, do not put an object on or under the jack.

 Do not raise the vehicle to a height greater than that required to replace

the tire.

 Use a jack stand if it is necessary to get under the vehicle.

Take particular care when lowering the vehicle to ensure that no one working

on or near the vehicle will be injured.

 Using the jack handle

Tighten all the jack handle bolts securely using a Phillips-head screwdriver,

to prevent the extension parts from coming apart unexpectedly.

636

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Replacing a flat tire

 Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in serious injury:

• Lower the spare tire completely to the ground before removing it from

under the vehicle.

• Do not try to remove the wheel ornament by hand. Take due care in

handling the ornament to avoid unexpected personal injury.

• Do not touch the disc wheels or the area around the brakes immedi-

ately after the vehicle has been driven.

After the vehicle has been driven the disc wheels and the area around

the brakes will be extremely hot. Touching these areas with hands, feet

or other body parts while changing a tire, etc. may result in burns.

• Vehicles with the 4-Wheel AHC: Turn off the vehicle height control.

The vehicle height may change due to the automatic leveling function

and you may catch part of your body in the vehicle, resulting in an acci-

dent. (P. 261)

 Failure to follow these precautions could cause the wheel nuts to loosen

and the tire to fall off, resulting in death or serious injury.

• Have the wheel nuts tightened with a torque wrench to 131 N•m (13.4

kgf•m, 97 ft•lbf) as soon as possible after changing wheels.

• When installing a tire, only use wheel nuts that have been specifically

designed for that wheel.

• If there are any cracks or deformations in the bolt screws, nut threads

or bolt holes of the wheel, have the vehicle inspected by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional.

• Do not attach a heavily damaged wheel ornament, as it may fly off the

wheel while the vehicle is moving.

• When installing the wheel nuts, be sure to install them with the tapered

ends facing inward. (P. 545)

637

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Replacing a flat tire for vehicles with power back door

In cases such as when replacing tires, make sure to turn off the power back

door main switch (P. 69). Failure to do so may cause the back door to

operate unintentionally if the power back door switch is accidentally touched,

resulting in hands and fingers being caught and injured.

NOTICE

 Do not drive the vehicle with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair.

 When stowing the flat tire

Ensure that there is no object caught between the tire and the vehicle under-

body.

638

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If you have a flat tire (vehicles with an emergency tire puncture repair kit)



: If equipped

Your vehicle is equipped with an emergency tire puncture repair kit.

A puncture caused by a nail or screw passing through the tire tread

can be repaired temporarily with the emergency tire puncture repair

kit.

 Before repairing the vehicle

 Stop the vehicle in a safe place on a hard, flat surface.

 Set the parking brake.

 Shift the shift lever to “P”.

 Turn off the intrusion sensor and tilt sensor (if equipped)

(P. 136)

 Turn off the 4-Wheel AHC (if equipped). (P. 261)

 Stop the engine.

 Turn on the emergency flashers.

639

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Location of the emergency tire puncture repair kit, jack and

tools

*: Use of the jack (P. 629)

 Contents

Tool box

Emergency tire

puncture repair kit

Jack

Sealant

Injection

hose

Valve

core tool

Valve core

(spare)

Compressor

Stickers

640

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Before putting the sealant into use

Check the degree of the tire damage before making use of the seal-

ant in the emergency tire puncture repair kit.

A tire should only to be repaired

if the damage is caused by a nail

or screw passing through the tire

tread. Perform the repair with the

nail or screw that has punctured

the tire positioned at the bottom,

in contact with the ground.

Emergency repair with the sealant in the kit is not possible in the fol-

lowing cases. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 When the wheel is damaged

 When two or more tires have been punctured

 When the tire is damaged due to driving without sufficient tire infla-

tion pressure

 When the tire is visibly disengaged from the wheel

 When the tire has lost tire inflation pressure due to a crack or dam-

age in the tire sidewall

 When the cut or damage to the tread is 4 mm (0.16 in.) or more

641

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Emergency repair method

Position the nail or screw that

has punctured the tire at the bot-

tom, in contact with the ground.

Remove the cap from the valve.

Bring the protruding part of the

valve core tool into contact with

the valve to discharge air.

Pull out the valve core by turning

it counterclockwise using the

valve core tool.

Shake the sealant bottle up and down several times.

Remove the cap of the sealant bottle.

STEP

Cap

Valve

STEP

Valve core

tool

Protruding part

Valve

STEP

Valve core

STEP

642

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Connect the injection hose by

screwing onto the sealant. As it

is screwed in, the aluminum seal

on the bottle will be torn.

Remove the plug from the injec-

tion hose.

Connect the injection hose to the

valve.

STEP

Injection

hose

Sealant

STEP

Injection

hose

Plug

STEP

Valve

Injection

hose

643

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Inject the sealant that is in the

bottle. Hold and tilt the bottle,

then squeeze sealant out of the

bottle as shown.

Use two bottles of the sealant.

Attach the sticker as shown.

Remove the injection hose from

the valve and screw the valve

core in the valve securely by

turning it clockwise with the

valve core tool.

STEP

Valve

core tool

Valve core

644

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Connect the air compressor

hose by threading it on the valve.

Connect the compressor power plug.

The “ENGINE START STOP” switch must be in ACCESSORY

mode.

Instrument panel

Open the cover and connect the

power plug.

Rear console box

STEP

Compressor

Hose

STEP

Power plug

Power outlet

Power plug

Power outlet

645

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Check the specified inflation pressure.

The label is placed as shown in the illustration.

Left-hand drive vehicles

Right-hand drive vehicles

Turn the compressor switch “ON”

and fill the tire with air until the

specified inflation pressure is

reached.

STEP

Switch

646

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Turn the switch “OFF” when the pressure gauge connected to

the hose reads the specified pressure.

If the inflation pressure is not attained within 5 minutes, emergency

repair is not possible due to severe damage. Contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

After completely filling the tire with air, disconnect the hose

from the valve on the tire.

Pull the power plug of the compressor out of the power outlet

on the vehicle.

To spread the liquid sealant evenly in the tire, immediately

drive for about 5 km (3 miles) or 10 minutes.

After driving about 5 km (3 miles)

or 10 minutes, pull your vehicle

over in a safe place and recon-

nect the compressor.

Read the inflation pressure on

the pressure gauge.

STEP

647

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If the pressure is 130 kPa (1.3

kgf/cm

or bar, 18 psi) or above,

fill the tire with air using the com-

pressor until the specified infla-

tion pressure is reached.

If the pressure is less than 130

kPa (1.3 kgf/cm

or bar, 18 psi),

the emergency repair that has

been performed is not safe for

use as damage to the tire is too

severe. Do not continue to drive

the vehicle. Contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Store the kit and then attach the

sticker as shown.

Taking precautions to avoid sud-

den braking and sharp turns,

drive carefully at under 80 km/h

(50 mph) to the nearest autho-

rized Toyota dealer, tire dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional for tire

repair or replacement.

STEP

648

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Sealant

 One tire can be repaired using two bottles of sealant stored in the emer-

gency tire puncture repair kit.

 The sealant can be used when the outside temperature is from -30°C

(-22°F) to 60°C (140°F).

 The sealant has a limited lifespan. The expiry date is marked on the bot-

tle. The sealant should be replaced before the expiry date. Contact any

authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

 If the sealant gets on your clothes, it may stain.

 After using the sealant, bring the empty bottles of sealant to any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped

professional and purchase a new bottle. Keep the new bottles of sealant

in your vehicle.

 Compressor

 The compressor is a pneumatic filling type for passenger vehicles.

 When the compressor is operating, a loud operating noise will be pro-

duced.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

 The wheel of a tire that has been repaired

If you remove the sealant adhering to the wheel with a rag, you can reuse

the wheel. However, in the case of the valve, replace it with a new one.

649

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Precaution for children

Keep the emergency tire puncture repair kit out of the reach of children and

store it properly.

 Sealant precautions

 The sealant in the emergency tire puncture repair kit is not for human con-

sumption.

If the sealant is consumed inadvertently, drink a large quantity of water

and get medical attention immediately.

 If sealant gets in your eyes or on your skin, thoroughly wash with a large

quantity of water. If necessary, get medical attention.

 When fixing the flat tire

 Stop your vehicle in a safe and flat area.

 If force is used to turn the valve core tool while air remains in the tire, spe-

cial care should be taken because the valve core could fly out.

 Be careful, as sealant may fly out if you shake the bottle with the hose

installed.

 If the hose is not securely installed, sealant may leak out when filling.

 Connect the valve and hose securely with the tire installed on the vehicle.

 Be careful handling the compressor, as parts of the compressor get hot

during operation. Some parts of the compressor may remain hot after use.

 Driving to spread the liquid sealant evenly

Drive your vehicle with due care. Be especially careful when turning and cor-

nering.

650

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Vehicles with a flat tire

Do not continue driving with a flat tire.

Driving even a short distance with a flat tire can damage the tire and the

wheel beyond repair.

 When performing an emergency repair

Perform the emergency repair without removing the nail or screw that has

punctured the tread of the tire. If the object that has punctured the tire is

removed, the repair using the sealant in the emergency tire puncture repair

kit may fail.

 When fixing the flat tire

 Do not put the valve core on dirty ground or in the sand.

Store it in a clean place.

 Do not remove the inside cap of the sealant bottle.

 Turn the valve core tool with your hand when screwing it in. If you use

another tool in conjunction with the valve core tool, damage may occur.

 Do not operate the compressor continuously for more than 10 minutes.

The motor may overheat and be damaged. Let the compressor cool before

using it again.

 Compressor precautions

 The compressor power source should be 12 V DC suitable for vehicle use.

Do not connect the compressor to 24 V DC or any other power source.

 The compressor is an oil-less type. Do not lubricate with oil.

651

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If the engine will not start

If the engine still does not start after following the correct starting

procedure (P. 194) or releasing the steering lock (P. 196), confirm

the following points.

 The engine will not start even when the starter motor oper-

ates normally

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

 There may not be sufficient fuel in the vehicle’s tank.

Gasoline engine: Refuel the vehicle.

Diesel engine: (P. 667)

 The engine may be flooded. (gasoline engine)

Try to restart the engine once more following correct starting

procedures. (P. 194)

 There may be a malfunction in the engine immobilizer system.

(P. 127)

 The starter motor turns over slowly, the interior lights and

headlights are dim, or the horn does not sound or sounds at

a low volume

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

 The battery may be discharged. (P. 658)

 The battery terminal connections may be loose or corroded.

 The starter motor does not turn over

The engine starting system may be malfunctioning due to an

electrical problem such as an open circuit or a blown fuse. How-

ever, an interim measure is available to start the engine.

(P. 652)

652

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Emergency start function

When the engine does not start, the following steps can be used as

an interim measure to start the engine if the “ENGINE START STOP”

switch is functioning normally.

Set the parking brake.

Put the shift lever in “P”.

Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCESSORY

mode.

Push and hold the “ENGINE START STOP” switch about 15

seconds while depressing the brake pedal firmly.

Even if the engine can be started using the above steps, the system

may be malfunctioning. Have the vehicle checked by any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duty qualified and equipped pro-

fessional.

 The starter motor does not turn over, the interior lights and

headlights do not turn on, or the horn does not sound

One of the following may be the cause of the problem.

 One or both of the battery terminals may be disconnected.

 The battery may be discharged. (P. 658)

 There may be a malfunction in the steering lock system.

Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional, if the problem cannot be

repaired, or if repair procedures are unknown.

STEP

653

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If the shift lever cannot be shifted from P

If the shift lever cannot be shifted with your foot on the brake, there

may be a problem with the shift lock system (a system to prevent

accidental operation of the shift lever). Have the vehicle inspected by

any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified

and equipped professional, immediately.

The following steps may be used as an emergency measure to

ensure that the shift lever can be shifted.

Set the parking brake.

Set the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to the ACCES-

SORY mode.

Depress the brake pedal.

Press the “SHIFT LOCK” but-

ton.

The shift lever can be shifted

while the button is pressed.

STEP

654

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If you lose your keys

New genuine Toyota keys can be made by any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional, using the other key and the key number stamped on your key

number plate.

655

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If the electronic key does not operate properly

Locking and unlocking the doors and key linked functions

Using the mechanical key

(P. 38) in order to perform the

following operations.

Locks all doors

Closes the windows/moon

roof

(turn and hold)*

Unlocks all doors

An alarm*

will sound if the alarm

is set. (P. 134)

Opens the windows/moon

roof

(turn and hold)*

: If equipped

: This setting must be customized

at any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional.

If communication between the electronic key and vehicle is inter-

rupted (P. 44) or the electronic key cannot be used because the

battery is depleted, the smart entry & start system and wireless

remote control cannot be used. In such cases, the doors can be

opened or the engine can be started by following the procedure

below.

656

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Starting the engine

Shift the shift lever to “P” and apply the brakes.

Touch the Toyota emblem side of

the electronic key to the

“ENGINE START STOP” switch.

An alarm will sound to indicate

that the start function cannot

detect the electronic key that is

touched to the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch if any of the doors

is opened and closed while the

key is touched to the switch.

Press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch within 10 seconds

after the buzzer sounds, keeping the brake pedal depressed.

In the event that the “ENGINE START STOP” switch still cannot be

operated, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

STEP

657

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Stopping the engine

Shift the shift lever to “P” and press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch as

you normally do when stopping the engine.

 Replacing the key battery

As this above procedure is a temporary measure, it is recommended that the

electronic key battery be replaced immediately when the battery depletes.

(P. 549)

 Alarm (if equipped)

Using the mechanical key to lock the doors will not set the alarm system.

If a door is unlocked using the mechanical key when the alarm system is set,

the alarm may be triggered. (P. 134)

 Changing “ENGINE START STOP” switch modes

Within 10 seconds of the buzzer sounding, release the brake pedal and

press the “ENGINE START STOP” switch. Modes can be changed each

time the switch is pressed. (P. 195)

658

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If the battery is discharged

The following procedures may be used to start the engine if the vehi-

cle’s battery is discharged.

You can also call any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

If you have a set of jumper (or booster) cables and a second vehi-

cle with a 12-volt battery, you can jump start your Toyota following

the steps below.

Connect the jumper cables.

Gasoline engine

Diesel engine

STEP

659

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Positive (+) battery terminal on your vehicle

Positive (+) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Negative (-) battery terminal on the second vehicle

Connect the jumper cable to ground on your vehicle as shown in

the illustration.

Start the engine of the second vehicle. Increase the engine

speed slightly and maintain at that level for approximately 5

minutes to recharge the battery of your vehicle.

Open and close any of the doors with the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch off.

Maintain the engine speed of the second vehicle and turn

the “ENGINE START STOP” switch to IGNITION ON mode,

then start the vehicle’s engine.

Once the vehicle’s engine has started, remove the jumper

cables in the exact reverse order in which they were con-

nected.

Once the engine starts, have the vehicle checked at any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional, as soon as possible.

STEP

660

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Starting the engine when the battery is discharged

The engine cannot be started by push-starting.

 Avoiding a discharged battery

 Turn off the headlights and the audio system while the engine is off.

 Turn off any unnecessary electrical components when the vehicle is run-

ning at a low speed for an extended period, such as in heavy traffic, etc.

 Charging the battery

The electricity stored in the battery will discharge gradually even when the

vehicle is not in use, due to natural discharge and the draining effects of cer-

tain electrical appliances. If the vehicle is left for a long time, the battery may

discharge, and the engine may be unable to start. (The battery recharges

automatically during driving.)

 When the battery is removed or discharged

 The power back door must be initialized. (P. 73)

 Make sure the key is not inside the vehicle when recharging or replacing

the battery. The key may be locked in the vehicle if the alarm is activated.

(P. 137)

661

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 Avoiding battery fires or explosions

Observe the following precautions to prevent accidentally igniting the flam-

mable gas that may be emitted from the battery.

 Make sure the jumper cable is connected to the correct terminal and that it

is not unintentionally in contact with any part other than the intended termi-

nal.

 Do not allow the jumper cables to come into contact with the “+” and “-” ter-

minals.

 Do not allow open flame or use matches, cigarette lighters or smoke near

the battery.

 Battery precautions

The battery contains poisonous and corrosive acidic electrolyte, while

related parts contain lead and lead compounds. Observe the following pre-

cautions when handling the battery.

 When working with the battery, always wear safety glasses and take care

not to allow any battery fluids (acid) to come into contact with skin, clothing

or the vehicle body.

 Do not lean over the battery.

 In the event that battery fluid comes into contact with the skin or eyes,

immediately wash the affected area with water and seek medical attention.

Place a wet sponge or cloth over the affected area until medical attention

can be received.

 Always wash your hands after handling the battery support, terminals, and

other battery-related parts.

 Do not allow children near the battery.

662

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 When handling jumper cables

Be careful that the jumper cables do not become tangled in the cooling fan

or any of the belts when connecting or disconnecting them.

663

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If your vehicle overheats

Correction procedures

Stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the air condition-

ing system, and then stop the engine.

If you see steam:

Carefully lift the hood after the steam subsides.

If you do not see steam:

Carefully lift the hood.

After the engine has cooled

down sufficiently, inspect the

hoses and radiator core (radia-

tor) for any leaks.

Radiator

Cooling fans

If a large amount of coolant leaks,

immediately contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

The following may indicate that your vehicle is overheating.

 The needle of the engine coolant temperature gauge (P. 208)

enters the red zone or a loss of engine power is experienced.

(For example, the vehicle speed does not increase.)

 Steam comes out from under the hood.

STEP

664

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

The coolant level is satisfactory if

it is between the “FULL” or “F”

and “LOW” or “L” lines on the

reservoir. (P. 530)

Reservoir

“FULL” or “F”

“LOW” or “L”

Radiator cap (gasoline engine

only)

Gasoline engine

Add coolant if necessary.

(P. 524)

Water can be used in an emer-

gency if coolant is unavailable.

Diesel engine

Add coolant if necessary.

(P. 524)

Water can be used in an emer-

gency if coolant is unavailable.

STEP

665

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Start the engine and turn the air conditioning system on to

check that the radiator cooling fans operate and to check for

coolant leaks from the radiator or hoses.

The fans operate when the air conditioning system is turned on

immediately after a cold start. Confirm that the fans are operating by

checking the fan sound and air flow. If it is difficult to check these,

turn the air conditioning system on and off repeatedly.

(The fans may not operate in freezing temperatures.)

If the fans are not operating:

Stop the engine immediately and contact any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

If the fans are operating:

Have the vehicle inspected at the nearest authorized Toy-

ota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

STEP

666

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 To prevent an accident or injury when inspecting under the hood of

your vehicle

 If steam is seen coming from under the hood, do not open the hood until

the steam has subsided. The engine compartment may be very hot, caus-

ing serious injury such as burns.

 Keep hands and clothing (especially a tie, a scarf or a muffler) away from

the fans and belts. Failure to do so may cause the hands or clothing to be

caught, resulting in serious injury.

 Do not loosen the radiator cap or the coolant reservoir cap while the

engine and radiator are hot.

Serious injury, such as burns, may result from hot coolant and steam

released under pressure.

NOTICE

 When adding engine coolant

Wait until the engine has cooled down before adding engine coolant.

When adding coolant, do so slowly. Adding cool coolant to a hot engine too

quickly can cause damage to the engine.

 To prevent damage to the cooling system

Observe the following precautions:

 Avoid contaminating the coolant with foreign matter (such as sand or dust

etc.).

 Do not use any coolant additives.

667

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls (diesel engine only)

NOTICE

 When restarting the engine

Do not crank the engine before refueling and operating the priming pump.

This may damage the engine and fuel system.

If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls:

Refuel your vehicle.

Operate the priming pump

until you feel more resistance

to bleed the fuel system.

Start the engine. (

P. 194)

If the engine does not start after the above steps have been per-

formed, wait for 10 seconds and try step 2 and 3 again. If the

engine still does not start, contact any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

After starting the engine, depress the accelerator pedal lightly until

the engine runs smoothly.

STEP

668

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If the vehicle becomes stuck

 When it is difficult to free the vehicle

 Extra high mode (vehicles with 4-Wheel AHC & AVS)

P. 265

Carry out the following procedures if the tires spin or the vehicle

becomes stuck in mud, dirt, or snow.

Stop the engine. Set the parking brake and put the shift

lever to “P”.

Remove the mud, snow or sand from around the rear

wheels.

Place wood, stones or some other material under the rear

wheels to help provide traction.

Restart the engine.

Shift the shift lever to the “D” or “R” position and release the

parking brake. Then, while exercising caution, depress the

accelerator pedal.

STEP

Press to turn off Active TRC.

669

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 When attempting to free a stuck vehicle

If you choose to push the vehicle back and forth to free it, make sure the sur-

rounding area is clear, to avoid striking other vehicles, objects or people. The

vehicle may also lunge forward or lunge back suddenly as it becomes free.

Use extreme caution.

 When shifting the shift lever

Be careful not to shift the shift lever with the accelerator pedal depressed.

This may lead to unexpected rapid acceleration of the vehicle that may

cause an accident resulting in death or serious injury.

NOTICE

 To avoid damage to the transmission and other components

 Avoid spinning the rear wheels and depressing the accelerator pedal more

than necessary.

 If the vehicle remains stuck even after these procedures are performed,

the vehicle may require towing to be freed.

670

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

If your vehicle has to be stopped in an emergency

Only in an emergency, such as if it becomes impossible to stop the

vehicle in the normal way, stop the vehicle using the following pro-

cedure:

Steadily step on the brake pedal with both feet and firmly

depress it.

Do not pump the brake pedal repeatedly as this will increase the

effort required to slow the vehicle.

Shift the shift lever to “N”.

If the shift lever is shifted to “N”

After slowing down, stop the vehicle in a safe place by the

road.

Stop the engine.

If the shift lever cannot be shifted to “N”

Keep depressing the brake pedal with both feet to reduce

vehicle speed as much as possible.

To stop the engine, press and

hold the “ENGINE START

STOP” switch for 2 consecu-

tive seconds or more, or press

it briefly 3 times or more in

succession.

Stop the vehicle in a safe place by the road.

STEP

Press and hold for 2 seconds or

more, or press briefly 3 times or more

STEP

671

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

When trouble arises

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

CAUTION

 If the engine has to be turned off while driving

Power assist for the brakes and steering wheel will be lost, making the brake

pedal harder to depress and the steering wheel heavier to turn. Decelerate

as much as possible before turning off the engine.

672

5-2. Steps to take in an emergency

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Vehicle specifications

673

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data

(fuel, oil level, etc.).......... 674

Fuel information ................ 692

6-2. Customization

Customizable features ...... 695

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize ............... 704

674

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

6-1. Specifications

Maintenance data (fuel, oil level, etc.)

Dimensions and weights

: Unladen vehicles

: Vehicles with 4-Wheel AHC

: Vehicles without 4-Wheel AHC

Overall length 4950 mm (194.9 in.)

Overall width 1970 mm (77.6 in.)

Overall height*

1865 mm (73.4 in.)*

1910 mm (75.2 in.)*

Wheelbase 2850 mm (112.2 in.)

Tread

Front 1640 mm (64.6 in.)

Rear 1635 mm (64.4 in.)

Gross vehicle mass 3350 kg (7385 lb.)

Maximum

permissible axle

capacity

Front 1630 kg (3593 lb.)

Rear 1950 kg (4299 lb.)

Drawbar load 140 kg (309 lb.)

Towing capacity

With brake 3500 kg (7716 lb.)

Without brake 750 kg (1653.5 lb.)

675

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Vehicle identification

 Vehicle identification number

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the legal identifier for

your vehicle. This is the primary identification number for your

Toyota. It is used in registering the ownership of your vehicle.

This number is stamped on the

top left of the instrument panel.

This number is also on the man-

ufacturer’s label.

ITY61C002

676

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Engine number

The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown.

1UR-FE engine

1VD-FTV engine

677

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Engine

Gasoline engine

Diesel engine

Model 1UR-FE

Type 8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke 94.0  83.0 mm (3.70  3.27 in.)

Displacement 4608 cm

(281.1 cu.in.)

Valve clearance

Automatic adjustment

Drive belt tension

Model 1VD-FTV

Type

8-cylinder V type, 4-cycle, diesel

(with turbocharger)

Bore and stroke 86.0  96.0 mm (3.39  3.78 in.)

Displacement 4461 cm

(272.2 cu.in.)

Valve clearance

Automatic adjustment

Drive belt tension

678

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Fuel

Gasoline engine

Diesel engine

Fuel type

EU area:

Unleaded gasoline conforming to European

standard EN228 only

Except EU area:

Unleaded gasoline only

Research octane number 95 or higher

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

93 L (24.5 gal., 20.4 Imp.gal.)

Fuel type

EU area:

Diesel fuel conforming to European

standard EN590

Except EU area:

Diesel fuel that contains 50 ppm or less of

sulfur

Cetane number 48 or higher

Fuel tank capacity

(Reference)

93 L (24.5 gal., 20.4 Imp.gal.)

679

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Lubrication system

*: The engine oil capacity is a reference quantity to be used when changing the

engine oil. Warm up and turn off the engine, wait more than 5 minutes, and

check the oil level on the dipstick.

 Engine oil selection

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in your Toyota vehicle. Toyota rec-

ommends the use of approved “Toyota Genuine Motor Oil”. Another

motor oil of matching quality can also be used.

Oil capacity

(Drain and refill — reference)

Gasoline engine With filter

7.5 L (7.9 qt., 6.6 Imp.qt.)

Without filter

7.1 L (7.5 qt., 6.2 Imp.qt.)

Diesel engine With filter

9.2 L (9.7 qt., 8.1 Imp.qt.)

Without filter

8.2 L (8.7 qt., 7.2 Imp.qt.)

680

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Gasoline engine

Oil grade:

0W-20, 5W-20, 5W-30 and 10W-30:

API grade SL “Energy-Conserving”, SM “Energy-Conserving” or

SN “Resource-Conserving”; or ILSAC multigrade engine oil

15W-40 and 20W-50:

API grade SL, SM or SN multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 0W-20 is filled into your

Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,

and the best choice for good fuel

economy and good starting in

cold weather.

If SAE 0W-20 oil is not available,

SAE 5W-30 oil may be used.

However, it should be replaced

with SAE 0W-20 at the next oil

change.

If you use SAE 10W-30 or a

higher viscosity engine oil in

extremely low temperatures, the

engine may become difficult to

start, so SAE 0W-20, 5W-20 or

5W-30 engine oil is recom-

mended.

Oil viscosity (0W-20 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-20 indicates the characteristic of the oil which

allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow

for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 20 in 0W-20 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil

when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity

(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is

operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

Temperature range anticipated before

next oil change.

Preferred

681

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

How to read oil container labels:

Either or both API registered marks are added to some oil containers

to help you select the oil you should use.

API Service Symbol

Top portion: “API SERVICE SN”

means the oil quality designation

by American Petroleum Institute

(API).

Center portion: “SAE 0W-20”

means the SAE viscosity grade.

Lower portion: “Resource-Con-

serving” means that the oil has

fuel-saving and environmental

protection capabilities.

ILSAC Certification Mark

The International Lubricant Speci-

fication Advisory Committee

(ILSAC) Certification Mark is dis-

played on the front of the con-

tainer.

682

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Diesel engine (EU area)

Oil grade: ACEA C2

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 0W-30 is filled into your

Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,

and the best choice for good fuel

economy and good starting in

cold weather.

Oil viscosity (0W-30 is explained here as an example):

• The 0W in 0W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which

allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow

for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 30 in 0W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil

when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity

(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is

operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

NOTICE

Using engine oil other than ACEA C2 may damage the catalytic converter.

Temperature range anticipated before

next oil change.

Preferred

683

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Diesel engine (except EU area)

Oil grade: ACEA B1, API CF-4 or CF

Recommended viscosity (SAE):

SAE 5W-30 is filled into your

Toyota vehicle at manufacturing,

and the best choice for good fuel

economy and good starting in

cold weather.

If you use SAE10W-30 or a

higher viscosity engine oil in

extremely low temperatures, the

engine may become difficult to

start, so SAE 5W-30 engine oil is

recommended.

Oil viscosity (5W-30 is explained here as an example):

• The 5W in 5W-30 indicates the characteristic of the oil which

allows cold startability. Oils with a lower value before the W allow

for easier starting of the engine in cold weather.

• The 30 in 5W-30 indicates the viscosity characteristic of the oil

when the oil is at high temperature. An oil with a higher viscosity

(one with a higher value) may be better suited if the vehicle is

operated at high speeds, or under extreme load conditions.

Preferred

Temperature range anticipated

before next oil change

684

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Cooling system

Capacity (Reference)

1UR-FE engine

With rear heater

17.0 L (18.0 qt., 15 Imp.qt.)

Without rear heater

14.2 L (15.0 qt., 12.5 Imp.qt.)

1VD-FTV

engine

With power

heater

With rear heater

18.0 L (19.0 qt., 15.8 Imp.qt.)

Without rear heater

15.2 L (16.1 qt., 13.4 Imp.qt.)

Without power

heater

With rear heater

17.6 L (18.6 qt., 15.5 Imp.qt.)

Without rear heater

14.8 L (15.6 qt., 13.0 Imp.qt.)

Coolant type

Use either of the following.

• “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

• Similar high-quality ethylene glycol-based

non-silicate, non-amine, non-nitrite, and

non-borate coolant with long-life hybrid

organic acid technology

Do not use plain water alone.

685

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Ignition system (gasoline engine only)

Electrical system

Spark plug

Make

Gap

DENSO SK20HR11

1.1 mm (0.043 in.)

NOTICE

 Iridium-tipped spark plugs

Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust gap when tuning engine.

Battery

Specific gravity reading at

20C (68F):

1.250  1.290 Fully charged

1.160  1.200 Half charged

1.060  1.100 Discharged

Charging rates

Quick charge

Slow charge

15 A max.

5 A max.

686

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Differential

Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” at the

factory.

Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil” or an equivalent of

matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please contact any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped profes-

sional for further details.

Automatic transmission

The fluid capacity is the quantity of reference. If replacement is necessary, con-

tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

Oil capacity

Front 1.90 L (2.01 qt., 1.67 Imp.qt.)

Rear 4.20 L (4.44 qt., 3.70 Imp.qt.)

Oil type and viscosity

Toyota Genuine Differential Gear Oil LT

75W-85 or equivalent

Fluid

capacity

(Reference)

Gasoline engine 11.5 L (12.2 qt., 10.1 Imp.qt.)

Diesel engine 11.8 L (12.5 qt., 10.4 Imp.qt.)

Fluid type Toyota Genuine ATF WS

NOTICE

 Automatic transmission fluid type

Using transmission fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” may cause

deterioration in shift quality, locking up of your transmission accompanied by

vibration, and ultimately damage the transmission of your vehicle.

687

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Transfer

*: Your Toyota vehicle is filled with “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” at the

factory. Use Toyota approved “Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF” or an

equivalent of matching quality to satisfy the above specification. Please con-

tact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional for further details.

Brakes

: Minimum pedal clearance when depressed with a force of 490 N (50 kgf,

110 lbf) while the engine is running

: Parking brake lever travel when pulled up with a force of 200 N (20.4 kgf,

45.0 lbf)

Oil capacity 1.45 L (1.53 qt., 1.28 Imp.qt.)

Oil type*

Toyota Genuine Transfer Gear oil LF or

equivalent

Recommended oil viscosity SAE 75W

Pedal clearance*

Left-hand drive

Right-hand drive

92 mm (3.6 in.) Min.

93 mm (3.7 in.) Min.

Pedal free play 1  6 mm (0.04  0.24 in.)

Parking brake lever travel*

5  7 clicks

Fluid type

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 3 or

SAE J1704 or FMVSS No. 116 DOT 4

688

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Chassis lubrication

Steering

Suspension (Vehicles with 4-Wheel AHC)

Propeller

shafts

Spider Lithium base chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Slide yoke

Molybdenum-disulfide lithium base chas-

sis grease, NLGI No.2 or Lithium base

chassis grease, NLGI No.2

Free play Less than 30 mm (1.18 in.)

Power steering fluid type

Automatic transmission fluid DEXRON

or III

Fluid type Suspension fluid AHC

689

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Tires and wheels

20-inch tires

18-inch tires

Tire size 285/50R20 112V

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Vehicle

speed

Front tire

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Rear tire

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

More than

160 km/h

(99 mph)

240 (2.4, 35) 260 (2.6, 38)

160 km/h

(99 mph) or

less

240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)

Wheel size 20  8 1/2J

Wheel nut torque 131 N•m (13.4 kgf•m, 97 ft•lbf)

Tire size 285/60R18 116V

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Area

Front tire

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Rear tire

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

EU area 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)

Except EU

area

230 (2.3, 33) 230 (2.3, 33)

Wheel size 18  8J

Wheel nut torque 131 N•m (13.4 kgf•m, 97 ft•lbf)

690

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

17-inch tires

Tire size 285/65R17 116H

Tire inflation pressure

(Recommended cold tire

inflation pressure)

Area

Front tire

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

Rear tire

kPa (kgf/cm

or bar, psi)

EU area 240 (2.4, 35) 240 (2.4, 35)

Except EU

area

230 (2.3, 33) 230 (2.3, 33)

Wheel size 17  8J

Wheel nut torque 131 N•m (13.4 kgf•m, 97 ft•lbf)

691

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Light bulbs

A: D4S high-intensity discharge

B: HB3 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs

D: H16 halogen bulbs

E: Double end bulbs

F: Single end bulbs

*: If equipped

Light bulbs W Type

Exterior

Headlights

Low beam

High beam

Front turn signal lights 21 C

Front fog lights

* 19 D

Rear turn signal lights 16 C

Back-up lights 16 C

Rear fog lights 21 C

License plate lights 5 C

Running board lights

* 3.8 C

Interior

Front interior light 8 C

Rear interior lights

With rear personal lights

Without rear personal lights

Front personal lights 8 C

Rear personal lights 8 C

Vanity lights 2 F

Door courtesy lights 5 C

Glove box light 1.2 C

692

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Fuel information

Gasoline engine

EU area:

Your vehicle must use only

unleaded gasoline conforming to

European standard EN228. For

optimum engine performance,

select unleaded gasoline with a

Research Octane Number of 95

or higher.

Except EU area:

Your vehicle must use only

unleaded gasoline. For optimum

engine performance, select

unleaded gasoline with a

Research Octane Number of 95

or higher.

Diesel engine

EU area:

Your vehicle must use only diesel

fuel conforming to European

standard EN590.

Except EU area:

Your vehicle must use only diesel

fuel that contains 50 ppm or less

of sulfur and has a cetane num-

ber of 48 or higher.

693

6-1. Specifications

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Fuel tank opening for unleaded gasoline

To help prevent incorrect fueling, your Toyota has a fuel tank opening that

only accommodates the special nozzle on unleaded fuel pumps.

 If you plan to drive in foreign countries

Low sulfur diesel fuel may not be available, so please confirm the availability

with your distributor.

 If your engine knocks

 Consult any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly quali-

fied and equipped professional.

 You may occasionally notice light knocking for a short time while acceler-

ating or driving uphill. This is normal and there is no need for concern.

NOTICE

 Notice on fuel quality

 Do not use improper fuels. If improper fuels are used the engine will be

damaged.

 Gasoline engine: Do not use leaded gasoline.

Leaded gasoline will cause the three-way catalytic converter to lose its

effectiveness and emission control system to function improperly.

 Diesel engine: Do not use a fuel that contains more than 50 ppm of sulfur.

Use of such a high sulfur fuel may damage the engine.

694

6-1. Specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

NOTICE

 Gasoline engine (EU area): Bioethanol fuel sold under names such as

“E50” or “E85” and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not be

used. The use of these fuels will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. In case

of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly

qualified and equipped professional.

 Gasoline engine (except EU area): Bioethanol fuel sold under names such

as “E50” or “E85” and fuel containing a large amount of ethanol should not

be used. Your vehicle can use gasoline mixed with 10 % max ethanol. The

use of fuel with more than 10 % ethanol content (E10) will damage the

vehicle’s fuel system. You must ensure that refueling is carried out only

from a source where fuel specification and quality can be guaranteed. In

case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another

duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Diesel engine (EU area): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold under

names such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount of

FAME should not be used. The use of these fuels will damage the vehi-

cle’s fuel system. In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota dealer

or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

 Diesel engine (except EU area): FAME (Fatty Acid Methyl Ester) fuel sold

under names such as “B30” or “B100” and fuel containing a large amount

of FAME should not be used. Your vehicle can use diesel mixed with 5 %

max biodiesel FAME (B5). The use of fuel with more than 5 % FAME con-

tent (B5) will damage the vehicle’s fuel system. You must ensure that refu-

eling is carried out only from a source where fuel specification and quality

can be guaranteed. In case of any doubt, ask any authorized Toyota

dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

695

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

6-2. Customization

Customizable features

Customizing vehicle features using the touch screen (vehicles

with navigation system)

Press “SETUP”.

Touch “Vehicle” on the “Setup” screen.

Touch “Vehicle customization”.

Touch the setting to be changed.

Change each setting and touch

“OK”.

If “OK” is not touched before

switching to another screen, any

changes will be lost.

A message indicating that the settings are being saved will

appear.

Do not perform any other operations while this message is

displayed.

Your vehicle includes a variety of electronic features that can be per-

sonalized to your preferences.

Programming of these preferences can be performed by any autho-

rized Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and

equipped professional.

For vehicles with the navigation system, it is also possible to cus-

tomize certain vehicle features yourself using the touch screen.

Some function settings are changed simultaneously with other functions

being customized. Contact any authorized Toyota dealer or repairer, or

another duly qualified and equipped professional for further details.

STEP

696

6-2. Customization

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Customizable features

Vehicle customization settings can be changed at any authorized

Toyota dealer or repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped pro-

fessional. For vehicles with the navigation system, some settings can

be changed using the touch screen.

Settings that can be changed using the touch screen

Settings that can be changed using the vehicle switches

Settings that can be changed by any authorized Toyota dealer or

repairer, or another duly qualified and equipped professional.

Definition of symbols: O= Available, — = Not available

Item Function

Default

setting

Customized

setting

Smart entry

& start sys-

tem

(P. 40)

Smart entry &

start system

On Off O — O

Smart door

unlocking

All the doors Driver’s door O O O

697

6-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Wireless

remote

control

(P. 56)

Wireless remote

control

On Off — — O

Open door warn-

ing function

(when locking the

vehicle)

On Off — — O

Unlocking opera-

tion

All doors

unlocked in

one step

Driver’s door

unlocked in

one step, all

doors

unlocked in

two steps

O—O

Power back door

operation

Push and

hold

One short

push

——O

Push twice

Off

Smart entry

& start sys-

tem

(P. 40)

and

wireless

remote

control

(P. 56)

Operation signal

(Emergency

flashers)

On Off O — O

Door lock

(P. 65)

Unlocking using a

mechanical key

All doors

unlocked in

one step

Driver’s door

unlocked in

one step, all

doors

unlocked in

two steps

O—O

Item Function

Default

setting

Customized

setting

698

6-2. Customization

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Power back

door

(P. 68)

Switch operation

Push and

hold

One short

push

——O

Operation signal Off On — — O

Power

windows

(P. 115)

Mechanical key

linked operation

(close)

Off On — — O

Mechanical key

linked operation

(open)

Off On — — O

Wireless remote

control linked

operation (close)

Off On — — O

Wireless remote

control linked

operation (open)

Off On — — O

Linked entry

function

Off On — — O

Item Function

Default

setting

Customized

setting

699

6-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Moon roof

(P. 119)

Mechanical key

linked operation

(open)

Off On — — O

Mechanical key

linked operation

(close)

Off On — — O

Linked operation

of components

when door key is

used

Slide only Tilt only — — O

Wireless remote

control linked

operation

(open)

Off On — — O

Wireless remote

control linked

operation

(close)

Off On — — O

Linked operation

of components

when wireless

remote control

used

Slide only Tilt only — — O

Linked entry

function

Off On — — O

Item Function

Default

setting

Customized

setting

700

6-2. Customization

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Item Function

Default

setting

Customized

setting

Illumination

(P. 467)

Time period

before the interior

lights turn off

15 seconds

Off

O—O7.5 seconds

30 seconds

Operation after

the “ENGINE

START STOP”

switch is turned

off

On Off — — O

Operation when

the doors are

unlocked

On Off — — O

Operation when

you approach the

vehicle with the

electronic key on

your person

(When the inte-

rior light switch is

door position)

On Off — — O

Sensitivity of the

ambient light sen-

sor used for dim-

ming the meter

lights etc.

Standard -2 to 2 — — O

Sensitivity of the

ambient light sen-

sor used for

brightening the

meter lights etc.

Standard -2 to 2 — — O

701

6-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

: The settings can be changed when the mechanical key linked operation of

the power window is set to ON.

: The settings can be changed when the wireless remote control linked oper-

ation of the power window is set to ON.

: The settings can be changed when the entry function linked operation of the

power window is set to ON.

Automatic

light control

system

(P. 225,

229)

Light sensor sen-

sitivity

Standard -2 to 2 O — O

Automatic High

Beam system

On Off — — O

Toyota park-

ing assist-

sensor

(P. 250)

Detection dis-

tance of the rear

center sensor

Far Near O — O

Alert Volume

(alert volume can

be adjusted)

3 1 to 5 O — O

Display setting

(when intuitive

parking assist is

operating)

All sensors

displayed

Display off O — O

Automatic

air

conditioning

system

(P. 354)

Switching

between outside

air and recircu-

lated air mode

linked to “AUTO”

switch operation

Auto Manual O — O

A/C Auto switch

operation

Auto Manual O — O

Eco Driving

Indicator

Light

(P. 185)

Eco Driving

Indicator Light

On Off — O O

Item Function

Default

setting

Customized

setting

702

6-2. Customization

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

 Vehicle customization

 If the Smart entry & start system is turned “OFF”, unlock door cannot be

selected.

 If the doors are not opened after unlocking and are then automatically re-

locked, a signal will be given if “Operation signal (Emergency flashers)” is

set to ON.

 When setting using the vehicle switches (vehicles with navigation sys-

tem)

When using the vehicle switches to set an item that can also be set using the

touch screen, the item displayed on the touch screen will not change imme-

diately.

If the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is first turned to OFF, the screen dis-

play will change once the “ENGINE START STOP” switch is turned to IGNI-

TION ON mode again.

 When customizing using the touch screen (vehicles with navigation

system)

Stop the vehicle in a safe place, apply the parking brake, and shift the shift

lever to “P”. Also, to prevent battery discharge, leave the engine running

while customizing the features.

703

6-2. Customization

Vehicle specifications

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Multi-information display (P. 218)

CAUTION

 During customization

As the engine needs to be running during customization, ensure that the

vehicle is parked in a place with adequate ventilation. In a closed area such

as a garage, exhaust gases including harmful carbon monoxide (CO) may

collect and enter the vehicle. This may lead to death or a serious health haz-

ard.

NOTICE

 During customization

To prevent battery discharge, ensure that the engine is running while cus-

tomizing features.

Available languages

English (UK), French, German, Spanish,

Italian, Russian

704

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

6-3. Initialization

Items to initialize

: Diesel engine only (except for Russia, Ukraine, Azerbaijan, Georgia,

Armenia, Belarus)

: If equipped

Item When to initialize Reference

Engine oil mainte-

nance data

After changing engine oil P. 528

Power back door

• After reconnecting or chang-

ing the battery with power

back door opened

• After changing a fuse with

power back door opened

P. 7 3

Multi-terrain Moni-

tor

After reconnecting or chang-

ing the battery

P. 312

The following item must be initialized for normal system operation in

cases such as after the battery is reconnected, or maintenance is

performed on the vehicle.

Index

705

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Abbreviation list ...................... 706

Alphabetical index................... 707

What to do if... ......................... 717

706

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Abbreviation list

Abbreviation/Acronym list

ABBREVIATIONS MEANING

4WD Four Wheel Drive

A/C Air conditioning

ABS Anti-lock Brake System

AHC Active Height Control Suspension

AI-SHIFT Artificial Intelligence Shift control

AVS Adaptive Variable Suspension

CRS Child Restraint System

DISP Display

ECT Electronic Controlled Transmission

ELR Emergency Locking Retractor

GVM Gross Vehicle Mass

HI High

INT Intermittent

KDSS Kinetic Dynamic Suspension System

LED Light Emitting Diode

LO Low

MPAC Maximum Permissible Axle Capacity

PCS Pre-Crash Safety

PWR Power

RDS Radio Data system

RSCA Roll Sensing of Curtain Shield Airbag

SRS Supplemental Restraint System

TRC Traction Control

VGRS Variable Gear Ratio Steering

VIN Vehicle Identification Number

VSC Vehicle Stability Control

707

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Alphabetical index

A/C

Air conditioning filter.............. 546

Automatic air conditioning

system (vehicles without

navigation system)..............354

Automatic air conditioning

system (vehicles with

navigation system)

AHC ........................................... 261

Active height control

suspension ............................261

ABS ........................................... 315

Active head restraint ................. 81

Active traction control............. 315

Adaptive Variable

Suspension ............................ 271

Air conditioning filter ..............546

Air conditioning system

(vehicles without

navigation system)

Air conditioning filter.............. 546

Automatic air conditioning

system ................................354

Air conditioning system

(vehicles with navigation

system)

Airbags

Airbag manual on-off

system ................................179

Airbag operating conditions ..147

Airbag precautions for your

child ....................................152

Airbag warning light .............. 602

Curtain shield airbag

operating conditions ...........147

Curtain shield airbag

precautions ......................... 152

General airbag precautions...152

Locations of airbags.............. 144

Modification and disposal of

airbags................................ 156

Proper driving posture .. 142, 152

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch................ 157

Side airbag operating

conditions ........................... 147

Side airbag precautions........ 152

SRS airbags.......................... 144

Alarm ........................................ 134

Antenna .................................... 384

Anti-lock brake system .......... 315

Armrest..................................... 499

Ashtrays ................................... 487

Assist grips .............................. 500

Audio system (vehicles

without navigation system)

Antenna ................................ 384

AUX port ............................... 417

CD player/changer................ 385

iPod....................................... 399

MP3/WMA disc ..................... 392

Optimal use........................... 415

Portable audio device ........... 417

Radio .................................... 381

Steering wheel audio

switch ................................. 418

USB memory ........................ 407

Audio/video system

(vehicles with navigation

system)

Automatic air conditioning

system (vehicles without

navigation system)................ 354

Automatic air conditioning

system (vehicles with

navigation system)

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

708

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Automatic High Beam .............229

Automatic light control

system .................................... 225

Automatic transmission

Automatic transmission......... 199

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 653

S mode..................................202

Auxiliary box ............................479

AUX port ...................................417

AVS ...........................................271

Back-up lights

Replacing light bulbs.............573

Wattage.................................691

Back door

Back door................................68

Wireless remote control key....56

Battery

If the vehicle has discharged

battery.................................658

Preparing and checking

before winter.......................335

Bluetooth

audio

(vehicles without

navigation system)................421

Bluetooth

audio

(vehicles with

navigation system)

Bluetooth

phone (vehicles

without navigation

system)................................... 437

Bluetooth

phone (vehicles

with navigation system)

Bottle holder............................. 477

Brake

Fluid ...................................... 687

Parking brake........................ 206

Brake assist..............................315

Break-in tips............................. 184

Brightness control

Instrument light control ......... 211

Care

Exterior ................................. 508

Interior................................... 511

Seat belts.............................. 512

Card holder .............................. 479

Cargo capacity......................... 333

Cargo hooks............................. 503

CD changer

* ............................ 385

CD player

*................................ 385

Center differential

lock/unlock switch ................ 272

Chains....................................... 335

Child restraint system

Baby seats, definition............ 158

Baby seats, installation ......... 167

Child seats, definition............ 158

Child seats, installation ......... 167

Installing CRS with ISOFIX

rigid anchor......................... 172

Installing CRS with seat

belts.................................... 168

Installing CRS with top

strap ................................... 174

Junior seats, definition.......... 158

Junior seats, installation ....... 167

709

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Child safety

Airbag precautions ................152

Battery precautions.......535, 661

Child-protectors.......................66

Child restraint system ...........158

How your child should wear

the seat belt ........................ 102

Installing child restraints........ 167

Moon roof precautions ..........122

Power window lock switch .... 115

Power window precautions ...118

Removed key battery

precautions ......................... 551

Seat belt precautions ............102

Seat heater

precautions ......................... 498

Child-protectors......................... 66

Cigarette lighter .......................489

Cleaning

Exterior..................................508

Interior................................... 511

Seat belts .............................. 512

Clock (vehicles without

navigation system)................484

Clock (vehicles with

navigation system)

Condenser ................................ 532

Console box .............................473

Cool box ...................................480

Cooling system

Engine overheating ...............663

Crawl Control ........................... 277

Cruise control .......................... 246

Cup holder................................ 475

Curtain shield airbags .............144

Customizable features ............695

Daytime running light

system.................................... 226

Defogger

Rear window ......................... 374

Side mirror ............................ 374

Dimension ................................ 674

Display

Crawl Control display............ 277

Multi-information display ....... 218

Shift position and shift

range .................................. 202

Trip information..................... 220

Toyota parking assist-sensor

display ................................ 250

Warning message................. 607

Do-it-yourself maintenance .... 517

Door courtesy lights

Door courtesy lights .............. 467

Wattage ................................ 691

Door lock

Back door................................ 68

Side door ................................ 65

Wireless remote control key ... 56

Doors

Door glasses......................... 115

Door lock..................... 40, 56, 65

Double locking system.......... 132

Side mirrors .......................... 112

Double locking system ........... 132

Driver’s seat belt reminder

light......................................... 604

Driving

Break-in tips.......................... 184

Correct posture ..................... 142

Off-road precautions ............. 329

Procedures ........................... 182

Winter driving tips ................. 335

Driving position memory .......... 91

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

710

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Eco driving ...............................185

Electronic key

If your electronic key battery is

discharged ..........................655

Emergency flashers

Switch ................................... 592

Emergency, in case of

If the electronic key does not

operate properly ................. 655

If the engine will not start ......651

If the shift lever cannot be

shifted from P ..................... 653

If the vehicle has discharged

battery.................................658

If the warning buzzer

sounds ................................601

If the warning light turns on... 601

If the warning message is

displayed ............................607

If you have a flat tire .....624, 638

If you lose your keys ............. 654

If you think something is

wrong..................................599

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls..................667

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ...................................668

If your vehicle has

to be stopped

in an emergency .................670

If your vehicle needs to be

towed .................................. 593

If your vehicle overheats.......663

Engine

Compartment ........................ 522

Engine switch........................ 195

Hood ..................................... 521

How to start the

engine................................. 194

Identification number ............ 675

If the engine will not start...... 651

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls ................. 667

Ignition switch ....................... 195

Overheating .......................... 663

Engine coolant

Capacity................................ 684

Checking............................... 530

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 335

Engine coolant temperature

gauge...................................... 208

Engine immobilizer system .... 127

Engine oil

Capacity................................ 679

Checking............................... 525

Preparing and checking

before winter....................... 335

Engine switch .......................... 194

711

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

First-aid kit holder ................... 503

Floor mats ................................ 501

Fluid

Brake.....................................687

Power steering......................688

Suspension ........................... 688

Washer..................................536

Fog lights

Replacing light bulbs.............573

Switch ................................... 236

Wattage.................................691

Four-wheel drive system.........272

Front fog lights

Replacing light bulbs.............573

Switch ................................... 236

Wattage.................................691

Front passenger’s seat belt

reminder light ........................ 604

Front position lights

Switch ................................... 225

Front seats

Adjustment .............................. 80

Driving position memory .........91

Front turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs.............573

Wattage.................................691

Fuel

Capacity ................................678

Fuel gauge............................208

Fuel pump shut off system.... 600

Gas station information.........720

If you run out of fuel and

the engine stalls..................667

Information ............................692

Refueling...............................123

Type ...................................... 678

Fuel door .................................. 123

Fuel filler door.......................... 123

Fuel pump shut off system..... 600

Fuses ........................................ 552

Gas station information .......... 720

Gauges ..................................... 208

Glove box ................................. 472

Glove box light......................... 472

Hands-free system

(for cellular phone)

* ............. 437

Hazard lights

Switch ................................... 592

Head restraints

Adjusting ................................ 96

Headlight cleaner..................... 245

Headlights

Automatic High Beam ........... 229

Daytime running light ............ 226

Replacing light bulbs............. 573

Switch ................................... 225

Wattage ................................ 691

Heaters

Heated steering .................... 493

Seat heater ........................... 495

Side mirror ............................ 374

Height select ............................ 261

Hill-start assist control............ 315

Hood ......................................... 521

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

712

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Hooks

Cargo hook ........................... 503

Tie-down hooks..................... 503

Horn ..........................................207

Identification

Engine...................................675

Vehicle ..................................675

Ignition

Engine switch........................ 194

Keys ........................................ 38

Ignition switch .......................194

Ignition switch.......................... 194

Illuminated entry system.........470

Indicator lights ......................... 213

Inside rear view mirror ............109

Instrument cluster light

control .................................... 211

Intercooler ................................532

Intrusion sensor.......................136

Interior lights

Interior lights ......................... 468

Switch ................................... 468

Wattage.................................691

Jack

Vehicle-equipped jack...........624

Jack handle ..............................624

KDSS......................................... 316

Keyless entry ............................. 40

Keys

Electronic key ......................... 38

If you lose your keys ............. 654

If your electronic key battery

is discharged .............. 549, 655

Ignition switch ....................... 194

Keyless entry .......................... 40

Key number ............................ 38

Keys........................................ 38

Mechanical key....................... 38

Wireless remote control key ... 56

Kinetic dynamic suspension

system.................................... 316

Knee airbags ............................ 144

Language

Multi-information

display ........................ 218, 607

License plate lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 573

Wattage ................................ 691

Light bulbs

Replacing.............................. 573

Wattage ................................ 691

Lights

Automatic High Beam ........... 229

Door courtesy lights .............. 467

Emergency flasher switch..... 592

Fog light switch ..................... 236

Hazard light switch................ 592

Headlights switch.................. 225

Interior light switch ................ 468

Personal light switch ............. 469

Replacing light bulbs............. 573

Turn signal lever ................... 205

Vanity lights .......................... 483

Wattage ................................ 691

Luggage cover ......................... 503

713

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Maintenance

Do-it-yourself maintenance... 517

Maintenance data ................. 674

Maintenance requirements ...514

Meter

Instrument cluster light

control.................................211

Meters ................................... 208

Mirrors

Inside rear view mirror ..........109

Mirror position memory ...........91

Side mirrors...........................112

Vanity mirrors........................ 483

Moon roof .................................119

MP3 disc ................................... 392

Multi-information

display .................................... 218

Multi Terrain ABS..................... 315

Multi-terrain Monitor................ 289

multi-terrain Select .................. 283

Odometer.................................. 208

Off road precautions ...............329

Oil

Engine oil ..............................525

Opener

Back door................................68

Fuel filler door .......................123

Hood .....................................521

Outside rear view mirrors

Adjusting and folding............. 112

Outside temperature

display .................................... 485

Overhead console....................474

Overheating, Engine................663

Parking assist sensor ............. 250

Parking brake........................... 206

Personal lights

Switch ................................... 469

Wattage ................................ 691

Power heater ............................ 373

Pollen removal mode .............. 366

Power outlet............................. 490

Power steering

Fluid ...................................... 688

Power windows........................ 115

Pre-crash safety....................... 323

Radiator .................................... 532

Radio......................................... 381

Radio Data system ............... 382

Rear air conditioning

system.................................... 368

Rear seat

Adjustment.............................. 83

Tumbling second seats........... 84

Tumbling third seats ............... 86

Rear step bumper ...................... 70

Rear turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 573

Wattage ................................ 691

Rear view monitor system

Rear window defogger ............ 374

Rear window wiper .................. 244

Replacing

Key battery............................ 549

Fuses .................................... 552

Light bulbs ............................ 573

Tires...................................... 624

Roll sensing of curtain shield

airbags off switch.................. 157

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

714

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Seat belts

Adjusting the seat belt...........100

Child restraint system

installation...........................167

Cleaning and maintaining

the seat belts ......................512

Emergency Locking

Retractor.............................102

How to wear your seat belt ...100

How your child should wear

the seat belt ........................ 102

Pregnant women, proper seat

belt use ...............................103

Reminder light.......................604

Seat belt pretensioners.........101

Seat heaters .............................495

Seats

Adjustment

precautions ........................... 82

Child seats/child restraint

system installation .............. 167

Cleaning................................511

Driver’s seat position

memory.................................91

Front seat adjustment .............80

Head restraint ......................... 96

Properly sitting in the seat.....142

Rear seat adjustment.............. 83

Seat heaters..........................495

Service reminder

indicators ..............................213

Shift lever

Automatic transmission......... 199

If the shift lever cannot

be shifted from “P” ..............653

Side airbags ............................. 144

Side mirror

Adjusting and folding............. 112

Mirror position memory ...........91

Side turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 587

Smart entry & start system

Entry function.......................... 40

Starting the engine................ 194

Spare tire

Inflation pressure .................. 689

Storage location.................... 624

Spark plug ................................ 685

Specifications .......................... 674

Speech command switch

* ..... 443

Speedometer............................ 208

Steering

Column lock release ............. 196

Steering wheel

Adjustment............................ 106

Audio switches...................... 418

Heated steering wheel.......... 493

Steering wheel position

memory ................................ 91

Stop lights

Wattage ................................ 691

Storage compartment ............. 503

Storage feature ........................ 471

Storage precautions................ 334

Stuck

If your vehicle becomes

stuck ................................... 668

Sun visors ................................ 482

Sunshade

Roof ...................................... 120

715

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Switch

DISP switch...........................220

ECT switch............................ 201

Engine switch........................ 194

Emergency flasher switch.....592

Fog light switch .....................236

Hazard light switch................592

Height select ......................... 261

Ignition switch .......................194

Light switches .......................225

Power door lock switch ........... 65

Power window switch............115

Rear window wiper and

washer switch .....................244

VIEW switch.......................... 289

Window lock switch............... 115

Wipers and washer

switch..........................238, 244

Tachometer ..............................208

Tail lights

Switch ................................... 225

Talk switch

* ............................. 443

Telephone switch

* .................. 443

Theft deterrent system

Alarm..................................... 134

Engine immobilizer system ...127

Tie-down hooks .......................503

Tilt sensor................................. 136

Tire inflation pressure ............. 542

Tires

Chains................................... 335

Checking............................... 539

If you have a flat tire ..... 624, 638

Inflation pressure .................. 542

Replacing.............................. 624

Rotating tires......................... 539

Size....................................... 689

Snow tires ............................. 335

Spare tire .............................. 624

Tools ......................................... 624

Towing

Emergency towing ................ 594

Trailer towing ........................ 339

Toyota parking assist monitor

Toyota parking

assist-sensor ......................... 250

Traction control ....................... 315

TRC ........................................... 315

Trip information display.......... 220

Trip meter ................................. 208

Turn signal lights

Replacing light bulbs............. 573

Switch ................................... 205

Wattage ................................ 691

Vanity lights

Vanity lights .......................... 483

Wattage ................................ 691

Vanity mirrors .......................... 483

Variable gear ratio steering .... 316

Vehicle identification

number ................................... 675

Vehicle stability control .......... 315

VGRS ........................................ 316

VSC ........................................... 315

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

716

Alphabetical index

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

Warning buzzers

Brake system ........................601

Open door .............................604

Seat belt reminder.................604

Warning lights

Anti-lock brake system..........602

Automatic headlight leveling

system ................................603

Brake system ........................601

Charging system ................... 602

Fuel level...............................604

Malfunction indicator lamp ....602

Master warning light.............. 605

Open door .............................604

PCS.......................................603

Power steering system .........603

Seat belt reminder light.........604

Slip indicator light..................603

SRS airbags..........................602

Unengaged “Park”.................605

Warning messages..................607

Warning reflector holder ......... 503

Washer

Checking ...............................536

Preparing and checking

before winter.......................335

Switch ...........................238, 244

Washing and waxing ...............508

Weight....................................... 674

Wheels ...................................... 544

Window glasses ......................115

Window lock switch.................115

Windows

Power windows..................... 115

Rear window defogger.......... 374

Washer ......................... 238, 244

Windshield wipers ................... 238

Windshield wiper de-icer

(vehicles without

navigation system)................ 376

Windshield wiper de-icer

(vehicles with navigation

system)

Wireless remote control key

Replacing the battery............ 549

Wireless remote control key ... 56

WMA disc ................................. 392

*: For vehicles with a navigation system, refer to the

“Navigation System Owner’s Manual”.

717

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

What to do if...

A tire punctures

P. 624

If you have a flat tire

The engine does not start

P. 651

If the engine will not start

P. 667

If you run out of fuel and the engine stalls

P. 127

Engine immobilizer system

P. 658

If the battery is discharged

The shift lever cannot be

moved out

P. 653

If the shift lever cannot be shifted

from “P”

The engine coolant temperature

gauge enters the red zone

Steam can be seen coming

from under the hood

P. 663

If your vehicle overheats

The key is lost

P. 654

If you lose your keys

The battery runs out

P. 658

If the battery is discharged

The doors cannot be locked

P. 6 5

Side doors

P. 6 8

Back door

The horn begins to sound

P. 134

Alarm

The vehicle is stuck in

mud or sand

P. 668

If the vehicle becomes stuck

718

What to do if...

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

The warning light or indicator

light comes on

P. 601

If a warning light turns on

Warning lights

P. 6 0 1 P. 604

P. 6 0 2 P. 604

P. 6 0 2

P. 6 0 2 P. 604

P. 6 0 2 P. 605

P. 6 0 3 P. 605

P. 6 0 4 P. 603

P. 6 0 3 P. 603

Brake system warning

light

Low fuel level warning

light

Charging system warn-

ing light

Driver’s seat belt

reminder light

Malfunction indicator

lamp

Front passenger’s seat

belt reminder light

SRS warning light

ABS warning light

Unengaged “Park”

warning light

Pre-crash safety system

warning light

Master warning light

Open door warning light

Automatic headlight

leveling system warning

light

Slip indicator light Power steering system

warning light

The warning message is

displayed

P. 607

If a warning message is displayed

719

What to do if...

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

720

LC200_OM_OM60L11E_(EE)

GAS STATION INFORMATION

Fuel filler door

P. 123

Auxiliary catch lever

P. 521

Tire inflation pressure

P. 6 8 9

Fuel filler door opener

P. 1 2 3

Hood lock release lever

P. 521

Fuel tank capacity (Reference) 93 L (24.5 gal., 20.4 Imp.gal.)

Fuel type P. 678

Cold tire inflation pressure P. 689

Engine oil capacity

(Drain and refill —

reference)

Gasoline engine L (qt., Imp.qt.)

With filter 7.5 (7.9, 6,6)

Without filter 7.1 (7.5, 6.2)

Diesel engine L (qt., Imp.qt.)

With filter 9.2 (9.7, 8.1)

Without filter 8.2 (8.7, 7.2)

Engine oil type P. 679

Toyota Land Cruiser V8 200 - 2013 Handleiding

Hulp nodig? Stel uw vraag in het forum

Misbruik melden

Product:

Spelregels forum

Abonneren

Ontvang uw handleiding per email

Stel vragen via chat aan uw handleiding

Uw handleiding is per email verstuurd. Controleer uw email

Er is een email naar u verstuurd om uw inschrijving definitief te maken.

U heeft geen emailadres opgegeven

Uw vraag is op deze pagina toegevoegd

Info